water treatment plant wtpfm facilities modifications · pdf filewater treatment plant ......

Water Treatment Plant WTPFM Facilities Modifications Project

City of Richmond, Virginia

PROJECT MANUAL October 2017

(do not outline client logo).

CITY OF RICHMOND

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC UTILITIES

WATER TREATMENT PLANT

WTPFM FACILITIES MODIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATION BOOK

RICHMOND PURCHASING SERVICES

DEPARTMENT OF GENERAL SERVICES

900 EAST BROAD STREET, ROOM 1104

RICHMOND, VA 23219-6131

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Table of Contents

Department of Public Utilities

City of Richmond, VA

TC - i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CITY OF RICHMOND

WATER TREATMENT PLANT

WTPFM – FACILITIES MODIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section

011100 – SUMMARY OF WORK

011110 – CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AND ENGINEER

012500 – CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE

012900 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

013100 – COORDINATION AND MEETINGS

013250 – PROGRESS SCHEDULE

013300 – SUBMITTALS

013350 – LIMITATIONS ON SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION

014220 – REFERENCES

014500 – QUALITY CONTROL

015000 – CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

016000 – MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

016550 – STARTING AND PLACING EQUIPMENT IN OPERATION

017220 – LINES AND GRADES

017400 – CLEANING

017420 – LEAD PAINT COATED MATERIALS MANAGEMENT

017450 – SHUTDOWNS AND TIE-INS

017830 – OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

017890 – CONTRACT CLOSE OUT

018200 – TRAINING

019000 – SPECIAL PROJECT PROVISIONS

DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

Section

(NOT USED)

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

Section

(NOT USED)

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY

Section

(NOT USED)

DIVISION 5 – METALS

Section

(NOT USED)




TC - ii

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

Section

061000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY

064023 – INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section

073150 – SLATE SHINGLES

076200 – SHEET METAL AND FLASHING

079200 – JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

Section

081113 – STEEL DOORS & FRAMES

083474 – ACOUSTICAL STEEL DOOR & FRAME ASSEMBLIES

085113 – ALUMINUM WINDOWS

087100 – DOOR HARDWARE

088000 – GLAZING

089000 – LOUVERS AND VENTS

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

Section

092216 – NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

092900 – GYPSUM BOARD

093000 – TILING

095113 – ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

096519 – RESILIENT FLOORING

096813 – TILE CARPETING

099113 – EXTERIOR PAINTING

099123 – INTERIOR PAINTING

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

Section

101423 – PANEL SIGNAGE

102800 – TOILET & BATH ACCESSORIES

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

Section

115213 – PROJECTION SCREENS

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

Section

122113 – HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION




TC - iii

Section

(NOT USED)

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

Section

(NOT USED)

DIVISION 21 – FIRE PROTECTION

Section

211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

Section

220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

221123 – DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

223300 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

224213 - COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES

224716 - PRESSURE WATER COOLERS

DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL

Section

230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

230548 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC

230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

230719 - HVAC PIPING AND DUCT INSULATION

230923 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC

232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

233113 - METAL DUCTS

233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

233713 - AIR DEVICES

237200 - AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT

238126 - VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMP




TC - iv

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

Section

260010 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

260051 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

260519 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING

260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES

260553 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

260721 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

260770 - TELEPHONE AND DATA CABLING

262416 - PANELBOARDS

262726 - WIRING DEVICES

262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Summary of Work



011100-1

SECTION 011100

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Definitions

B. Description of the Work

C. Plans and Specifications

D. Work Under Other Contracts

E. Contractor's Use of Site

F. Work Sequence

G. Owner Occupancy

H. Constraints

I. Time Provisions

J. Liquidated Damages

K. Protection

L. Boundaries

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. In addition to the definitions included in the General Conditions of the Contract,

the following words and terms, or pronouns used in their stead, shall, wherever they

appear in this Contract, be construed as follows, unless a different meaning is clear

from the context:

1. "Agents" shall mean an authorized representative of the City including but

not limited to the Engineer, Construction Manager, and other firms and their

partners, principals, members, and employees acting directly or through

duly authorized representatives.




011100-2

2. "Contract Work" shall mean everything expressly or impliedly required to

be furnished and done by the Contractor by any one or more of the Contract

parts except Extra Work, as hereinafter defined; it being understood that, in

case of any inconsistency in or between any part or parts of this Contract,

the Construction Manager shall determine which shall prevail.

3. "Extra Work" shall mean work other than that required either expressly or

impliedly by the Contract in its present form.

4. "Specifications" shall mean all of the directions, requirements and standards

of performance applying to the work, as hereinafter detailed and designated

as such, or which may be issued in an addendum.

5. "Addendum" or "Addenda" shall mean the additional contract provisions

issued in writing by the Owner prior to the receipt of bids.

6. "Project" shall mean the entire improvement of which the work to be

constructed under this Contract forms a part.

7. "Site" shall mean the designated area upon or in which the Contractor's

operations are carried on and such other areas adjacent thereto as may be

required. "Site" areas may include lands owned by or leased by the Owner

and rights-of-way acquired for the construction of the project.

8. Whenever in the Contract the words "required", "permitted", "designated",

"prescribed", and words of like import are used, they shall imply the

requirement, permission, designation, or prescription of the Construction

Manager; and "approved", "acceptable", "satisfactory", "in the judgment

of", and words of like import shall mean approved by, or acceptable to, or

satisfactory to, or in the judgment of the Construction Manager.

9. “Date of substantial completion” shall be the date as certified by the

Construction Manager when the construction of the work or a specified part

thereof is sufficiently completed, in accordance with the Contract

Documents, so that the work or specified part may be beneficially occupied

for the purposes for which it was intended. Occupancy of individual

structures, buildings, facilities, or the like, being constructed under this

contract, shall not constitute Substantial Completion unless expressly

provided for elsewhere in these documents.

10. "Prevailing Standard Time" shall be construed as the time being observed

in the City of Richmond on the respective days bids are received or other

documents issued or signed, Eastern Standard Time in the winter and

Eastern Daylight Time in the summer.




011100-3

11. "Final Completion": Date of final completion shall be the date as certified

by the Construction Manager when the construction of the work is complete

in accordance with the Contract Documents, such that no further work

remains to be done at the site or otherwise. The certification of final

completion shall serve as the date when the Contractor has fulfilled all

requirements for final payment as described in the General Conditions of

the Contract.

12. “Change Order” is a document which is signed by Contractor and Owner

and authorizes an addition, deletion or revision in the Work and/or

adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, issued on or after the

Effective Date of the Agreement.

13. “Claim” is a demand or assertion by Contractor for a specific adjustment of

Contract Price or Contract Time or both or other relief with respect to the

terms of the Contract.

14. “Construction Manager” is a person or entity designated as a construction

manager by Owner who provides professional management services, which

contribute to the control of time and the cost and quality of a public

construction project, and who performs those services concurrent with

architectural and engineering services rendered during the design and

construction phase of the Project. This term shall apply to the Owner when

the Owner acts as its own Construction Manager.

15. “Contract Price” are the moneys payable by Owner to Contractor for

completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as

stated in the General Conditions.

16. “Contract Time” are the number of days or dates stated in Agreement to; (i)

achieve Milestones, if any, and (ii) achieve Substantial Completion.

17. “Drawings” are that part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved

by Engineer which graphically shows the scope, extent, dimensions,

location and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor.

Drawings may either be bound in the same book as the balance of the

Contract Documents or bound in separate sets, and are a part of the Contract

Documents, regardless of the method of binding. Shop Drawings and other

Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so defined.




011100-4

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK

A. General: The Work to be done under this Contract includes but is not limited to

Architectural improvements to existing and new offices, conference rooms and

restrooms; and providing HVAC modifications; providing electrical upgrades; and

upgrading and integrating sprinkler systems:

1. The Facilities Modifications work generally includes the following:

a. Architectural, mechanical and electrical demolition work.

b. Providing flooring, window replacement, drywall partitions, doors,

acoustical panel ceiling system, cabinets and other related work.

c. Provide new lighting and receptacles.

d. Provide and connect smoke alarm system.

e. HVAC work as noted below.

f. Fire protection work as noted below.

2. The HVAC upgrades for the various areas in Plant No. 1 and Plant No. 2

generally includes the following:

a. Plant No.1 second floor; a new Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF)

heat pump system with associated indoor ceiling cassette and ducted

type fan coil unit, outdoor condensing unit, control, wiring, and

refrigerant piping will be provided to serve the area under

renovation. An inline supply air fan will provide fresh air

requirement directly to individual fan coil unit. In addition, the

conference roof will be provided with an energy recovery unit and

co2 sensor. Both proposed bathrooms will be provided with a ceiling

mounted exhaust fan. The bathroom with exterior wall will be

provided with an electric wall heater. New plumbing fixtures will be

provided to serve the two new bathrooms. In addition, the domestic

existing hot water heater will be relocated and a new mixing valve

will be provided.

b. Plant No.1 first floor: the new conference room in first floor will be

connected / provided with the main VRF system serving the second

floor. In addition an energy recovery unit with co2 sensor will

provided ventilation requirement to the conference room. The

existing office area is served by ceiling mounted air handling unit




011100-5

(recently been replaced). The existing ductwork will be slightly

modified and rebalanced to incorporate the new architectural layout.

c. Plant No.2; a new Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) heat pump

system with associated indoor ceiling cassette type unit, outdoor

condensing unit, control, wiring, and refrigerant piping will be

provided to serve the area under renovation. An inline supply air fan

will provide fresh air requirement directly to individual fan coil unit.

the new bathroom will be provided with a ceiling mounted exhaust

fan. New plumbing fixtures will be provided to serve the new

bathroom.

d. New fire protection system with associated floor control valve

assembly, piping, drain system, and sprinkler heads will be provided

for area of the renovation in plant Nos. 1 and 2.

3. The Electrical Equipment and Electrical Upgrades work generally includes

the following:

a. The new fire alarm control panel shall be provided and located next

to the existing fire alarm control panel, and be interconnected to the

existing fire alarm control panel.

b. The empty conduits and sleeve for communication cables shall be

provided to all floors and wall penetration with fire stopping. The

penetration location shall be coordinated with owner.

c. New panels shall be provided at Plant No.1 and No.2.

d. Lighting for all rooms and corridors shall be controlled by wall

mounted or/and ceiling mounted vacancy sensor(s) and wall

mounted manual switch(es). Battery backup emergency lighting

shall be connected to same room lighting circuits. Battery backup

exit lighting shall be provided per egress plan.

4. The Service Elevator Replacement work generally includes the following:

a. Installation of masonry walls on three (3) sides of hoistway.

Installation of new custom elevator and doors as described in the

drawings. Construction of closet for elevator equipment on the 2nd

floor. Infill of existing elevator opening with masonry matching

existing adjacent exterior.

b. New sump pump will be provided with associated drain piping.




011100-6

c. New fire protection system will be provided with dry type sprinkler

heads and floor control valve assembly to serve the new elevator.

d. Some of the existing piping shall be relocated to incorporate the

installation of elevator.

e. Elevator recall system shall be provided and programed per codes.

The recall devices shall be connected new fire alarm system.

f. Two telephones shall be provided per code requirements.

Associated cables and termination shall be provided per elevator

manufacturer requirements.

g. Elevator shall be 3 phase 480V. The overcurrent protection size

shall be coordinated with elevator supplier and to be provided per

requirements.

h. New elevator shall be provided in elevator machine room for loads

associated with the elevator.

i. The lighting level at the elevator lobbies, the elevator pit and the

elevator machine shall be met to the elevator safety requirements.

Adjust the lighting fixture locations in field to get the lighting

intensity requirements at those areas.

5. The Demolition, Removal and Disposal of Elevator Equipment and

Materials, work generally includes the following:

a. Removal of all elevator equipment in the designated area defined in

the drawings.

b. Disposing of all removed items.

c. Associated electrical disconnects, circuit breakers, wiring and

conduit for power and control, lighting, lighting control, fire alarm

devices and etc shall be removed.

6. Repair of Existing Slate Roof at Plants 1 and 2

7. Replacement of Existing Facia Boards at Plants 1 and 2

8. Replacement of Existing Gutters and Downspouts at Plants 1 and 2

9. Replacement of Existing Windows at Plants 1 and 2, at the locations shown

on the Contract Drawings.

10. Lead paint abatement and recoating of exposed steel beams and steel roof

support members within the exposed portions of the soffits of Plant 2.

B. The Work also includes:

1. Furnishing of all labor, material, superintendence, plant, power, light, heat,

fuel, water, tools, appliances, equipment, supplies, services and other means




011100-7

of construction necessary or proper for the performance and completion of

the Work.

2. Sole responsibility for adequacy of plant and equipment.

3. Maintaining the Work area and site in a clean and acceptable manner.

4. Maintaining existing facilities in service at all times except where

specifically provided for otherwise herein.

5. Protection of finished and unfinished Work.

6. Repair and restoration of Work damaged during construction.

7. Furnishing as necessary proper equipment and machinery, of a sufficient

capacity, to facilitate the Work and to handle all emergencies normally

encountered in Work of this character.

8. Furnishing, installing, and protecting all necessary guides, track rails,

bearing plates, anchor and attachment bolts, and all other appurtenances

needed for the installation of the devices included in the equipment

specified. Make anchor bolts of appropriate size, strength and material for

the purpose intended. Furnish substantial templates and shop drawings for

installation.

C. Implied and Normally Required Work: It is the intent of these Specifications to

provide the Owner with complete operable systems, subsystems and other items of

Work. Any part or item of Work which is reasonably implied or normally required

to make each installation satisfactorily and completely operable is deemed to be

included in the Work and the Contract Amount. All miscellaneous appurtenances

and other items of Work incidental to meeting the intent of these Specifications are

included in the Work and the Contract Amount even though these appurtenances

may not be specifically called for in these Specifications.

D. Quality of Work: Regard the apparent silence of the Contract Documents as to any

detail, or the apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any

Work to be done and materials to be furnished as meaning that only the best general

practice is to prevail and that only materials and workmanship of the best quality

are to be used. Interpretation of these specifications will be made upon this basis.

E. Compliance with Laws: Comply with all local, State and Federal laws, rules,

ordinances and regulations applicable to this Contract and to the work done

hereunder, Obtain all permits, licenses or other authorization necessary for the

prosecution of the work. The costs for all such permits shall be included in the




011100-8

contract price and no separate payment will be made therefore, except for permit

fees paid by the City for this project as noted in Section 019000.

1.4 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Plans

1. The Plans for the work to be done under this Contract bear the general title:

City of Richmond – Water Treatment Plant – WTPFM Facilities

Modifications

2. When obtaining data and information from the Plans, use figures in

preference to scaled dimensions, and large scale plans in preference to small

scale plans.

B. Supplementary Plans

1. When, in the opinion of the Engineer, it becomes necessary to explain more

fully the work to be done or to illustrate the work further or to show any

changes which may be required, plans known as Supplementary Plans, with

specifications pertaining thereto, will be prepared by the Engineer and five

paper prints thereof will be given to the Contractor.

2. The Supplementary Plans shall be binding upon the Contractor with the

same force as the Contract Plans. Where such Supplementary Plans require

either less or more than the estimated quantities of work, credit to the Owner

or compensation therefore to the Contractor shall be subject to the terms of

the Agreement.

C. Contractor to Check Contract Plans and Data

1. Verify all dimensions, quantities and details shown on the Plans,

Supplementary Plans, schedules, Specifications or other data received from

the Engineer, and notify him of all errors, omissions, conflicts, and

discrepancies found therein. Failure to discover or correct errors, conflicts

or discrepancies shall not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for

unsatisfactory work, faulty construction or improper operation resulting

therefrom nor from rectifying such conditions at his own expense.

2. The Contractor will not be allowed to take advantage of any errors or

omissions, as full instructions will be furnished by the Engineer, should

such errors or omissions be discovered.




011100-9

3. All schedules are given for the convenience of the Engineer and the

Contractor and are not guaranteed to be complete. The Contractor shall

assume all responsibility for the making of estimates of the size, kind, and

quality of materials and equipment included in work to be done under the

Contract.

D. Unforeseen Physical Conditions

1. Promptly notify the Owner and the Construction Manager in writing of any

subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site or in an existing structure

differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract

Documents. The Construction Manager will promptly review those

conditions and advise the Owner in writing if further investigation or tests

are necessary. Promptly thereafter, the Owner shall obtain the necessary

additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Construction

Manager and the Contractor.

2. If the Construction Manager finds that the results of such investigations or

tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions which

differ materially from those intended in the Contract Documents, and which

could not reasonably have been anticipated by the Contractor, a Change

Order shall be issued incorporating the necessary revisions.

E. Specifications

1. It is hereby agreed that failure by the Contractor to advise his subcontractors

and suppliers of the necessity to review the Specifications as a whole, and

not as individual sections, to determine the work required or to be supplied,

shall not constitute a basis for a claim for additional compensation or an

extension to the Contract completion time.

F. Intent

1. All work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not

shown on the Plans in their present form, or vice versa, shall be of like effect

as if shown or mentioned in both.

2. Work not specified in either the Plans or in the Specifications, but involved

in carrying out their intent or in the complete and proper execution of the

work, is required and shall be performed by the Contractor as though it were

specifically delineated or described.




011100-10

1.5 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. Work under this contract will require coordination with concurrent work at the

WTP. The concurrent work includes the following:

1. SCADA Improvements Project – The existing SCADA system for the entire

WTP is undergoing upgrades to existing equipment and associated systems.

Coordination with work activities under this project may be required.

2. Sedimentation Basin Improvements Project – Sedimentation basins 1

through 4 are undergoing upgrades to existing equipment and associated

systems.

1.6 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE

A. In addition to the requirements of the General Conditions, limit use of site and

premises for work and storage to allow for the following:

1. Owner occupancy and access to operate existing facilities.

2. Coordination of site use with Construction Manager.

3. Responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products under this

Contract.

4. Providing additional off site storage at no additional cost to Owner as

needed.

B. Noise: Contractor’s use of site shall limit noise levels to comply with current City

code requirements and any other specified requirement.

1.7 WORK SEQUENCE

A. Construct Work in stages to accommodate Owner's use of premises during

construction period and in accordance with the limitations on the sequence of

construction specified. Coordinate construction schedules and operations with

Construction Manager.

B. Coordinate Work of all subcontractors.

1.8 OWNER OCCUPANCY

A. Owner will occupy premises during entire period of construction in order to

maintain normal operations. Cooperate with Owner's representative in all

construction operations to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner usage.

B. Conduct operations so as to inconvenience the general public in the least. Comply

with Owner’s request to minimize impacts to the general public.




011100-11

1.9 CONSTRAINTS

A. The Contract Documents are intended to allow the Contractor flexibility in

construction of the Work, however, constraints described in Section 013350,

Limitation on Sequence of Construction shall apply.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 TIME PROVISIONS

A. Starting Work: Start Work within 10 days following the date stated in the Notice

to Proceed and execute with such progress as may be required to prevent delay to

other contractors or to the general completion of the project.

B. Unless the contract completion date is modified pursuant to the provisions of the

General Conditions, complete the work covered by this Contract in the number of

consecutive calendar days set forth in the Invitation for Bid. At all times, schedule

and direct the Work so that it provides an orderly progression to Substantial

Completion within the specified time for completion.

C. Milestone Dates: Complete the work no later than the dates given.

1. All Work and Contract Completion: Unless the date of completion is

modified pursuant to the General Conditions, all Work must be completed

within the time period set forth in the Invitation for Bid.

3.2 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

A. It is agreed between the parties that time is of the essence of this Contract.

B. The amount per day set forth in the Invitation for Bid is hereby agreed upon as the

liquidated damages for each and every calendar day that the time consumed in

completing the work exceeds the time allowed in accordance with the following:

1. In the event that the date for Substantial Completion for all the work occurs

after the work as bid was to be complete or the date to which such date has

been modified by Change Order:




011100-12

a. The Contractor agrees to pay the Owner liquidated damages, in the

amount per day set forth in the Invitation for Bid, for each calendar

day by which the Date of Substantial Completion exceeds the date

work as bid was to be complete or the date to which such date has

been modified by Change Order.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. During performance and until final acceptance, provide absolute protection of the

finished and unfinished work against any damage, loss, or injury. Take proper

precaution to protect the finished work from loss or damage, pending completion

and the final acceptance of all the work included in the entire Contract. Such

precaution shall not relieve the Contractor from any and all liability and

responsibility for loss or damage to the work occurring before certification of final

completion by the Owner. Such loss or damage shall be at the risk of and borne by

the Contractor, whether arising from acts or omissions of the Contractor or others.

In the event of any such loss or damage, repair, replace, and make good the work

without extension of time therefor, except as may be otherwise specified.

B. The provisions of this subsection shall not be deemed to create any new right of

action in favor of third parties against the Contractor or the Owner.

3.4 BOUNDARIES

A. Confine equipment, apparatus, storage of materials, supplies and apparatus of

workmen to the limits indicated by law, ordinances, permits, shown on the Plans,

specified or direction of the Owner.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Construction Manager and Engineer



011110-1

SECTION 011110

CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AND ENGINEER

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Definitions

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Whitman Requardt & Associates, LLP (WRA) , 9030 Stony Point Parkway, Suite

220, Richmond, Virginia, 23235, (804) 272-8700 who is referred to in the Contract

Documents as the Engineer, has prepared the Contract Documents for this Project.

WRA shall have the duties and responsibilities as set forth for the Engineer in the

Contract Documents.

B. The Project will be administrated by Construction Manager (CM) that will be

assigned to this project by the City. The CM shall have the duties and

responsibilities as set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for the

Engineer. The CM will work with the Engineer to resolve engineering questions

concerning the project.

C. The word “Engineer” in the Specifications (Division 1 through Division 17) shall

be replaced with “Construction Manager” except as noted in the following example.

The substitution of the word “Engineer” with “Construction Manager” is based

upon the responsibilities of the “Engineer” in that particular use. As an example, if

the intent is for the Contractor to provide notice to, or submit information to, or

coordinate with Engineer, (i.e. contract administration type issues) then “Engineer”

is to be replaced with “Construction Manager.” If the intent is for the Engineer to

approve substitutions, etc. (engineering type decisions) then the word “Engineer”

shall remain as “Engineer.”

D. The printing of the word “Engineer”, or any similar term, and the substitution of

“Construction Manager” shall not serve as justification for the Contractor not

following his contractual obligations. If there is any question or confusion as to

whether “Engineer” or “Construction Manager” is appropriate, then the Contractor

shall request the Construction Manager to make a formal determination.

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Construction Manager and Engineer



011110-2

E. The Owner or Engineer will not normally have direct contact or communication

with the Contractor, his subcontractors or suppliers. All communication from the

Contractor to the Owner or Engineer shall be through the Construction Manager.

To assure continuity between all parties, any communication, oral or written,

between Contractor’s personnel and either the Owner’s operation or maintenance

personnel or Engineer’s technical staff shall be deemed unofficial and non-binding

unless such communication is directed through the Construction Manager.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Change Order Procedure



012500-1

SECTION 012500

CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Changes in Construction

B. Extra Work

C. Emergency Work

D. Omitted Work

E. Change Order Procedure

1.2 CHANGES IN CONSTRUCTION

A. Construction Change Orders can be made to the Contract as described in the

General Conditions of the Contract.

1.3 EXTRA WORK

A. The Owner may at any time by a written order and without notice to the sureties

require the performance of such extra work as it may find necessary or desirable.

B. An order for extra work shall be valid only if issued in writing and signed by the

Owner, and the work so ordered shall be performed by the Contractor.

1.4 EMERGENCY WORK

A. In emergencies affecting the safety of persons or the Work or property at the site or

adjacent thereto, the Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from

the Owner is obligated to act at his discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury

or loss. He will give the Owner prompt written notice of any significant changes in

the Work or deviations from the Contract Documents caused thereby. If the

Contractor believes that additional work done by him in an emergency which arose

from causes beyond his control entitles him to an extension of the Contract

Completion Date or an increase in the Contract Price, he may make a claim therefor

as provided in the General Conditions of the Contract.




012500-2

1.5 OMITTED WORK

A. The Owner may at any time by a written order and without notice to the sureties

require the omission of such Contract work as it may find necessary or desirable.

B. An order for omission of work shall be valid only if signed by the Owner and the

work so ordered must be omitted by the Contractor. The amount by which the

Contract price shall be reduced shall be determined as follows:

1. By such applicable unit prices, if any, as are set forth in the Contract; or

2. By the appropriate lump sum price set forth in the Contract; or

3. By the fair and reasonable estimated cost to the Owner as mutually agreed

to by the Contractor and Construction Manager and approved by the Owner.

1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE

A. Initiation: Change order proposal

1. Initiated by Construction Manager or Owner: The Owner or the

Construction Manager may issue a Request for Proposal (RFP). The

Request will contain a description of the intended change with

supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications as applicable and the

projected time for accomplishing the change.

2. Initiated by Contractor: The Contractor may propose a change in the work

by submittal of a Change Order Request (COR) to the Construction

Manager describing the proposed change with a statement of the reason for

the change and the effect on the contract time and price, along with

supporting documentation.

B. Execution of Change Order Proposal:

1. When a Proposal is requested for a change in the Work, the Contractor shall

submit his proposal within 14 days following receipt of the Request for

Proposal. The Proposal shall state the increase or decrease, if any, in the

Contract Period and/or Contract Sum.

2. The Contractor shall explain the proposal in as much detail as requested by

the Owner.

3. Any decrease in Contract Sum on account of omitted Work will include

appropriate amounts for profit and overhead.




012500-3

4. The Owner and Construction Manager will review the Proposal and may

request additional information and documentation which the Contractor

shall provide promptly.

5. If the Owner decides to proceed with the change, it will issue a Change

Order for signature first by the Contractor and then by the Owner.

6. The Contractor will promptly complete the approved change in the Work

on receipt of the executed Change Order.

C. Costs: The cost of both additive and deductive changes in the Work shall be

determined, as follows:

1. Labor: Applied labor cost, crew foreman and general foreman performing

or directly supervising the Work on the Site. Also included are travel and

subsistence, but only in the extent incurred.

2. Insurance: Net premium for Worker's Compensation Insurance, taxes

pursuant to the Federal Social Security Act, payments required under State

and Federal unemployment laws.

3. Additional Materials: Necessary extra materials, delivered at the Site

including the actual cost of consumable supplies. Consumable supplies shall

not be determined by the percentage of cost basis.

4. Plant and Equipment: Rent for plant and equipment shall be at the rental

cost for rentals from an independent firm (i.e. a firm which is not owned in

whole or in part by the Contractor). If the equipment is owned by the

Contractor or rented from a firm in which the Contractor has an interest, the

rent shall be calculated in accordance with the applicable provisions and

terms of the current "Cost Reference Guide for Construction Equipment"

published by Dataquest based on the standard monthly rental rate.

5. Subcontractor Costs: Subcontractor's costs including subtier contractors

shall be determined by items 1 through 4 in the preceding subparagraphs.

Subcontractor overhead and profit shall be limited to the percentage

amounts stipulated in the bid regardless of the number of subtier

subcontractors.

6. Overhead and Profit: Plus percentage amounts stipulated in the bid.

7. During periods of downtime, the following conditions shall also apply:




012500-4

a. Payment for equipment will be on the basis of a maximum 8-hour

period during each 24 hour period.

b. No overtime will be included.

c. No compensation for subsistence will be included.

d. The rate of overhead and profit will be 10 percent.

e. No compensation for equipment overhaul, field repair and fuel

expenses shall be included.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Measurement and Payment



012900-1

SECTION 012900

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Measurement Authority

B. Schedule of Values

C. Application for Payment

D. Unit Quantities Specified

E. Schedule of Contract Items

F. Payment

G. Defect Assessment

H. Non-Payment for Rejected Products

1.2 MEASUREMENT AUTHORITY

A. Measurement: The Construction Manager will take all measurements and compute

quantities accordingly.

B. Assistance: Assistance to the Construction Manager in the form of necessary

equipment, and qualified personnel shall be provided by the Contractor as required

for taking measurements.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Approval of Schedule: Submit for approval a schedule of values for all the work

consistent with and generated from the cost loaded CPM schedule as indicated in

Section 01325.

B. Revisions: With each Application for Payment revise schedule to list approved

Change Orders.




012900-2

1.4 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. The Contractor shall submit to the Construction Manager an updated copy of the

cost loaded CPM schedule as a basis for monthly progress payments to the

Contractor. This updated schedule should be submitted to the Construction

Manager on or before the 25th day of each month.

B. When payment for stored materials is permitted, the Contractor shall submit with

the CPM schedule update a separate schedule for Materials Stored showing line

item, description, previous value received, value incorporated into the work and

present value. Accompanying paid invoices demonstrating proof of ownership shall

be provided in conjunction with any stored material for which the Contractor is

requesting payment.

C. The Construction Manager shall update the schedule based on the Contractor's

status provided in accordance with the schedule update requirements of Section

01325 and prepare for the Contractor's signature a partial payment request

consistent with the earned value of work as determined by the monthly CPM

schedule update.

D. The Contractor shall review and if acceptable execute the partial payment request

by signature of an authorized officer of the Contractor and return to the

Construction Manager for distribution to the Owner for payment. Should the

Contractor disagree with the partial payment request as presented by the

Construction Manager, the Contractor shall respond in writing giving reasons for

the areas of disagreement.

E. Retainage from Partial Payments: Retainage in the amount of five (5) percent shall

be deducted from the partial payments as stipulated in the General Conditions of

the Contract and as shown on the Partial Payment Request form.

1.5 UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED

A. Quantities: Quantities and measurements indicated in the Proposal are for bidding

and contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements supplied or placed in the

Work and verified by the Construction Manager and recorded in his daily report

shall determine the payment.

B. Actual Work: If the actual Work requires more or fewer quantities than those

quantities indicated, the required quantities shall be provided at the unit prices

contracted.

C. Units of Work: The intention of the unit prices is to provide a complete, functioning

unit which may include Work from several Specification Sections. All the Work




012900-3

which is required or which can reasonably be inferred to be required in a unit price

item to deliver a complete, functioning unit shall be included.

1.6 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACT ITEMS

A. Contract Item A-1: Mobilization and Demobilization

1. Description:

a. Under the Contract Item for Mobilization and Demobilization, the

Contractor shall provide all labor, services, specialists, material and

equipment for preparatory work and operations, including but not

limited to those necessary for the mobilizing and furnishing site

equipment, materials, supplies and incidentals; for the establishment

of all offices, buildings and other temporary facilities necessary for

work on the project; cost for prepaid bonds and insurance; and for

all other work and operations to be performed or costs incurred to

begin work on the various Contract Items.

b. The City reserves the right in case the Contractor defaults on the

Contract, to retain the use, or have used, the Contractor's plant,

equipment, tools, materials and other property for, and until,

completion of the work, in accordance with Section 7 of the General

Conditions of the Contract.

c. The Contractor is cautioned that the amount to be bid under this

Contract Item shall be as shown in the Bid Form.

2. Payment:

a. Cost of pre-paid bonds and insurance required for the Contract may

be reimbursed under this Contract Item. Proof of payment by the

Contractor for such bonds and insurance costs will be required if

reimbursement is requested prior to having 2 percent of the original

Contract amount, less the allowances, earned. The amount

reimbursed for prepaid bonds and insurance costs will be included

as part of any mobilization payments stipulated under the below

listed terms and there will be no extra or separate payment for these

items.

b. When the monthly progress payment estimate of the total amount

earned, not including the amount earned for mobilization, is 2

percent or more of the original Contract amount, less the allowances,

the total amount earned for mobilization shall be 35 percent of the




012900-4

Contract Item price for mobilization and this amount will be

included in the monthly estimate for payment.

c. When the monthly progress payment estimate of the total amount






d. When the monthly progress payment estimate of the total amount






B. Contract Item A-2: Architectural Improvements – Plants 1 and 2, complete, in-

place

1. Description:

a. Under the Contract Item for Architectural Improvements, the

Contractor shall provide all labor, services, specialists, materials and

equipment, and do all work for the construction and installation of

all interior and exterior architectural improvements in Plants 1 and

2. This Contract Item includes but is not limited to required

demolition and disposal, construction of new walls, ceilings, new

carpeting, cabinetry, doors and associated framing, painting and all

finishes as specified and shown on the contract drawings, removal

of existing and installation of new fascia, removal of existing and

installation of new gutters and downspouts, lead paint abatement,

priming and repainting the exposed steel soffit roof members for

Plant 2, removal and replacement of the EPDM roof section and

underlayment as required, and all other contract work not covered

by other Contract Items. The work includes all general, structural,

and architectural work complete and in place, together with all

appurtenant work as shown on Drawings, specified, not included in

other Contract Items, and directed by the Construction Manager.

2. Payment: Lump sum unit of measure and payment.

C. Contract Item A-3: Mechanical Improvements – Plants 1 and 2, complete, in place




012900-5

1. Description:

a. Under the Contract Item for Mechanical Improvements, the



all interior and exterior mechanical improvements in Plants 1 and 2.

This Contract Item includes but is not limited to required demolition

and disposal for existing HVAC systems, construction of new

HVAC systems and associated ductwork, system controls for new

HVAC systems, miscellaneous supports and structural work for new

HVAC systems, modifications and installations for new intake and

exhaust louvers, all plumbing and fire protection system

modifications as specified and shown on the contract drawings,

testing and startup of all equipment and all other mechanical

contract work not covered by other Contract Items. The work

includes all general mechanical work complete and in place,

together with all appurtenant work as shown on Drawings, specified,

not included in other Contract Items, and directed by the



D. Contract Item A-4: Electrical Improvements – Plants 1 and 2, complete, in place

1. Description:

a. Under the Contract Item for Electrical Improvements, the



all interior and exterior electrical improvements in Plants 1 and 2.

This Contract Item includes but is not limited to required demolition

and disposal for existing systems, construction of new electrical

circuits and associated conduits, miscellaneous supports and

structural work for electrical equipment, all lighting and associated

power modifications and installations, all conduit and conductors

for circuits, instrumentation, and communications, testing and

startup of all equipment and all other electrical contract work not

covered by other Contract Items. The work includes all general

electrical work complete and in place, together with all appurtenant

work as shown on Drawings, specified, not included in other

Contract Items, and directed by the Construction Manager.





012900-6

E. Contract Item A-5: Elevator Replacement – Plant 1, complete, in place

1. Description:

a. Under the Contract Item for Elevator Replacement, the Contractor

shall provide all labor, services, specialists, materials and


improvements necessary for the replacement of the existing service

elevator in Plant 1. This Contract Item includes but is not limited to

required demolition and disposal for existing elevator systems,

construction of new electrical circuits and associated conduits for

the elevator, miscellaneous supports and structural work for the new

elevator, all associated power modifications and installations for the

new elevator, all associated mechanical, electrical, and

instrumentation, testing and startup of the new elevator and

associated equipment. The work includes all general work complete

and in place, together with all appurtenant work as shown on

Drawings, specified, as necessary for the successful installation of

the new elevated, and directed by the Construction Manager.


F. Contract Item A-6: Slate Shingle Replacement – Plants 1 and 2

1. Description:

a. Under the Contract Item for Slate Roof Replacement – Plants 1 and

2, the Contractor shall furnish and place new slate shingles as

confirmed and ordered in writing by the Construction Manager.

Included in this item are disposal of existing roof materials, new

slate shingles, roofing cement, and like work not shown on the Plans

or specified. The work includes all labor, materials, equipment,

tools, and incidentals required to replace existing slate shingles at

Plants 1 and 2 as specified and/or ordered by the Construction

Manager.

b. The work and materials under this Contract Item shall conform to

the requirements in the contract documents.

2. Measurement for Payment: The quantity of roof replacement to be

measured for payment will be the actual installed replacement, measured in

place, as ordered and approved by the Construction Manager. All shingle

replacement measures placed outside the order measured, shall be at the

expense of the Contractor.




012900-7

3. The unit price per shingle shall include all supervision, labor, materials,

equipment and incidental items necessary for replacement of the existing

slate roof, but not limited to: removal and proper disposal of existing

materials; handling and placing of all materials, installation of roof cement

where needed, and any other incidental items required for proper

replacement of the slate shingles at Plants 1 and 2.

G. Contract Item A-7: Reattach Existing Slate Shingles – Plants 1 and 2

1. Description:

a. Under the Contract Item for Reattach Existing Slate Shingles –

Plants 1 and 2, the Contractor shall furnish and reattach existing

slate shingles as confirmed and ordered in writing by the

Construction Manager. Included in this item are disposal of

necessary roof materials, roofing cement, and like work not shown

on the Plans or specified. The work includes all labor, materials,

equipment, tools, and incidentals required to reattach the existing

slate shingles at Plants 1 and 2 as specified and/or ordered by the




2. Measurement for Payment: The quantity of shingle reattachment to be

measured for payment will be the actual installed shingles, measured in

place, as ordered and approved by the Construction Manager. All shingle

reattachment measures placed outside the order measured, shall be at the


3. The unit price per shingle reattachment shall include all supervision, labor,

materials, equipment and incidental items necessary for reattachment of the

existing slate roof, but not limited to: removal and proper disposal of

existing materials; handling and placing of existing slate shingles,

installation of roof cement where needed, and any other incidental items

required for proper reattachment of the slate shingles at Plants 1 and 2.

H. Contract Item A-8: Remove and Replace 1-inch x 2-inch Horizontal Nailing Strips in Plant

1 Roof, as Directed

1. Description:




012900-8

a. Under this Contract Item, the Contractor shall furnish and place new

1-inch x 2-inch horizontal nailing strips as confirmed and ordered in

writing by the Construction Manager. Included in this item are

disposal of existing roof materials, new nailing strips, roofing

cement and necessary fasteners, and like work not shown on the

Plans or specified. The work includes all labor, materials,

equipment, tools, and incidentals required to replace the existing

nailing strips at Plant 1 as specified and/or ordered by the




2. Measurement for Payment: The quantity of nailing strip replacement to be


place, as ordered and approved by the Construction Manager. Nailing strip

replacement measures placed outside the order measured, shall be at the


3. The unit price per linear foot of nailing strip replacement shall include all

supervision, labor, materials, equipment and incidental items necessary for

replacement of the existing nailing strips, but not limited to: removal and

proper disposal of existing materials; handling and placing of all new

materials, installation of roof cement or required fasteners where needed,

and any other incidental items required for proper replacement of the nailing

strips at Plant 1.

I. Contract Item A-9: Remove and Replace Vertical Plaster Lath in Plant 1 Roof, as Directed

1. Description:


vertical plaster lath in the Plant 1 roof as confirmed and ordered in

writing by the Construction Manager. Included in this item are

disposal of existing roof materials, new lath, support and installation

materials, and like work not shown on the Plans or specified. The

work includes all labor, materials, equipment, tools, and incidentals

required to replace the existing vertical plaster lath in the Plant 1

roof as specified and/or ordered by the Construction Manager.






012900-9

2. Measurement for Payment: The quantity of vertical lath removal and

replacement to be measured for payment will be the actual installed

replacement, measured in place, as ordered and approved by the

Construction Manager. Vertical lath measures placed outside the order

measured, shall be at the expense of the Contractor.

3. The unit price per square yard of vertical lath removal and replacement shall

include all supervision, labor, materials, equipment and incidental items

necessary for removal and replacement of the vertical lath, but not limited

to: removal and proper disposal of existing materials; handling and placing

of all new materials, installation of required fasteners or temporary

measures where needed, and any other incidental items required for proper

removal and replacement of the vertical lath in the Plant 1 roof.

J. Contract Item A-10: Remove and Replace Felt Underlayment in Roof of Plants 1 and 2, as

Directed

1. Description:


felt underlayment in the Plant 1 and Plant 2 roof as confirmed and

ordered in writing by the Construction Manager. Included in this

item are disposal of existing roof materials, new felt underlayment,

support and installation materials, and like work not shown on the

Plans or specified. The work includes all labor, materials,

equipment, tools, and incidentals required to remove and replace the

existing felt underlayment as specified and/or ordered by the




2. Measurement for Payment: The quantity of felt underlayment removal and

replacement to be measured for payment will be the actual installed

replacement, measured in place, as ordered and approved by the

Construction Manager. Felt underlayment measures placed outside the

order measured, shall be at the expense of the Contractor.

3. The unit price per square foot of felt underlayment removal and replacement

shall include all supervision, labor, materials, equipment and incidental

items necessary for removal and replacement of the felt underlayment, but

not limited to: removal and proper disposal of existing materials; handling

and placing of all new materials, installation of required fasteners or

temporary measures where needed, and any other incidental items required




012900-10

for proper removal and replacement of the felt underlayment in the roof of

Plant 1 and Plant 2.

K. Contract Item A-11: Remove and Replace 1-inch x 2-inch Vertical Sleepers in Plant 1 Roof,

as Directed

1. Description:


1-inch x 2-inch vertical sleepers as confirmed and ordered in writing

by the Construction Manager. Included in this item are disposal of

existing roof materials, new nailing materials, roofing cement and

necessary fasteners, and like work not shown on the Plans or

specified. The work includes all labor, materials, equipment, tools,

and incidentals required to replace the existing sleepers at Plant 1 as

specified and/or ordered by the Construction Manager.



2. Measurement for Payment: The quantity of vertical sleeper replacement to

be measured for payment will be the actual installed replacement, measured

in place, as ordered and approved by the Construction Manager. Vertical

sleeper replacement measures placed outside the order measured, shall be

at the expense of the Contractor.

3. The unit price per linear foot of vertical sleeper replacement shall include

all supervision, labor, materials, equipment and incidental items necessary

for replacement of the existing nailing strips, but not limited to: removal

and proper disposal of existing materials; handling and placing of all new

materials, installation of roof cement or required fasteners where needed,

and any other incidental items required for proper replacement of the nailing

strips at Plant 1.

L. Contract Item A-12: Repair and Patch Existing Pre-Cast Concrete Underlayment in Plant 2

Roof, as Directed

1. Description:

a. Under this Contract Item, the Contractor shall repair and patch

existing pre-cast concrete underlayment in the Plant 2 roof as

confirmed and ordered in writing by the Construction Manager.

Included in this item are disposal of existing roof materials,

approved repair and patch materials, support and installation




012900-11

materials, and like work not shown on the Plans or specified. The

work includes all labor, materials, equipment, tools, and incidentals

required to repair and patch the existing pre-cast concrete

underlayment as specified and/or ordered by the Construction

Manager.



2. Measurement for Payment: The quantity of repair and patch work to be


place, as ordered and approved by the Construction Manager. Repair and

patch measures placed outside the order measured, shall be at the expense

of the Contractor.

3. The unit price per square foot of pre-cast concrete underlayment repair and

patch in the Plant 2 roof shall include all supervision, labor, materials,

equipment and incidental items necessary for repair and patch of the

concrete underlayment, but not limited to: removal and proper disposal of

existing materials; handling and placing of all new materials, installation of

required fasteners or temporary measures where needed, and any other

incidental items required for proper repair and patch of the pre-cast concrete

underlayment in the roof of Plant 2.

M. Contract Item B-1: Allowance for Additional Electrical, Controls, and

Instrumentation Work

1. Payment for performing additional work shall be in accordance with base

bid item to perform additional work as authorized by the Owner and

Construction Manager in all areas as shown on the drawings and specified

herein.

2. Measurement shall be made in accordance with the base bid item or as

agreed by OWNER.

3. The allowance bid price shall include all labor, materials, tools, equipment

and services to performing Allowance for Additional Electrical and

Instrumentation, but not limited to additional: electrical equipment,

hardware, wiring, conduit, support systems, electrical relocation, testing

trainings, integration, programming, panels, drives, motors, breakers,

calibration, outlets, lights, screens, projectors, field modifications and any

incidentals required for the safe and proper operation of the systems.




012900-12

N. Contract Item B-2: Allowance for Additional Architectural, Mechanical and

Structural Work




herein.


agreed by OWNER.


and services to performing Allowance for Additional Architectural,

Mechanical and Structural Work, including but not limited to additional:

piping, valve and related modifications, architectural finish modifications,

repainting, structural elements and hardware, concrete repair and

placement, mechanical elements and equipment, piping, hardware,

walkways, handrails, valves, supports, hangers, fittings, seals, water stops,

finishes, drains, motors, associated electrical work platforms, training,

startup services, crack repair, roadway repair, construction joints, field

modifications relocation of appurtenances and any incidentals required for

the safe and proper operation of the systems.

O. Contract Item B-3: Allowance for Miscellaneous Roof Repairs – Plants 1 and 2




herein.


agreed by OWNER.


and services to performing Allowance for Miscellaneous Roof Repairs in

Plants 1 and 2, including but not limited to additional trim, all flashing,

underlayment, fasteners, nailers, snow guards, blocking, architectural finish

modifications, structural elements and related hardware, supports, hangers,

fittings, seals, water stops, finishes, crack repair, construction joints, field

modifications relocation of appurtenances and any incidentals required for

the safe and proper operation of the roof repairs that are not included in the

unit price items for roof repairs in Plants 1 and 2.




012900-13

1.7 PAYMENT

A. Payment Includes: Full compensation for all required labor, products, tools,

equipment, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection or application of

an Item of the Works, overhead and profit.

B. Final Payment: Final Payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on

the basis of the actual measurements and quantities accepted by the Construction

Manager multiplied by the unit price for the Work which is incorporated in or made

necessary by the Work. Final payment will not be made until submission of

Contractor’s as-built drawings, all training has been completed and other items

specified in Section 01789 have been completed.

1.8 DEFECT ASSESSMENT

A. Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to the specified

requirements.

B. If, in the opinion of the Construction Manager, it is not practical to remove and

replace the Work, the Construction Manager will direct that the defective Work

may remain or be partially replaced and the price will be adjusted to a new price at

the discretion of the Owner.

1.9 NON-PAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS

A. Payment will not be made for any of the following:

1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable.

2. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement.

3. Products not completely unloaded from the vehicle.

4. Products placed beyond the lines and grades of the required Work.

5. Contractor supplied products remaining on hand after completion of the

Work.

6. Loading, hauling and disposing of rejected products.

B. Cost Loaded Schedule: No payment requests will be accepted until an approved

Cost Loaded Schedule of Values as described in Section 01325, 1.7 is received

from the Contractor. Payment requests will not be accepted until the Cost Loaded

Schedule of Values has been updated by the Contractor for work in place.




012900-14

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Coordination and Meetings



013100-1

SECTION 013100

COORDINATION AND MEETINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Coordination

B. Preconstruction Conference

C. Progress Meetings

1.2 COORDINATION

A. The Contractor shall keep the Construction Manager and the Owner fully advised

as to his plans for carrying out the work and obtain the Construction Manager's

approval for all phases of his operations as hereinafter specified.

B. Coordinate scheduling and submittals to assure efficient and orderly sequence of

delivery of Contract work.

C. In accordance with the requirements of section Progress Schedule, the Contractor

shall prepare and submit a comprehensive schedule of his proposed sequence of

construction included under this contract for review by the Construction Manager.

D. The schedule shall be arranged to complete the work in phases and permit operation

by the Owner of completed phases or parts thereof.

E. The Contractor is cautioned that his schedule for certain areas of the work may be

affected by work included under other Contracts.

F. Work on this Contract shall be coordinated with the work of other contracts. The

Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager of the Contractor's planned

procedures for each specific alteration of work which may effect work under other

contracts before the alteration begins. The Contractor shall not begin any alteration

until specific permission has been granted by the Construction Manager in each

case and shall provide the Construction Manager with sufficient advance notice as

not to impact the Contractor's schedule or the work of the other contracts.

G. If it is necessary for the proper coordination and installation of work by Others, the

Contractor shall reschedule his operations so that his work will not conflict with

necessary operations of the other contracts. Such rescheduling shall not be cause




013100-2

for a time extension except as provided for in the General Conditions of the

Contract.

H. The Construction Manager shall be the sole judge of when the Contractor's

operations are causing interference with, or delay to, the work or operations of other

contracts, and his orders and instructions shall be carried out without delay.

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. General: Prior to commencement of Work at the Site, a Preconstruction Conference

shall be required. The meeting date shall be determined by the Construction

Manager. The Construction Manager will notify the attendees of the meeting date.

B. Attendance: The conference shall be attended by the following:

1. The Contractor

2. The representatives of principal suppliers and manufacturers as appropriate

3. The Construction Manager and his resident project representative

4. The Authorized Representatives of the Engineer

5. The Authorized Representatives of the Owner

6. Governmental representatives as appropriate

7. Others, as requested by the Contractor, the Owner, or the Construction

Manager

C. Delineation of Responsibilities: The purpose of the conference is to designate

responsible personnel, to establish a working relationship among the parties and to

identify the responsibilities of the Owner, Construction Manager and the

Contractor. Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for

handling such matters, established. The agenda will include:

1. Start Work Date

2. Submittal Procedures

3. Partial Payment Procedures

4. Maintenance of Records

5. Contractor's Request for Clarification

6. Schedules, Sequences and Maintenance of Facility Operations

7. Safety and First Aid Responsibilities

8. Change Orders

9. Use of Site

10. Equipment Delivery

11. Site Access

12. Work Hours

13. Contractor Safety Plan




013100-3

14. Discussion of Shop Testing, Factory Testing, Functional Testing, and

Performance Testing Requirements

D. Chair and Minutes: The preconstruction conference will be scheduled and chaired

by the Construction Manager who will also arrange for the keeping and distribution

of minutes to all attendees.

1.4 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Meeting Frequency and Format: The Construction Manager shall schedule and

chair progress meetings. Progress Meetings shall be held once every two or four

weeks or more frequently as determined by the complexity of the Project at the

request of the Owner, Construction Manager, Engineer or Contractor. The

following topics will be reviewed at a minimum at each meeting: Distribution

Coordination, Shop Drawing Review, Requests for Clarification, Requests and

Proposals for Changes, Change Orders, Non-Conformance Notices, Progress and

Schedule, Quality Control, New Business, Shut Downs, Tie-ins and System

Impacts, Facility Outages, Permit and Inspection Status, Testing and Startup

Activities. The Contractor may invite suppliers and subcontractors as appropriate.

Minutes of the meeting will be maintained by the Construction Manager and

distributed to all parties. Draft meeting minutes shall be distributed to all parties

within seven calendar days after each meeting. The first Progress Meeting shall be

coordinated with all parties at the preconstruction conference.

B. Meeting Minutes Review: The Contractor shall review and approve or propose

additions or corrections to the draft meeting minutes within seven calendar days

after he receives the draft meeting notes. The Construction Manager shall then

proceed to finalize the meeting minutes and shall distribute them to all parties.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION




013100-4

(NO TEXT FOR THIS PAGE)

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Progress Schedule



013250-1

SECTION 013250

PROGRESS SCHEDULE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Form of Schedules

B. Working Hours

C. Scheduling Responsibilities

D. Submittals

E. Network Requirements

F. Cost Loading

G. Progress of the Work

H. Schedule Updates

I. Causes for Extensions of Time

J. Abnormal Weather

K. Approval Requests

L. Adjustment by Owner

M. Failure to Adhere to Schedule

1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES

A. Prepare schedules in the form of Critical Path Method (CPM) as described herein.

1. Provide separate CPM networks (subnetworks) of activities for each

process or facility.

2. Each subnetwork shall be assigned a code and separate activity numbering

series.




013250-2

3. Interrelationships between subnetworks and any individual activities shall

be identified.

1.3 WORKING HOURS

A. Work Hours: Perform work between 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. on weekdays only,

except for specified after hours work. Do not perform work on Saturday, Sundays,

City holidays, or between 5:00 p.m. and 8:00 a.m. without written permission of

Owner. Extraordinary noise such as driving sheeting shall only be permitted

between 9:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. Comply with working hour restrictions required

by City traffic engineering department.

B. Holidays: The City observes a five-day work week and the following holidays:

New Year's Day; Martin Luther King's Birthday; Washington's Birthday; Good

Friday; Memorial Day; Independence Day; Labor Day; Veterans Day;

Thanksgiving Day; the Friday after Thanksgiving; Christmas Eve and Christmas

Day. The Contractor will not be permitted to work on these holidays unless

otherwise authorized by the Construction Manager.

C. Work After Hours: Night work may be established by Contractor as regular

procedure with written permission of Owner. Such permission, however, may be

revoked at any time by Owner if Contractor fails to maintain adequate equipment

and supervision for proper prosecution and control of work at night.

D. Written Requests for Work Outside of Normal Work Hours: Written requests for

work between 5:00 p.m. and 8:00 a.m. on weekdays, and for work on Saturday,

Sundays, and City holidays shall be made in writing at least two weeks prior to

needing the work outside of normal work hours. Written approval from the Owner

shall be obtained before any Work is conducted outside normal working hours.

E. The Owner will charge Contractor for costs of Owner’s, Construction Manager’s,

and Engineer’s personnel for work outside of normal work hours as described in

Paragraph D above. Costs will be charged as a Credit to the City on the next partial

payment credit. Cumulative costs will be included in a change order which will

show credit to the Owner. The Construction Manager will record Owner’s,

Construction Manager’s, and Engineer’s hours outside of normal work hours.

F. Emergencies: In case of an emergency which may require that work be done on

Saturdays, Sundays, holidays or longer than ten hours per day, the Contractor shall

request the permission of the Construction Manager to do so. If, in the opinion of

the Construction Manager, the emergency is bona fide, he will grant permission to

the Contractor to work such hours as may be necessary. Also, if in the opinion of

the Construction Manager, a bona fide emergency exists, he may direct the




013250-3

Contractor to work such hours as may be necessary whether the Contractor requests

permission to do so or not.

1.4 SCHEDULING RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Critical Path Method type construction schedule will be used to monitor job

progress and as a means to make monthly payments to the Contractor except for

Stored Materials which will be made in accordance with Section 6 of the General

Conditions of the Contract. Be responsible for providing all information concerning

the sequencing, logic and durations of all activities as well as providing the initial

CPM logic network diagram and tabular report data. Once the initial logic network

diagram is accepted, be responsible for providing monthly update information on

logic changes, percent complete, actual start and finish dates, and duration changes.

The Contractor will not be required to produce the monthly computerized printout

of the schedule updates. The monthly updating and report and plot generation will

be performed by the Construction Manager using information provided by the

Contractor.

B. From the Contractor 's initial schedule submittal and from information received at

the monthly schedule update meetings, computerized and dated tabular schedule

reports, updated network diagrams, and bar charts will be produced which will be

reviewed by the Contractor for accuracy and integrity. It shall at all times remain

the Contractor's responsibility to schedule and direct his forces in a manner that

will allow for the completion of the work within the Contract Time.

C. It should be clearly understood that the initial schedule and all update information

must be provided by the Contractor, and that this information is a representation of

the best efforts of the Contractor and his subcontractors as to how they envision the

work to be accomplished. Similarly, all progress information to be provided by and

through the Contractor must be an accurate representation of his, or his

subcontractor's, or supplier's actual performance. The schedule shall at all times

remain an accurate reflection of the Contractor's actual or projected sequencing of

work. Once accepted, adherence to the established CPM schedule shall be

obligatory upon the Contractor, and his subcontractors for the work under this

Contract. The Construction Manager may require the Contractor to revise the

schedule if, in his judgment, the schedule does not accurately reflect the actual

execution of the work, or is in violation of any provision of the CPM scheduling

requirements; and the Contractor shall revise the schedule as often as is necessary

to bring the course of performance of the work without additional cost to the Owner.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Provide all submittals, including the following, as specified in Division

1.




013250-4

B. CPM Schedule:

1. Within fifteen (15) calendar days after Notice to Proceed, submit six (6)

prints of the proposed CPM network diagrams, tabular reports for the entire

Contract duration and include both procurement and construction activities.

Sort the tabular reports by total float and activity number. They shall also

contain a predecessor/successor resource loading report, and project

calendar. This logic diagram shall be drawn as described herein and will be

the subject of a schedule review meeting with the Contractor, the Owner,

and Owner's representatives within two (2) weeks of its submission.

2. Submit network diagrams and reports, Primavera schedules in digital format

on CD.

3. If a review of the submitted CPM Schedule indicates a work plan which will

not complete the work within the Contract Time stated in the Contract,

revise the CPM Schedule as required and resubmit it until it is acceptable.

Failure to submit an acceptable schedule may, at the Owner's sole

discretion, be cause for the withholding of any partial payment(s) otherwise

due under the Contract.

4. Acceptance of the schedule shall not constitute a representation by the

Owner or Construction Manager that the work can be completed as shown

on the schedule.

C. Submittals Schedule:

1. In addition to the above scheduling requirements, submit a complete and

detailed listing of anticipated submittals during the course of the Contract.

Coordinate submittals with those of subcontractors and suppliers, and

identify each submittal as specified. Indicated the anticipated submission

date for each submittal along with the date on which its return is anticipated.

Review time for submittal shall be as provided for in Section 01330 -

Submittals. Durations shown for review shall be to share available float for

that path. Submittals and the review time, of which are on the critical path,

shall be clearly marked in red with the words "Critical Path" by the

Contractor at the time of submission.

2. Submit the Submittal Schedule within fifteen (15) working days from the

Notice to Proceed. The Submittal Schedule will then be accepted or revised

as required, and the Contractor will incorporate the dates and review

durations into his CPM Schedule.




013250-5

1.6 NETWORK REQUIREMENTS

A. The network diagram shall show the interdependence of activities, and the sequence

in which the work is to be accomplished as planned by the Contractor. The basic

concept of the network analysis diagram is to show how the start of a given activity

is dependent on the completion of preceding activities, and its completion restricts

the start of succeeding activities. A time scaled precedence format will be followed.

The detailed network diagram will be time scaled showing a continuous flow from

left to right.

B. The Schedule Activities shall be developed into three major groups:

1. Procurement Activities: Procurement Activities shall include at a

minimum:

a. Permits

b. Easements

c. Program(s)

d. Submittal Items

e. Approval of Submittal Items

f. Fabrication and Delivery of Submittal Items

Permits, easements, and fabrication and delivery items shall be tied

logically to the correct construction activity in the overall CPM construction

schedule.

2. Construction Activities: Construction activities will be physical work

activities that describe how the job will be constructed.

3. Testing, Startup, Training and Close-out: CPM activities for this group

shall include all work required to satisfy to appropriate specification

sections and meet the requirements of substantial and final completion.

C. Break the work into activities, with durations of one to twenty (1 to 20) working

days each, except for non-construction activities (such as procurement of materials

and delivery of equipment), and other activities which may require longer

durations. To the extent feasible, activities related to a specific physical area of the

project shall be grouped on the network for ease of understanding and

simplification. The selection and number of activities shall be subject to the review

of the Construction Manager.

D. Each activity on the network shall have indicated for it the following:




013250-6

1. A single duration, no longer than 20 days (i.e., the single best estimate of

the expected elapsed time considering the scope of work involved in the

activity) expressed in working days. City holidays and weather delays shall

be included. One critical path shall be shown for the schedule.

2. An activity I.D. number will be assigned to each activity. The I.D. number

will be numeric with a maximum of ten (10) digits.

3. A brief description of the activity will be included. If this description is not

definitive, a separate listing of each activity and a descriptive narrative may

be required.

4. Each activity (except for procurement activities) shall be cost loaded to

indicate the total estimated costs of the activity. No activity shall exceed

$60,000 except if an equipment item. Material costs shall be assigned to

delivery activities.

5. Each construction activity shall be man-hour loaded with the estimated

man-hours to be expended on each activity.

E. When preparing the CPM construction schedule, consider all construction sequence

and critical construction activities requirements.

F. Failure to include on a network any element of work required for the performance

of this Contract shall not excuse the Contractor from completing all work required

within the applicable Contract Time, notwithstanding Construction Manager's

network review.

G. A CPM schedule which shows a completion of any portion of the construction work

(not including testing and start-up) prior to the Contract Time dates may be

accepted but in no event shall be acceptable as a basis for a claim for delay against

the Owner by the Contractor.

H. The schedule calendar shall be a 5 day work week with holidays corresponding to

those observed by the City of Richmond's Department of Public Utilities.

1.7 COST LOADING

A. Schedule of Values:

1. Each activity for Work-in-Place on the construction schedule shall be

allocated a dollar value in accordance with paragraph 1.6.D.4 above. Each

activity's assigned cost shall consist of labor, equipment, and materials

costs, and a prorated contribution to overhead and profit. The sum of the




013250-7

activities costs shall be equal to the total contract price. Activities not

directly related to Work-in-Place including Stored Materials, preparation

and submittal of Shop or Working Drawings, or other required submittal or

equipment and material procurement shall not be cost loaded. In submitting

cost data the Contractor certifies that they are not unbalanced, and that the

value assigned to each activity represents the Contractor's estimate of the

actual costs of performing that activity. The listing of cost loaded CPM

activities will become the Schedule of Values, and will serve as the basis

for payments to the Contractor.

2. The accepted schedule of values shall represent a fair, reasonable and

equitable dollar cost allocation for each activity on the Contractor's

construction schedule.

B. Documentation: If it is determined that the cost data do not meet the requirements

for a balanced bid breakdown, provide documentation substantiating any cost

allocation on the cost data. Cost allocations shall be considered unbalanced if an

activity on the construction schedule has been assigned a disproportionate

allocation of direct costs, overhead and profit.

1.8 PROGRESS OF THE WORK

A. The work shall be started on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed, and shall

be executed with such progress as may be required to prevent delay to other

contractors or to the general completion of the project. The work shall be executed

at such times and in or on such parts of the project, with such forces, material and

equipment, as to assure completion of the work in the time established by the

Contract. Additionally, schedule and direct the work so that it provides an orderly

progression of the work to completion within the specified Contract Time.

B. Whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly CPM Schedule update

that delays to the critical path have resulted; and these delays are through no fault

of the Owner, or Owner's representatives, and hence, that the Contract completion

date will not be met, or when so directed by the Construction Manager, take some

or all of the following actions at no additional cost to the Owner.

1. Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as will

substantially eliminate the backlog of work.

2. Increase the number of working hours per shift; shifts per working day, or

days, per week; the amount of construction equipment; the forms for

concrete work; etc., or any combination of the foregoing to substantially

eliminate the backlog of work.




013250-8

3. Schedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrence of

accomplishment of activities, and comply with the revised schedule.

C. Submit for review a written statement of the steps to be taken to remove, or arrest

the delay to the schedule. If the Contractor fails to submit a written statement of the

steps he intends to take or fails to take such steps as required by the Contract; the

Owner may direct the level of effort in manpower and trades, equipment, work

schedule and overtime to remove or arrest the delay to the critical path in the

accepted schedule, and the Contractor shall promptly provide such level of effort

at no additional cost to the Owner. In addition, should schedule delays persist, the

Contractor's bond agent will be asked to attend meetings to update the schedule.

D. Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of this provision shall

subject him to, at the Owner's sole discretion, withholding, in partial or in total,

payments otherwise due the Contractor for work performed under this Contract.

The Contractor agrees that any withholding of moneys is not a penalty for

noncompliance, but is an assurance for the Owner that funds will be available to

implement these requirements should the Contractor fail to do so, since failure of

the Contractor to comply with these requirements shall mean that the Contractor

failed to execute the work with such diligence as to ensure its completion within

the time for completion.

1.9 SCHEDULE UPDATES

A. Monthly Meetings: A monthly Schedule Update Meeting will be held on the 25th

day of each month, or nearest day thereto, at the construction site to review and

update the CPM Schedule. The Schedule Update Meeting will be chaired by the

Construction Manager and attended by the Owner and the Contractor. Actual

progress of the previous month will be recorded and future activities will be

reviewed. The duration of activities and their logical connections may be revised

as needed. Decisions made at these meetings and agreed to by all parties are binding

with the exception that no contract completion dates will be modified without

formal written requests and acceptance as specified herein. In either case, provide

the following information for each update at a minimum:

1. Actual start and finished dates for all completed activities.

2. Actual start dates for all started but incomplete activities including

remaining durations and/or percent completes.

B. Withholding of Payments: Failure to provide specified updated information or

failure to attend progress meetings may result in the withholding of progress

payments.




013250-9

1.10 CAUSES FOR EXTENSIONS OF TIME

A. The Contract completion time will be adjusted only for causes specified in this

Contract. In the event the Contractor requests an extension of any contract

completion date, he shall furnish justification and supporting evidence per the

General Conditions, and provide a detailed CPM Schedule delay analysis based on

the most current updated CPM Schedule. The Construction Manager will after

receipt of such justification and supporting evidence, make findings of fact and will

advise the Contractor in writing thereof. If the Construction Manager finds that the

Contractor is entitled to an extension of the Contract completion date under the

provisions of the Contract, the Construction Manager's determination as to the total

number of days extension shall be based upon the current accepted and updated

CPM schedule and on all data relevant to the extension. Such data shall be included

in the next monthly updating of the schedule. The Contractor acknowledges and

agrees that actual delays in activities, which according to the CPM schedule, do not

affect any contract completion date shown by the critical path in the network, do

not have any effect on the Contract completion date or dates, and therefore will not

be the basis for a change in Contract completion time.

1.11 ABNORMAL WEATHER

A. The Contract Period will be adjusted to account for unusually severe weather

conditions which prevent or inhibit the Contractor's performance of the Work and

lengthen the critical path indicated on the Schedule (such unusually severe weather

conditions referred to herein as "Inclement Weather"). It is the intent of this

provision to offset the impact of Inclement Weather with unusually favorable

weather conditions which immediately precede and/or follow the occurrence of

Inclement Weather.

B. The Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager in writing of the occurrence

of Inclement Weather within two days after the onset of such Inclement Weather

and shall describe in reasonable detail the type of Inclement Weather encountered

by the Contractor and the Work thereby interfered with or interrupted.

C. This provision specifies the procedure for the determination of time extensions for

unusually severe weather. In order for the Construction Manager to award a time

extension under this clause, the following conditions must be satisfied:

1. The weather experienced at the project site during the contract period must

be found to be unusually severe, that is, more severe than the adverse

weather anticipated for the project location during any given month.




013250-10

2. The unusually severe weather must actually cause a delay to the completion

of the project. The delay must be beyond the control and without the fault

or negligence of the Contractor.

D. Schedule: The following Schedule of Monthly Anticipated Adverse Weather

Delays is based on National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) or

similar data for the project location and will constitute the base line for monthly

weather time evaluations. The Contractor's progress schedule must reflect these

anticipated adverse weather delays in all-weather dependent activities.

SCHEDULE OF MONTHLY ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER DELAYS

WORK DAYS BASED ON (5) DAY WORK WEEK

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

City of

Richmond 10 9 9 6 8 7 8 7 6 5 7 9

E. Records: Upon acknowledgement of the Notice to Proceed and continuing

throughout the contract, the Contractor will record daily, and submit to the

Construction Manager, the occurrence of adverse weather and resultant impact to

normally scheduled work. Actual adverse weather delay days must prevent work

on critical activities for 50 percent or more of the Contractor's scheduled work day.

F. Impacted Days: The number of actual adverse weather days shall include days

impacted by actual adverse weather (even if adverse weather occurred in previous

month), be calculated chronologically from the first to the last day in each month,

and be recorded as full days. If the number of actual adverse weather delay days

exceeds the number of days anticipated in the Schedule of Monthly Anticipated

Adverse Weather Delays, above, the Construction Manager will convert any

qualifying delays to calendar days, giving full consideration for equivalent fair

weather work days, and issue a modification in accordance with Section 01250 -

Change Order Procedure.

1.12 APPROVAL REQUESTS

A. From time to time, as the work progresses and in the sequence indicated by the

accepted progress schedule, the Contractor must submit to the Construction

Manager a specific request, in writing, for each item of information or approval

required of him by the Contract. These requests must be submitted sufficiently in

advance of the date upon which the information or approval is actually required by

the Contractor to allow for the time the Construction Manager may take to act upon

such submissions or resubmissions.




013250-11

B. The Contractor shall not have any right to an extension of time on account of delays

due to his failure to submit his requests for the required information or the required

approval in accordance with these requirements.

1.13 ADJUSTMENT BY OWNER

A. From time to time it may be necessary for the Contract schedule and/or Contract

Times to be adjusted by the Owner due to the effects of job conditions, acts or

omissions of other contractors not directly associated with this contract, weather,

technical difficulties, strikes, unavoidable delays on the part of the Owner or his

representatives, and other enforceable conditions which may indicate schedule

adjustments and/or completion time extension. Under such conditions, the

Construction Manager shall direct the Contractor to reschedule the work to reflect

the changed conditions, and the Contractor shall revise his schedule accordingly.

Schedule extensions affecting the Contract Times shall be granted only by the

Owner in writing. It is specifically pointed out that the use of available total float

in the CPM schedule may be used by the Owner and his representatives, as well as,

by the Contractor.

B. Without obligation to extend the Contract Times or any intermediate completion

dates set out in the CPM network, the Owner may initiate changes to the Contract

work that absorb float time only. Owner-initiated changes that affect the critical

path on the CPM network shall be the sole grounds for extending or shortening the

Contract Times. Contractor initiated changes that encroach on the float time,

identified in the CPM network, may be accomplished with the Owner's

concurrence. Such changes, however, shall give way to Owner-initiated changes

competing for the same float time.

1.14 FAILURE TO ADHERE TO SCHEDULE

A. If the Contractor fails to adhere to the schedule, the City may withhold partial

payments until such time as the Work is at least within 90% of the projected

schedule in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used




013250-12

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Submittals



013300-1

SECTION 013300

SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Description of Requirements

B. Submittal Procedures

C. Specific Submittal Requirements

D. Action on Submittals

E. Approval by the Contractor

F. Review of Shop Drawings by the Construction Manager and Engineer

G. Resubmittals

H. Forms

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS

A. This section specifies procedural requirements for Shop Drawings, product data,

samples, and other miscellaneous Work-related submittals.

B. Electronic Submittals: Submittals and other documents shall be made in electronic,

PDF, format to the Construction Manager.

1. Additional hard paper copies of pages larger than 11x17 inches shall be

submitted and include eight (8) copies which shall be in addition to the one (1)

electronic copy.

2. Detailed procedures for handling electronic submittals will be discussed at the

preconstruction conference.

3. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor from the Construction Manager

in electronic format.

C. Procedures concerning items such as listing of manufacturers, suppliers,

subcontractors, construction progress schedule, schedule of Shop Drawing

submissions, bonds, payment applications, insurance certificates, and schedule of

values are specified elsewhere.




013300-2

D. Work-Related Submittals:

1. Shop Drawings: Includes technical data and drawings specially prepared for

this Project, including fabrication and installation drawings, software

programming, diagrams, actual performance curves, data sheets, schedules,

templates, patterns, reports, storage instructions, design mix formulas,

measurements, and similar information not in standard printed form.

a. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project

is not considered a Shop Drawing.

2. Product Data: Includes standard printed information on manufactured

products, and systems that has not been specially prepared for this Project,

including manufacturer's product specifications, equipment storage, handling

and installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard wiring diagrams, printed

performance curves, mill reports, standard color charts, and recommended

spare parts.

3. Samples: Includes both fabricated and manufactured physical examples of

materials, products, and units of work, partial cuts of manufactured or

fabricated work, swatches showing color, texture, and pattern, and units of

work to be used for independent inspection and testing.

4. Miscellaneous Submittals: Work-related submittals that do not fit in the

previous categories, such as guarantees, warranties, certifications, experience

records, maintenance agreements, Operating and Maintenance Manuals,

workmanship bonds, survey data and reports, physical work records, quality

testing and certifying reports, copies of industry standards, record drawings,

field measurement data, and similar information, devices, and materials

applicable to the Work.

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Scheduling:

1. Submit for approval, a preliminary schedule of shop drawings and samples

submittals, in duplicate, within 15 days after the date stated as the date to

proceed at the Preconstruction Conference.

2. Prepare and transmit each submittal to Construction Manager sufficiently in

advance of scheduled performance of related work and other applicable

activities. Allow a minimum of 14 days for Construction Manager and

Engineer's review of normal submittals and all of a minimum of 30 days for

Engineer's review of software programming submittals.




013300-3

B. Coordination:

1. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

work. Coordinate each submittal with other submittals and related activities

such as testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and similar activities that

require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate submission of different units of interrelated work so that one

submittal will not be delayed by Construction Manager and Engineer's need to

review a related submittal. Construction Manager and Engineer may withhold

action on any submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until

related submittals are forthcoming.

C. Submittal Preparation:

1. Stamp and sign each submittal certifying to review of submittal, verification of

products, coordination of information within submittal with requirements of

the Work and the Contract Documents, and verification that product will fit in

space provided.

2. Stock or standard drawings will not be accepted for review unless full

identification and supplementary information is shown thereon in ink or

typewritten form.

3. A submittal shall not encompass more than one paragraph of the Specifications.

4. Submit one (1) electronic copy and eight (8) hard copies of all pages larger than

11x17 niches for all submittals and resubmittals accompanied by a letter of

transmittal. The form of the letter of transmittal which shall be used is as shown

at the end of this section. The letter of transmittal shall contain the following

information.

a. Identification of the Contractor, subcontractor or supplier.

b. Project title, project number and division, and contract number.

c. Submittal number comprised of specification chapter number,

paragraph number and suffix.

d. Drawing sheet, and detail number as appropriate.

e. Contractor's stamp or certification the products have been reviewed and

are in accordance with the requirements of the Work and the Contract

Documents.




013300-4

f. Listing of variations from Contract Documents and any limitations

which may be detrimental to the Work.

5. Shop Drawing Numbering:

a. All shop drawing submittals shall be numbered as follows:

(A) - (B) __

(Specification Section No.) (Consecutive No. / Submittal Rev.)

where:

(A) = Specification Section Number

(B) = Consecutive submittal number for the specification section

number listed in (A) with an alphabetic suffix identifying the

revision number.

Example: 01300-001A - indicates the initial submission of

submittal number 001 for Specification

Section 01300.

01300-001B - indicates the first revision of submittal

number 001 for Specification Section

01300.

01300-002A - indicated the initial submission of

submittal number 002 for Specification

section 01300.

b. When an item is resubmitted for any reason, transmit under a new letter

of transmittal and with the same submittal number indicated revised by

an alphabetic suffix. List the previous transmittal number and date.

D. Resubmittal Preparation:

1. Comply with the requirements described in Submittal Preparation. In addition:

a. Make any corrections or changes in submittals required by

Construction Manager and Engineer's notations on returned submittal.

b. Respond to Engineer's notations:

(1) On the transmittal or on a separate page attached to Contractor's

resubmission transmittal, answer or acknowledge in writing all

notations or questions indicated by Construction Manager and

Engineer on Construction Manager and Engineer's transmittal

form returning review submission to Contractor.




013300-5

(2) Identify each response by question or notation number

established by Construction Manager and Engineer.

(3) If Contractor does not respond to each notation or question,

resubmission will be returned without action by Construction

Manager and Engineer until Construction Manager and

Contractor provides a written response to all Engineer's

notations or questions.

1.4 SPECIFIC SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Specific submittals required for individual elements of work are specified in the

individual Specification sections. Except as otherwise indicated in Specification

sections, comply with requirements specified herein for each indicated type of

submittal.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit newly prepared information, with graphic information at accurate scale.

Indicate name of manufacturer or supplier (firm name). Show dimensions and

clearly note which are based on field measurement; identify materials and

products which are included in the Work; identify revisions. Indicate

compliance with standards and notation of coordination requirements with

other work. Highlight, encircle or otherwise indicate variations from Contract

Documents or previous submittals.

2. Include on each drawing or page:

a. Submittal date and revision dates.

b. Project name, division number and descriptions.

c. Detailed specifications section number and page number.

d. Identification of equipment, product or material.

e. Name of Contractor and Subcontractor.

f. Name of Supplier and Manufacturer.

g. Standards or Industry Specification references.

h. Identification of deviations from the Contract Documents.




013300-6

i. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, dated and certifying to review

of submittal, certification of field measurements and compliance with

Contract.

j. Physical location and location relative to other connected or attached

material at which the equipment or materials are to be installed.

3. Distribution:

a. Do not proceed with fabrication of equipment until copy of applicable

product data showing only approved information is in possession of

installer.

C. Miscellaneous Submittals:

1. Inspection and Test Reports:

a. Classify each inspection and test report as being either "Shop

Drawings" or "product data", depending on whether report is specially

prepared for Project or standard publication of workmanship control

testing at point of production. Process inspection and test reports

accordingly.

2. Guarantees, Warranties, Maintenance Agreements, and Workmanship Bonds:

a. Refer to Specification sections for specific requirements. Submittal is

final when returned by Construction Manager marked "Approved" or

"Approved as Noted".

b. Provide copies where required for maintenance data.

3. Certifications:

a. Refer to Specification sections for specific requirement on submittal of

certifications. Certifications are submitted for review of conformance

with specified requirements and information. Submittal is final when

returned by Construction Manager marked "Approved". Include copies

of all certifications in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

4. Closeout Submittals:

a. Refer to Specification sections and section titled "Contract Close Out"

for specific requirements on submittal of closeout information.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:




013300-7

1. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with section titled

"Operation and Maintenance Manuals".

E. General Distribution:

1. Unless required elsewhere, provide distribution of submittals to subcontractors,

suppliers, governing authorities, and others as necessary for proper

performance of work.

1.5 ACTION ON SUBMITTALS

A. Engineer's Action:

1. General: Except for submittals for record and similar purposes, where action

and return on submittals are required or requested, Engineer will review each

submittal, mark with appropriate action, and return. Where submittal must be

held for coordination, Engineer will also advise Contractor without delay.

Engineer will review each submittal with uniform, self-explanatory action,

appropriately marked on the submittal transmittal form.

2. Action:

a. Approved: Where submittals are marked "Approved", Work covered

by submittal may proceed provided it complies with contract

documents. Acceptance of Work will depend upon that compliance.

b. Approved Subject to Corrections Noted: When submittals are marked

"Approved Subject to Corrections Noted", Work covered by submittal

may proceed provided it complies with both Engineer's notations or

corrections on submittal and with Contract Documents. Acceptance of

Work will depend on that compliance.

c. Revise and Resubmit: When submittals are marked "Revise and

Resubmit", do not proceed with Work covered by submittal. Do not

permit Work covered by submittal to be used at Project site or

elsewhere where Work is in progress. Revise submittal or prepare new

submittal in accordance with Engineer's notations in accordance with

this section. Resubmit submittal without delay. Repeat if necessary to

obtain different action marking. Any additional time necessary to make

corrections to the submittals, or loss of materials, equipment and time

of manufacturing, or labor costs, or any other costs of any nature as a

direct consequence of the non-conformity of the Contractor's document

or non-compliance with the specifications, shall not be cause for

extension of contract time or increase to the Contract cost.




013300-8

d. Not Reviewed: Submittals marked “Not Reviewed” are not needed and

is being returned without being reviewed.

e. For Information Only: Submittals marked "For Information Only" do

not require further action unless noted otherwise on submittal. Such

submittals include guarantees, warranties, maintenance agreements,

workmanship bonds, and calculations by a licensed professional

engineer.

1.6 APPROVAL BY THE CONTRACTOR

A. The Contractor shall check and approve all shop drawings before transmitting them to

the Construction Manager to determine that they comply with the requirements of the

Contract Documents. Drawings which are not complete or not in compliance with the

Contract Documents shall not be submitted. All shop drawing submittals, regardless of

origin, shall be stamped with the approval of the Contractor and identified with the

Contractor's name and references to applicable specification paragraphs and Contract

Drawings. Each shop drawing submittal shall indicate the intended use of the item in

the Work. When catalog pages are submitted, applicable items shall be clearly

identified. The current revision, issue number, and date shall be indicated on all shop

drawings and other descriptive data. The Contractor's stamp of approval shall constitute

a representation to the Owner, the Construction Manager, and the Engineer that the

Contractor accepts full responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities,

dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data;

that he has reviewed or coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the Work

and the Contract Documents; and that the submittal fully meets the requirements of the

Contract Documents.

1.7 REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS BY THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AND

ENGINEER

A. Deviations from Contract Requirements: If the shop drawings show deviations from

the Contract requirements, the Contractor shall make specific mention thereof as

previously specified in this Section. Review of such submittals shall not constitute

approval of the deviation unless the deviations are identified. Review of the shop

drawings shall constitute review of the subject matter thereof only and not of any

structure, material, equipment, or apparatus shown or indicated. Such submittals shall,

as pertinent to the deviation, indicate essential details of all changes proposed by the

Contractor (including modifications to other facilities that may be a result of the

deviation) and all required piping and wiring diagrams, all in accordance with the

General Requirements.

B. Completeness of Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall accept full responsibility for

the completeness of each submittal, and, in the case of a resubmittal, shall verify that

all exceptions previously noted by the Engineer have been taken into account. Costs

associated with the review by the Engineer of any third and subsequent submittals shall




013300-9

be borne by the Contractor which may be deducted from any progress payments due

the Contractor by the Owner.

C. Accuracy of Drawings: The review of shop drawings will be general and shall not

relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the accuracy of such drawings, or for the

furnishing of materials or Work required by the Contract and not indicated on the shop

drawings. Approval is intended on for compliance with the information given in the

Contract Documents. The Contractor is also responsible for information that pertains

solely to the fabrication processes.

1.8 RESUBMITTALS

A. Resubmittals Within 20 Days: Resubmittals shall be made within 20 days of the date

of the Construction Manager transmittal returning the material to be modified or

corrected, unless within 7 days the Contractor submits an acceptable request for an

extension of the stipulated time period, listing the reasons the resubmittal cannot be

completed within that time.

B. Additional Resubmittals: Any need for more than one resubmittal or any other delay

in obtaining the Engineer's review of submittals will not entitle the Contractor to an

extension of time unless a delay of the Work is directly caused by an authorized change

in the Work or by the Engineer's failure to return any submittal.

1.9 FORMS

A. An example of the Contractor Submittal Form is furnished at the end of this section

and will be provided to the Contractor in electronic format.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

013300-10

CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM

TO: SITE:

PROJECT NAME:

SPEC. REF. NO.

ATTN: PLAN REF. NO.

SYSTEM:

FROM: SUBCONTRACTOR:

SUPPLIER:

DATE:

1. The following submittals are forwarded for your review:

No. of

Repros/Copies Manufacturer Description Dwg. No. Date

/

/

/

/

/

2. Will item submitted for review fit in space provided in the Contract Documents? ______ Yes ______ No

3. Has work indicated in this submittal been

coordinated with all trades: ______ Yes ______ No

4. Is work by all trades being provided as

necessary to accommodate this submittal? ______ Yes ______ No

5. Contractor has approved submittal and has

affixed his certification stamp? ______ Yes ______ No

6. Contractor's description and justification for deviations from Contract Documents. (Use additional sheet, if necessary)

7. Remarks:

Signature:

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Limitations on Sequence of Construction



013350-1

SECTION 013350

LIMITATIONS ON SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Operation of Existing Facilities

B. Limitations of Sequence of Construction

C. Work Completion Phases

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 013250 - Progress Schedule

1.3 OPERATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

A. The work shall be so conducted that the existing facilities will be maintained in full

operation at all times except for operation interruptions provided for under this section.

B. The Contractor shall keep the Construction Manager fully advised as to his plans for

carrying out the work and obtain the Construction Manager's approval for all phases of

his operations as hereinafter specified.

C. It is mutually agreed that the existing facilities shall not be shut down.

D. Any temporary structures, connections, piping, and other work necessary to maintain

service during the construction period shall be made as a part of the work.

E. All work shall be performed to avoid damage to existing structures and equipment.

Before starting work on any modifications to existing facilities, the Contractor shall

submit a schedule to the Construction Manager for approval, comprising a detailed

sequence of operations for these modifications which demonstrates that operation of

these existing facilities will be maintained. All construction shall be in accordance with

the approved schedule. At no time shall the service performed by any operating system,

pipeline, equipment or structures be interrupted from providing its intended operation,

function and service without specific prior approval of the Construction Manager.

F. Temporary facilities and equipment shall be provided as required and directed to

maintain pipelines, equipment, systems, processes, auxiliaries, appurtenances and

structures in service. Any temporary work not required after completion of the work

shall be promptly removed.




013350-2

G. All costs associated with maintaining the existing facilities in operation shall be

included in the lump sum contract items and no separate payment will be made

therefore.

1.4 LIMITATIONS ON SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION

A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 013250, Progress Schedule, the

Contractor shall prepare and submit a comprehensive schedule of his proposed

sequence of construction for review by the Construction Manager.

B. The schedule shall be arranged to complete the work in phases and permit operation

by the Owner of completed phases or parts thereof.

C. The Contractor is cautioned that his schedule for certain areas of the work may be

affected by work included under the other Contracts. Refer to Section 013100 -

Coordination and Meetings.

D. Work on this Contract shall be coordinated with the operation of the facilities. The

Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager of the Contractor's planned

procedures for each specific alteration of existing facilities before the alteration begins.

The Contractor shall not begin any alteration until specific permission has been granted

by the Construction Manager with sufficient advance notice as not to impact the

Contractor's schedule. The making of connections to existing facilities or other

operations that interfere with the operation of the existing equipment shall be

completed as quickly as possible and with as little delay as possible.

E. Authorized Owner personnel will perform all changes to the operational functions of

the existing facilities identified as necessary to facilitate the Work of the Contractor.

F. If it is necessary for proper operation or maintenance of the facilities, the Contractor

shall reschedule his operations so that his work will not conflict with necessary

operation or maintenance of the station. Such rescheduling shall not be cause for a time

extension except as provided for in the General Conditions.

G. The Contractor shall maintain safe passage through all access roads to the existing

facilities and to all parts of the existing station.

H. The Construction Manager shall be the sole judge of when the Contractor's operations

are causing interference with the existing facilities operations, and his orders and

instructions shall be carried out without delay.

I. The Contractor is required to perform certain functions in an order which will allow

the existing facilities to remain in operation and to allow other facilities to be completed

on schedule. The Contractor shall perform items of work under the Contract in a

sequence of his choosing to meet his “Progress Schedule” specified in Section 013250,




013350-3

but in keeping with the following limitations on the sequence. The following

limitations on the sequence of construction shall be incorporated into the Contractor’s

sequence of construction and shall apply at all times, except as may be modified in

writing by the Construction Manager.

1. Roof repairs – both plants – Roof repairs to both plants shall be done as the

initial phase of work and prior to the other improvements.

2. Improvements to Plant 1 – Second Floor and Plant 2 – Second Floor shall be

performed concurrently. Improvements in these areas and roof repairs shall be

substantially complete to allow WTP personnel to relocate from Plant 1 – First

Floor in order for work to be performed in this location.

1.5 WORK COMPLETION PHASES

A. The following work completion phases shall apply to this project with Substantial

Completion requirements applied separately to each phase of the contract. The

Substantial Completion requirements shall include any associated change order work

which applies to the individual work completion phases.

1. Phase 1: Completion of roof repairs to both plants.

2. Phase 2: Completion of work in Plant 1 – Second Floor and Plant 2 – Second

Floor.

3. Phase 3: Completion of work in Plant 1 – First Floor and remaining work

including replacement of gutters, downspouts, fascia, windows, lead paint

abatement and repainting exposed steel members in soffits of Plant 2.

B. The Substantial Completion times and Liquidated Damages amounts are shown on the

Bid Form. Liquidated damage amounts do not apply to each of the work completion

phases as summarized above.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION




013350-4


WTPFM – Facilities Modifications References



014220-1

SECTION 014220

REFERENCES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Reference Abbreviations

B. Abbreviations

C. Reference Standards

D. Definitions


A. Information provided in this section is used where applicable in individual

Specification Sections, in all Divisions.

1.3 REFERENCE ABBREVIATIONS

A. Reference to a technical society, trade association or standards setting organization,

may be made in the Specifications by abbreviations in accordance with the

following list:

AABC Associated Air Balance Council

AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists

ACI American Concrete Institute

ADC Air Diffusion Council

AFBMA Anti-friction Bearing Manufacturers Association

AGA American Gas Association

AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association

AHA Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association, Inc.

ANSI American National Standards Institute

APA American Plywood Association

ARI American Refrigeration Institute

ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers




014220-2

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning

Engineers

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute

AWPA American Wood Preservers Association

AWS American Welding Society

AWWA American Water Works Association

BHMA Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association

BIA Brick Institute of American

CABO Council of American Building Officials

CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institute

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute

CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of America

CRD U.S. Corps of Engineers Specifications

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute

CTI Cooling Tower Institute

DHI Door and Hardware Institute

DOH Department of Health

DOT Department of Transportation

Fed. Spec. Federal Specifications

FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association

FM Factory Mutual

HMI Hoist Manufacturing Institute

HPMA See HPVA

HPVA Hardwood Plywood Veneer Association

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IFI Industrial Fasteners Institute

MIL Military Specifications

MSS Manufacturer's Standardization Society

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

NACM National Association of Chain Manufacturers

NBS National Bureau of Standards, See NIST

NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau

NEC National Electrical Code

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

NETA National Electrical Testing Association

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

NFPA National Forest Products Association

NFPA National Fluid Power Association

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology

NLMA National Lumber Manufacturers Association




014220-3

NSF National Sanitation Foundation

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act

PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute

PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute

SAE Society of Automotive Engineers

SCPRF Structural Clay Products Research Foundation

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association

SPI Society of the Plastics Industry

SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council

STI Steel Tank Institute

TCA Tile Council of American

TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers' Association

UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.

USBR U. S. Bureau of Reclamation

USBS U. S. Bureau of Standards, See NIST

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS

A. Abbreviations which may be used in individual Specification Sections in all

Divisions are as follows:




014220-4

alternating current ............................. ac

American wire gauge ..................... AWG

ampere(s) ........................................ amp

ampere-hour(s) ................................ AH

annual .............................................. ann

Ampere Interrupting

Capacity ........................................ AIC

atmosphere(s) ................................... atm

average ............................................. avg

biochemical oxygen demand .......... BOD

Board Foot .................................... FBM

brake horsepower ............................. bhp

Brinell Hardness ............................... BH

British thermal unit(s)....................... Btu

calorie (s) .......................................... cal

carbonaceous biochemical

oxygen demand ........................ CBOD

Celsius (centigrade) ............................ C

Center to Center .......................... C to C

centimeter(s) .................................... cm

chemical oxygen demand ............... COD

coefficient, valve flow ....................... Cv

condensate return .............................. CR

cubic ................................................. cu

cubic centimeter(s) ............................. cc

cubic feet per day .............................. cfd

cubic feet per hour ............................. cfh

cubic feet per minute ........................ cfm

cubic feet per minute,

standard conditions ...................... scfm

cubic feet per second ......................... cfs

cubic foot (feet) ............................... cu ft

cubic inch(es) ................................. cu in

cubic yard(s).................................. cu yd

decibels ............................................. dB

decibels (A scale) ............................. dBa

degree(s) .......................................... deg

dewpoint temperature ........................ dpt

diameter ............................................ dia

direct current ...................................... dc

dissolved oxygen .............................. DO

dissolved solids ................................. DS

dry-bulb temperature ......................... dbt

efficiency ........................................... eff

elevation ............................................. el

entering water temperature ............... ewt

entering air temperature ..................... eat

equivalent direct radiation ................. edr

face area .............................................. fa

face to face ..................................... f to f

Fahrenheit ........................................... F

feet per day........................................ fpd

feet per hour ...................................... fph

feet per minute ................................. fpm

feet per second .................................. fps

foot (feet) ............................................ ft

foot-candle .......................................... fc

foot-pound ....................................... ft-lb

foot-pounds per minute ............. ft-lb/min

foot-pounds per second .............. ft-lb/sec

formazin turbidity unit(s) ................. FTU

frequency ......................................... freq

fuel oil ............................................... FO

fuel oil supply ................................. FOS

fuel oil return.................................. FOR

gallon(s) ............................................ gal

gallons per day ................................. gpd

gallons per day per

cubic foot ............................... gpd/cu ft

gallons per day per

square foot .............................. gpd/sq ft

gallons per hour ............................... gph

gallons per minute ........................... gpm

gallons per second .............................gps

gas chromatography and

mass spectrometry .................... GC-MS

gauge.................................................. ga

grain(s) ................................................ gr

gram(s) ................................................. g

grams per cubic centimeter ........... gm/cc




014220-5

Heat Transfer Coefficient .................... U

height ................................................ hgt

Hertz ................................................ Hz

horsepower ........................................ hp

horsepower-hour ............................hp-hr

hour(s) ................................................ hr

humidity, relative ............................... rh

hydrogen ion concentration ............... pH

inch(es) ............................................... in

inches per second .............................. ips

inside diameter ................................... ID

Jackson turbidity unit(s) .................. JTU

kelvin ................................................. K

kiloamperes ....................................... kA

kilogram(s) ......................................... kg

kilometer(s) ....................................... km

kilovar (kilovolt-amperes

reactive) ........................................ kvar

kilovolt(s) .......................................... kV

kilovolt-ampere(s) .......................... kVA

kilowatt(s) ........................................ kW

kilowatt-hour(s) .............................. kWh

linear foot (feet) ............................. lin ft

liter(s) ................................................. L

megavolt-ampere(s) ....................... MVA

meter(s) ............................................... m

micrograms per liter ...................... ug/L

miles per hour ................................. mph

milliampere(s) ................................. mA

milligram(s) ..................................... mg

milligrams per liter ........................ mg/L

milliliter(s) ....................................... mL

millimeter(s) .................................... mm

million gallons................................. MG

million gallons per day ................... mgd

millisecond(s) ................................... ms

millivolt(s) ...................................... mV

minute(s) ......................................... min

mixed liquor suspended

solids .......................................... MLSS

nephelometric turbidity

unit ............................................... NTU

net positive suction head............... NPSH

noise criteria ....................................... nc

noise reduction coefficient .............. NRC

number ............................................... no

ounce(s) ............................................. oz

outside air........................................... oa

outside diameter ............................... OD

parts per billion ............................... ppb

parts per million ............................. ppm

percent ............................................. pct

phase (electrical) ........................... . . ph

pound(s) ............................................. lb

pounds per cubic foot ....................... pcf

pounds per cubic foot

per hour ....................................... pcf/hr

pounds per day ............................ lbs/day

pounds per day per

cubic foot .......................... lbs/day/cu ft

pounds per day per

square foot ......................... lbs/day/sq ft

pounds per square foot...................... psf

pounds per square foot

per hour ....................................... psf/hr

pounds per square inch ..................... psi

pounds per square inch

absolute .......................................... psia

pounds per square inch

gauge ............................................. psig

power factor .......................................PF

pressure drop or

difference ......................................... dp

pressure, dynamic

(velocity) .......................................... vp

pressure, vapor ............................. vap pr

quart(s) ................................................ qt

Rankine .............................................. R




014220-6

relative humidity ................................. rh

resistance.......................................... res

return air ............................................. ra

revolution(s) ..................................... rev

revolutions per minute ...................... rpm

revolutions per second ...................... rps

root mean squared ........................... rms

safety factor ........................................ sf

second(s) .......................................... sec

shading coefficient ........................... SC

sludge density index ........................ SDI

Sound Transmission

Coefficient ................................... STC

specific gravity .............................. sp gr

specific volume .......................... Sp Vol

sp ht at constant pressure .................. Cp

square ................................................ sq

square centimeter(s) ...................... sq cm

square foot (feet) ............................. sq ft

square inch (es) .............................. sq in

square meter(s) ............................... sq m

square yard(s) ................................. sq yd

standard ............................................ std

static pressure .................................. st pr

supply air ....................................... . . sa

suspended solids ................................ SS

temperature ................................... temp

temperature difference ...................... TD

temperature entering ......................... TE

temperature leaving .......................... TL

thousand Btu per hour .................... Mbh

thousand circular mils................... kcmil

thousand cubic feet ......................... Mcf

threshold limit value ...................... TLV

tons of refrigeration ......................... tons

torque ............................................ TRQ

total dissolved solids ...................... TDS

total dynamic head ........................ TDH

total kjeldahl nitrogen .................... TKN

total oxygen demand ..................... TOD

total pressure .................................... TP

total solids ........................................ TS

total suspended solids ..................... TSS

total volatile solids ......................... TVS

vacuum............................................. vac

viscosity .......................................... visc

volatile organic chemical ............... VOC

volatile solids .................................... VS

volatile suspended solids ................ VSS

volt(s) ................................................. V

volts-ampere(s)................................ VA

volume ............................................. vol

watt(s) ............................................... W

watthour(s) ...................................... Wh

watt-hour demand .......................... WHD

watt-hour demand meter ............ WHDM

week(s)............................................. wk

weight ............................................... wt

wet-bulb .......................................... WB

wet bulb temperature .................... WBT

yard(s) ................................................ yd

year(s) ................................................. yr




014220-7

B. Use ASME Y1.1-1989, “Abbreviations for use on Drawings and in Text” for

abbreviations for units of measure not included herein in Paragraph 1.4.

1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Latest Edition: Construe references to furnishing materials or testing, which

conform to the standards of a particular technical society, organization, or body, to

mean the latest standard, code, or specification of that body, adopted and published

as of the date of bidding this Contract. Standards referred to herein are made a part

of these Specifications to the extent which is indicated or intended.

B. Precedence: The duties and responsibilities of the Owner, Contractor or

Construction Manager, or any of their consultants, agents or employees are set forth

in the Contract Documents, and are not changed or altered by any provision of any

referenced standard specifications, manuals or code, whether such standard manual

or code is or is not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract

Documents. Any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or

performance of the Work or any duty or authority, to undertake responsibility

contrary to the powers of the Construction Manager as set forth in the Contract

Documents cannot be assigned to the Construction Manager or any of the

Construction Manager's consultants, agents or employees.

1.6 DEFINITIONS

A. In these Contract Documents the words furnish, install and provide are defined as

follows:

1. Furnish (materials): to supply and deliver to the project ready for

installation and in operable condition.

2. Install (services or labor): to place in final position, complete, anchored,

connected in operable condition.

3. Provide: to furnish and install complete. Includes the supply of specified

services. When neither furnish, install or provide is stated, provide is

implied.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION




014220-8


WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Quality Control



014500-1

SECTION 014500

QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Submittals

B. Inspection Services

C. Inspection of Materials

D. Quality Control

E. Costs of Inspection

F. Acceptance Tests

G. Failure to Comply with Contract


A. Section 013300 - Submittals: Specific Submittal Requirements

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Provide all submittals, including the following, as specified in Section

013300 - Submittals.

B. Certificate Submittals: Furnish the Engineer authoritative evidence in the form of

Certificates of Manufacture that the materials and equipment to be used in the Work

have been manufactured and tested in conformity with the Contract Documents.

Include copies of the results of physical tests and chemical analyses, where necessary,

that have been made directly on the product or on similar products of the manufacturer.

1.4 INSPECTION SERVICES

A. Owner's Access: At all times during the progress of the Work and until the date of

final completion, afford the Owner, Construction Manager, and Engineer every

reasonable, safe, and proper facility for inspecting the Work at the site. The observation

and inspection of any work will not relieve the Contractor of any obligations to perform

proper and satisfactory work as specified. Replace work rejected due to faulty design,

inferior, or defective materials, poor workmanship, improper installation, excessive

wear, or nonconformity with the requirements of the Contract Documents, with

satisfactory work at no additional cost to the Owner. Replace as directed, finished or




014500-2

unfinished work found not to be in strict accordance with the Contract, even though

such work may have been previously approved and payment made therefor.

B. Rejection: The Owner and the Owner's Authorized Representatives have the right to

reject materials and workmanship which are defective or require correction. Promptly

remove rejected work and materials from the site.

C. Inferior Work Discoveries: Failure or neglect on the part of the Owner or the Owner's

Authorized Representatives to condemn or reject bad or inferior work or materials does

not imply an acceptance of such work or materials. Neither is it to be construed as

barring the Owner or the Owner's Authorized Representatives at any subsequent time

from recovering damages or a sum of money needed to build anew all portions of the

Work in which inferior work or improper materials were used.

D. Removal for Examination: Should it be considered necessary or advisable by the

Owner or the Owner's Authorized Representatives, at any time before final acceptance

of the Work, to make examinations of portions of the Work already completed, by

removing or tearing out such portions, promptly furnish all necessary facilities, labor,

and material, to make such an examination. If such Work is found to be defective in

any respect, defray all expenses of such examination and of satisfactory reconstruction.

If, however, such work is found to meet the requirements of the Contract, the cost of

examination and restoration of the Work will be considered a change in the Work and

Contractor may request compensation in accordance with applicable provisions of the

Contract.

E. Operation Responsibility: Assume full responsibility for the proper operation of

equipment during tests and instruction periods. Make no claim for damage which may

occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner accepts the Work.

F. Rejection Prior to Warrantee Expiration: If at any time prior to the expiration of any

applicable warranties or guarantees, equipment is rejected by the Owner, repay to the

Owner all sums of money received for the rejected equipment on progress certificates

or otherwise on account of the Contract lump sum prices, and upon the receipt of the

sum of money, Owner will execute and deliver a bill of sale of all its rights, title, and

interest in and to the rejected equipment. Do not remove the equipment from the

premises of the Owner until the Owner obtains from other sources, equipment to take

the place of that rejected. The Owner hereby agrees to obtain other equipment within

a reasonable time and the Contractor agrees that the Owner may use the equipment

furnished by the Contractor without rental or other charge until the other new

equipment is obtained.




014500-3

1.5 INSPECTION OF MATERIALS

A. Premanufacture Notification: Give notice in writing to the Construction Manager

sufficiently in advance of the commencement of manufacture or preparation of

materials especially manufactured or prepared for use in or as part of the permanent

construction. When required, the notice is to include a request for inspection, the date

of commencement, and the expected date of completion of the manufacture or

preparation of materials. Upon receipt of such notice, Construction Manager will

arrange to have a representative present at such times during the manufacture or testing

as may be necessary to inspect the materials, or will notify Contractor that the

inspection will be made at a point other than the point of manufacture or testing, or that

the inspection will be waived. Comply with these provisions before shipping any

materials. Such inspection will not constitute a release from the responsibility for

furnishing materials meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Testing Standards: Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances shall

be conducted in accordance with recognized test codes of the ANSI, ASME, or IEEE,

except as may otherwise be stated herein.

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing

1. Field and Laboratory

a. Provide personnel to assist the Construction Manager in performing the

following periodic observation and associated services.

(1) Soils: Observe and test excavations, placement and

compaction of soils. Determine suitability of excavated

material. Observe subgrade soils and foundations.

(2) Concrete: Observe forms and reinforcement; observe concrete

placement; witness air entrainment tests, facilitate concrete

cylinder preparation and assist with other tests performed by


(3) Masonry: Sample and test mortar, bricks, blocks and grout;

inspect brick and block samples and sample panels; inspect

placement of reinforcement and grouting.

b. When specified in other Divisions of the Contract Documents, provide

an independent laboratory testing facility to perform required testing.

Qualify the laboratory as having performed previous satisfactory work.

Prior to use, submit to the Construction Manager for approval.




014500-4

c. Cooperate with the Construction Manager and laboratory testing

representatives. Provide at least 24 hours notice prior to when specified

testing is required. Provide labor and materials, and necessary facilities

at the site as required by the Construction Manager and the testing

laboratory.

d. Provide an independent testing agency, a member of the National

Electrical Testing Association, to perform inspections and tests

specified in Division 16 of these Specifications.

2. Equipment: Coordinate and demonstrate test procedures as specified in the

Contract Documents or as otherwise required during the formal tests.

3. Pipeline and Other Testing: Conform to test procedures and requirements

specified in the appropriate Specification Section.

B. Reports

1. Certified Test Reports: Where transcripts or certified test reports are required

by the Contract Documents, meet the following requirements:

a. Before delivery of materials or equipment submit and obtain approval

of the Construction Manager for all required transcripts, certified test

reports, certified copies of the reports of all tests required in referenced

specifications or specified in the Contract Documents.

b. Perform all testing in an approved independent laboratory or the

manufacturer's laboratory. Submit for approval reports of shop

equipment tests within thirty days of testing.

c. Transcripts or test reports are to be accompanied by a notarized

certificate in the form of a letter from the manufacturer or supplier

certifying that tested material or equipment meets the specified

requirements and the same type, quality, manufacture and make as

specified. The certificate shall be signed by an officer of the

manufacturer or the manufacturer's plant manager.

2. Certificate of Compliance: At the option of the Construction Manager, or

where not otherwise specified, submit for approval a notarized Certificate of

Compliance. The Certificates may be in the form of a letter stating the

following:

a. Manufacturer has performed all required tests

b. Materials to be supplied meet all test requirements




014500-5

c. Tests were performed not more than one year prior to submittal of the

certificate

d. Materials and equipment subjected to the tests are of the same quality,

manufacture and make as those specified

e. Identification of the materials

1.7 COSTS OF INSPECTION

A. Owner's Obligation: Initial inspection and testing of materials furnished under this

Contract will be performed by the Owner or his authorized Representatives or

inspection bureaus without cost to the Contractor, unless otherwise expressly specified.

If subsequent testing is necessary due to failure of the initial tests or because of

rejection for noncompliance, reimburse the Owner for expenditures incurred in making

such tests.

B. Contractor's Obligation: Include in the Contract Price, the cost of all shop and field

tests of equipment and other tests specifically called for in the Contract Documents.

Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary permits and inspections

from City of Richmond Building Inspections.

C. Reimbursements to Owner:

1. Materials and equipment submitted by the Contractor as the equivalent to those

specifically named in the Contract may be tested by the Owner for compliance.

Reimburse the Owner for expenditures incurred in making such tests on

materials and equipment which are rejected for noncompliance.

2. Reimburse Owner for the costs of jobsite inspection on weekends and holidays,

and between the hours of 5:00 p.m. and 8:00 a.m. on workdays unless the

weekend, holiday or after-hours work is specifically required by the Owner to

minimize operational impact or traffic disruption. Jobsite inspection costs for

weekend, holidays or after-hours work, if authorized, solely to make up

schedule slippage shall be reimbursable.

3. Reimburse Owner for all costs associated with field Witness Tests which

exceed 5 Calendar Days per kind of equipment.

4. Reimburse Owner for all travel costs associated with the Owner witness of

equipment and system Factory Testing as specified in the equipment

specifications.

5. Reimbursement to Owner shall be by a credit Change Order to the lump sum

contract items issued at the end of the project.




014500-6

1.8 ACCEPTANCE TESTS

A. Preliminary Field Tests: As soon as conditions permit, furnish all labor and materials

and services to perform preliminary field tests of all equipment provided under this

Contract. If the preliminary field tests disclose that any equipment furnished and

installed under this Contract does not meet the requirements of the Contract

Documents, make all changes, adjustments and replacements required prior to the final

field tests.

B. Final Field Tests: Upon completion of the Work and prior to substantial completion

inspection, subject all equipment, piping and appliances installed under this Contract

to acceptance tests to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. The

Contractor shall develop a detailed testing plan for the new equipment and new

equipment systems in order to show that the completed work complies with all the

requirements of the Contract Documents. The detailed testing plan shall include

development of detailed check lists for use during the final field testing. The testing

plan shall include a description of the procedures proposed by the Contractor to test

each equipment system to show compliance with the functional requirements of the

Contract Documents. The field testing check lists shall include, but shall not be limited

to, the items and systems shown in Table 014500-1. The detailed testing plan and

testing check lists shall be submitted to the Construction Manager for approval and

approval obtained by the Construction Manager a minimum of 14 calendar days before

the scheduled date to conduct the final field tests.

1. Furnish all labor, fuel, energy, water and other materials, equipment,

instruments and services necessary for all acceptance tests.

2. Conduct field tests in the presence of the Construction Manager. Perform the

field tests to demonstrate that under all conditions of operation each equipment

item:

a. Has not been damaged by transportation or installation

b. Has been properly installed

c. Has been property lubricated

d. Has no electrical or mechanical defects

e. Is in proper alignment

f. Has been properly connected

g. Is free of overheating of any parts

h. Is free of all objectionable vibration

i. Is free of overloading of any parts

j. Is free of excessive noise

k. Operates as intended

l. Complete inspection check lists




014500-7

3. Operate work or portions of work for the minimum time periods specified.

Conduct test on those systems which require load produced by weather (heating

or cooling) exercise only when weather will produce proper load.

C. Failure of Tests: If the acceptance tests reveal defects in material or equipment, or if

the material or equipment in any way fails to comply with the requirements of the

Contract Documents, then promptly correct such deficiencies. Failure or refusal to

correct the deficiencies, or if the improved materials or equipment, when tested again,

fail to meet the guarantees or specified requirements, the Owner, notwithstanding its

partial payment for work and materials or equipment, may reject said materials or

equipment and may order the Contractor to remove the defective work from the site at

no addition to the Contract Price, and replace it with material or equipment which meets

the Contract Documents.

1.9 FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH CONTRACT

A. Unacceptable Materials: If it is ascertained by testing or inspection that the material

or equipment does not comply with the Contract, do not deliver said material or

equipment, or if delivered remove it promptly from the site or from the Work and

replace it with acceptable material without additional cost to the Owner. Fulfill all

obligations under the terms and conditions of the Contract even though the Owner or

the Owner's Authorized Representatives fail to ascertain noncompliance or notify the

Contractor of noncompliance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

Table 014500-1

014500-8

Field Testing Check List (Example)

Date: ________________________

Item

Local

Control Station

Control

Panel

Station

GDP

SCADA HMI

Remarks Trafford WTP

A. Pump No. 1

1. AFD HOA Switch Indication (DPC)

2. AFD HOA Switch Control

3. Run Status

4. Manual Start/Stop/Speed Control from AFD Panel

5. Manual Start/Stop/Speed Control from GDP

6. Manual Start/Stop/Speed Control from

SCADA

7. Auto Start/Stop/Speed Control

8. Discharge Valve Open/Closed Indication to DPC

9. AFD Emergency Stop

10. Pump Emergency Stop

11. Emergency Stop Indication

12. Discharge Valve Control

13. Discharge Valve Fail to Open

Table 014500-1

014500-9

Item

Local

Control Station

Control Panel

Station GDP

SCADA HMI


14. Discharge Valve Fail to Close

15. Manual Valve Open/Close Control

16. Valve Operator Open/Closed Indication

17. AFD Operable (Power On)

18. Motor Bearing RTD Temperature

19. Pump Bearing RTD Temperature

20. Motor Bearing RTD Set-Point

21. Pump Bearing RTD Set-Point

22. Bearing Temperature Fault

23. AFD Fault Indication

24. AFD Fault Reset

25. LOR Fault Indication

26. LOR Fault Reset

27. Discharge Valve Pressure Switch

B. Pump No. 2



3. Run Status

Table 014500-1

014500-10

Item

Local

Control Station

Control Panel

Station GDP

SCADA HMI





SCADA


8. Discharge Valve Open/Closed Indication to

DPC













Table 014500-1

014500-11

Item

Local

Control Station

Control Panel

Station GDP

SCADA HMI





24. AFD Fault Reset


26. LOR Fault Reset


C. Pump No. 3



3. Run Status




SCADA


8. Discharge Valve Open/Closed Indication to

DPC


Table 014500-1

014500-12

Item

Local

Control Station

Control Panel

Station GDP

SCADA HMI
















24. AFD Fault Reset


26. LOR Fault Reset


Table 014500-1

014500-13

Item

Local

Control Station

Control Panel

Station GDP

SCADA HMI


D. Other Items

1. Station Discharge Pressure to DPC

2. Station Flow to DPC

3. Main Switch 1 Indication to DPC

4. Main Switch 2 Indication to DPC

5. Main Breaker 1 Indication to DPC

6. Main Breaker 2 Indication to DPC

7. Tie Breaker Indication to DPC

8. 125 VDC Low Voltage Alarm to DPC

9. 125 VDC Input Power Fail to DPC

10. New Discharge Valve 1 Operator Operation



13. New Water System Backflow Preventer

14. New Toilet Facilities

15. New 125 VDC Power System

16. Terminal Cabinet TC-3 Wiring Demolition

Table 014500-1

014500-14

Field Testing Attendance List:

Name Signature Firm Telephone

Field Testing Notes:

1.

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls



015000-1

SECTION 015000

CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. References

B. General Requirements

C. Temporary Utilities

D. Temporary Construction

E. Barricades and Enclosures

F. Fences

G. Protection of Property, Utilities and Structures

H. Temporary Controls

I. Traffic Regulation

J. Field Offices and Sheds

K. Hoists and Cranes

L. WTP Site Security

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Codes and standards referred to in this section are:

1. Virginia Department of Transportation Road and Bridge Specifications

2. OSHA Regulations

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Plant and Facilities: Furnish, install, maintain and remove all false work,

scaffolding, ladders, hoistways, braces, pumping plants, shields, trestles, roadways,

sheeting, centering forms, barricades, drains, flumes, control equipment, and the

like, any of which may be needed in the construction of any part of the Work and




015000-2

which are not herein described or specified in detail. Accept responsibility for the

safety and efficiency of such works and for any damage to the Work or Owner

equipment, buildings and structures that may result from their failure or from their

improper construction, maintenance or operation.

B. First Aid: Maintain a readily accessible, completely equipped first aid kit at each

location where work is in progress.

C. Safety Responsibility: Accept sole responsibility for safety and security at the site.

Indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Owner's Authorized

Representatives, including WRA and Construction Manager, for any safety

violation, or noncompliance with governing bodies and their regulations, and for

accidents, deaths, injuries, or damage at the site during occupancy or partial

occupancy of the site by Contractor's forces while performing any part of the Work.

Provide the Construction Manager with a copy of the Contractor Safety Plan for

this project which includes all proposed Work planned.

D. Hazard Communication: Furnish two copies of the Contractor's Hazard

Communication Program required under OSHA regulations before beginning on

site activities. Furnish two copies of amendments to Hazard Communications

Program as they are prepared.

E. Confined Space: Portions of the existing facilities are considered Confined Spaces

by the Owner. These generally include but are not limited to: Storage Tanks,

Sewers, Dry Wells, Underground Vaults, Boilers, Digesters, Manholes, Tunnels,

Ventilation or Exhaust Ducts, Wet Wells, Open Top Pits, Lagoons, and Vats and

Vessels. These areas may be considered Permit Required Confined Spaces because

of the potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere, the potential of engulfment, and

because of its internal configuration. Permit Required Confined Spaces are posted

and identified with signs. Concurrent entry into any permit required confined space

by Contractor and Owner’s personnel shall be coordinated.

F. General Requirement Costs: All costs associated with the general requirements

shall be included in the lump sum contract items and no separate payments will be

made therefore.

1.4 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. Water: Provide all necessary facilities and required water without additional cost

to the Owner, unless otherwise specified. If necessary, provide and lay water lines

to the place of use; secure all necessary permits; pay for all taps to water mains and

hydrants and for all water used at the established rates.




015000-3

B. Light and Power: Provide without additional cost to the Owner temporary lighting

and power facilities required for the proper construction and inspection of the

Work. If, in the Construction Manager's opinion, these facilities are inadequate, do

NOT proceed with any portion of the Work affected thereby. Maintain temporary

lighting and power until the Work is accepted.

C. Heat: Provide temporary heat, whenever required, for work being performed

during cold weather to prevent freezing of concrete, water pipes, and other damage

to the Work or existing facilities.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide sufficient sanitary facilities for construction personnel.

Prohibit and prevent nuisances on the site of the Work or on adjoining property.

Discharge any employee who violates this rule. Abide by all environmental

regulations or laws applicable to the Work.

E. Connections to Existing Utilities:

1. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, make all necessary connections to

existing facilities including structures, drain lines, and utilities such as

water, sewer, gas, telephone, and electricity. In each case, obtain permission

from the Owner or the owning utility prior to undertaking connections.

Protect facilities against deleterious substances and damage.

2. Thoroughly plan in advance all connections to existing facilities. Have on

hand at the time of undertaking the connections, all material, labor and

required equipment. Proceed continuously to complete connections in

minimum time. Arrange for the operation of valves or other appurtenances

on existing utilities, under the direct supervision of the owning utility.

1.5 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION

A. Bridges:

1. Design and place suitable temporary bridges where necessary for the

maintenance of vehicular and pedestrian traffic. Assume responsibility for

the sufficiency and safety of all such temporary work or bridges and for any

damage which may result from their failure or their improper construction,

maintenance, or operation. Indemnify and save harmless the Owner and the

Owner's representatives, including WRA and Construction Manager, from

all claims, suits or actions, and damages or costs of every description arising

by reason of failure to comply with the above provisions.




015000-4

2. Provide a pedestrian access bridge to the station access door for use during

the period that the station discharge header and the access door platform are

being replaced.

1.6 BARRICADES AND ENCLOSURES

A. Protection of Workmen and Public: Effect and maintain at all times during the

prosecution of the Work, barriers and lights necessary for the protection of

Workmen and the Public. Provide suitable barricades, lights, "danger" or "caution"

or "street closed" signs and watchmen at all places where the Work causes

obstructions to normal traffic, excavation sites, or constitutes in any way a hazard

to the public.

B. Barricades and Lights:

1. Protect all streets, roads, highways, excavations and other public

thoroughfares which are closed to traffic; use effective barricades which

display acceptable warning signs. Locate barricades at the nearest public

highway or street on each side of the blocked section.

2. Statutory Requirements: Install and maintain all barricades, signs, lights,

and other protective devices within highway rights-of-way in strict

conformity with applicable statutory requirements by the authority having

jurisdiction.

1.7 FENCES

A. Existing Fences: Obtain written permission from the Owner prior to relocating or

dismantling fences which interfere with construction operations. Reach agreements

with the fence owner as to the period the fence may be left relocated or dismantled.

Install adequate gates where fencing must be maintained. Keep gates closed and

locked at all times when not in use.

B. Restoration: Restore all fences to their original or better condition and to their

original location on completion of the Work.

1.8 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY, UTILITIES AND STRUCTURES

A. Preservation of Property:

1. Preserve from damage, all property along the line of the Work, in the

vicinity of or in any way affected by the Work, the removal or destruction

of which is not called for by the Drawings. Preserve from damage, public

utilities, trees, lawn areas, building monuments, fences, pipe and




015000-5

underground structures, existing station security system, and public streets.

Tree protection within public street right-of-ways, parks, and other City

public spaces shall be provided in accordance with the City of Richmond

Arborist requirements. Note: Normal wear and tear of streets resulting from

legitimate use by the Contractor are not considered as damage. Whenever

damages occur to such property, immediately restore to its original

condition. Costs for such repairs are incidental to the Contract.

2. In case of failure on the part of the Contractor to restore property or make

good on damage or injury, the Owner may, upon 24 hours written notice,

proceed to repair, rebuild, or otherwise restore such property as may be

deemed necessary, and the cost thereof will be deducted from any moneys

due or which may become due the Contractor under this Contract. If

removal, repair or replacement of public or private property is made

necessary by alteration of grade or alignment authorized by the Owner and

not contemplated by the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be

compensated, in accordance with the General Conditions, provided that

such property has not been damaged through fault of the Contractor or the

Contractor's employees.

B. Public Utility Installations and Structures:

1. Public utility installations and structures include all poles, tracks, pipes,

wires, conduits, vaults, ductbanks, manholes, and other appurtenances and

facilities, whether owned or controlled by public bodies or privately owned

individuals, firms or corporations, used to serve the public with

transportation, gas, electricity, telephone, storm and sanitary sewers, water,

or other public or private utility services. Facilities appurtenant to public or

private property which may be affected by the Work are deemed included

hereunder.

2. The Contract Documents contain data relative to existing public utility

installations and structures above and below the ground surface. Existing

public utility installations and structures are indicated on the Drawings only

to the extent such information was made available to, or found by, the

Engineer in preparing the Drawings. These data are not guaranteed for

completeness or accuracy, and the Contractor is responsible for making

necessary investigations to become fully informed as to the character,

condition, and extent of all public utility installations and structures that

may be encountered and that may affect the construction operations.

3. Contact utility locating service sufficiently in advance of the start of

construction to avoid damage to the utilities and delays to the completion

date.




015000-6

4. Remove, replace, relocate, repair, rebuild, and secure any public utility

installations and structures damaged as a direct or indirect result of the

Work under this Contract. Costs for such work are incidental to the

Contract. Be responsible and liable for any consequential damages done to

or suffered by any public utility installations or structures. Assume and

accept responsibility for any injury, damage, or loss which may result from

or be consequent to interference with, or interruption or discontinuance of,

any public utility service.

5. Repair or replace any water, electric, sewer, gas, or other service connection

or equipment damaged during the Work with no addition to the Contract

price.

6. At all times in performance of the Work, employ proven methods and

exercise reasonable care and skill to avoid unnecessary delay, injury,

damage, or destruction to public utility installations and structures. Avoid

unnecessary interference with, or interruption of, public utility services.

Cooperate fully with the owners thereof to that end.

7. Give written notice to the owners of all public utility installations and

structures affected by proposed construction operations, sufficiently in

advance of breaking ground in any area or on any unit of the Work, to obtain

their permission before disrupting the lines and to allow them to take

measures necessary to protect their interests. Advise the Chiefs of Police,

Fire and Rescue Services of any excavation in public streets or the

temporary shut-off of any water main. Provide at least 24 hours notice to all

affected property owners whenever service connections are taken out of

service.

C. Miscellaneous Structures: Assume and accept responsibility for all injuries or

damage to culverts, building foundations and walls, retaining walls, or other

structures of any kind met with during the prosecution of the Work. Assume and

accept liability for damages to public or private property resulting therefrom.

Adequately protect against freezing all pipes carrying liquid.

D. Protection of Trees and Lawn Areas:

1. Protect with boxes, trees and shrubs, except those shown to be removed. Do

not place excavated material so as to cause injury to such trees or shrubs.

Replace trees or shrubs destroyed by accident or negligence of the

Contractor or Contractor's employees with new stock of similar size and

age, at the proper season, at no additional cost to the Owner.




015000-7

2. Leave lawn areas in as good condition as before the start of the Work.

Restore areas where sod has been removed by seeding or sodding.

1.9 TEMPORARY CONTROLS

A. During Construction:

1. Keep the site of the Work and adjacent premises free from construction

materials, debris, and rubbish. Remove this material from any portion of the

site if such material, debris, or rubbish constitutes a nuisance or is

objectionable.

2. Remove from the site all surplus materials and temporary structures when

they are no longer needed.

3. Neatly stack construction materials such as concrete forms and scaffolding

when not in use. Promptly remove splattered concrete, asphalt, oil, paint,

corrosive liquids, and cleaning solutions from surfaces to prevent marring

or other damage.

4. Properly store volatile wastes in covered metal containers and remove from

the site daily.

5. Do not bury or burn on the site or dispose of into storm drains, sanitary

sewers, streams, or waterways, any waste material. Remove all wastes from

the site and dispose of in a manner complying with applicable ordinances

and laws.

B. Smoke Prevention:

1. Strictly observe all air pollution control regulations.

2. Open fires will be allowed only if permitted under current ordinances.

C. Noises:

1. Maintain acceptable noise levels in the vicinity of the Work. Limit noise

production to acceptable levels by using special mufflers, barriers,

enclosures, equipment positioning, and other approved methods.

2. Supply written notification to the Owner sufficiently in advance of the start

of any work which violates this provision. Proceed only when all applicable

authorizations and variances have been obtained in writing.




015000-8

D. Hours of Operation:

1. Operation of construction equipment between the hours of 5:00 p.m. and

8:00 a.m. the following day is prohibited. For operation of this equipment

during this period obtain written consent from the Owner.

2. Do not carry out nonemergency work, including equipment moves, on

Saturdays, Sundays or City observed holidays without prior written

authorization by the Owner.

E. Dust Control:

1. Take measures to prevent unnecessary dust. Keep earth surfaces exposed to

dusting moist with water or a chemical dust suppressant. Cover materials in

piles or while in transit to prevent blowing or spreading dust.

2. Adequately protect buildings or operating facilities which may be affected

adversely by dust. Protect machinery, motors, instrument panels, or similar

equipment by suitable dust screens. Include proper ventilation with dust

screens.

F. Temporary Drainage Provisions:

1. Provide for the drainage of stormwater and any water applied or discharged

on the site in performance of the Work. Provide adequate drainage facilities

to prevent damage to the Work, the site, and adjacent property.

2. Supplement existing drainage channels and conduits as necessary to carry

all increased runoff from construction operations. Construct dikes as

necessary to divert increased runoff from entering adjacent property (except

in natural channels), to protect the Owner's facilities and the Work, and to

direct water to drainage channels or conduits. Provide ponding as necessary

to prevent downstream flooding.

3. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain

pumping equipment.

G. Erosion Control: Provide erosion control in accordance with the Specification

Section titled Soil Erosion and Sediment Control.

H. Pollution: Prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary wastes,

sediment, debris, and other substances resulting from construction activities. Do

not permit sanitary wastes to enter any drain or watercourse other than sanitary

sewers. Do not permit sediment, debris, or other substances to enter sanitary sewers.




015000-9

Take reasonable measures to prevent such materials from entering any drain or

watercourse.

1.10 TRAFFIC REGULATION

A. Access: Conduct Work to interfere as little as possible with public travel, whether

vehicular or pedestrian. The Contractor’s personnel, equipment, machinery, tools

and supplies shall be kept clear of active traffic lanes except as necessary for

prosecuting active work. Material that is spilled or tracked onto the traveled

pavement during prosecution of the work shall be promptly removed. Provide and

maintain suitable temporary expedients for the accommodation of public and

private travel. Whenever it is necessary to cross, obstruct, or close roads, driveways,

and walks, whether public or private, give 2 weeks notice to Owners of private

drives before interfering with them. Such maintenance of traffic will not be required

when the Contractor has obtained permission from the Owner or tenant of private

property, or from the authority having jurisdiction over the public property

involved, to obstruct traffic at the designated point.

B. Traffic and Speeding Requirements: Adhere to all local traffic and speeding

requirements.

1.11 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

A. Office: Furnish and maintain a temporary field office with a telephone on the

pumping station site. Keep readily accessible copies of the Contract Documents,

required record documents, and the latest approved shop drawings at this field

office.

1. Provide a separate 10 foot by 10 foot, minimum, office in the Field Office

for use of the Construction Manager which includes a table, two (2) office

chairs, one four drawer file cabinet, and one exterior, lockable, access door.

B. Material Sheds and Temporary Structures: Provide material sheds and other

temporary structures of sturdy construction and neat appearance.

C. Location: Coordinate location of field offices, material sheds and temporary

structures with Construction Manager and Owner.

1.12 HOISTS AND CRANES

A. Contractor shall NOT use any hoists or cranes belonging to the Owner, for the

performance of the work, without first submitting a written request to the

Construction Manager. The request shall describe how the Contractor intends to

use the hoist or crane, the weight of the items being lifted, and how long the




015000-10

Contractor intends to use the hoist or crane. If the request is approved, the

Construction Manager will provide written authorization to the Contractor.

B. Contractor’s use of hoist/crane, upon receiving written approval, shall be in

accordance with the unit’s operation and maintenance procedures and all applicable

regulations.

C. Prior to using the hoist/crane, the Contractor shall pay for an independent certified

inspection of the hoist/crane by an inspector approved by the Construction

Manager. Submit copies of the report to the Construction Manager.

D. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall pay for a second certified

inspection of the hoist/crane, by the approved inspector. Submit copies of the report

to the Construction Manager. The report shall be submitted prior to substantial

completion.

E. Any unusual wear or damage to the hoist/crane, its appurtenances, or any

components, found by this second inspection, shall be repaired or replaced prior to

substantial completion, to the satisfaction of the Owner and Construction Manager,

at the expense of the Contractor.

1.13 WTP SITE SECURITY

A. The Contractor shall only use the Douglasdale Road WTP access gate for this

project.

B. Contractor shall issue photo ID badges that shall be worn at all times when

Contractor and Subcontractor personnel are on site. Photo ID badges shall be 2” x

3” approximately, PVC, and include employee photo, ID number, name of

contractor, project name, and be color coded.

C. The Contractor shall have a supervisor on the WTP site during all work periods that

will be responsible for construction personnel site security. The Construction

Manager will provide Contractor supervisory personnel with ID cards for use in

accessing the plant site. Contractor’s supervisory personnel requiring a City-issued

ID card must apply for the ID card. Application shall include background checks.

All Contractor supervisory personnel shall enter the WTP site and exit the WTP

site by swiping their ID card through the City’s card reader. Contractor supervisory

personnel discovered on site without being recorded as entered shall not be allowed

future access to the WTP site.

D. No private vehicles are allowed on the WTP site. All Contractor and Subcontractor

vehicles shall be labeled.




015000-11

E. No Contractor or Subcontractor personnel are allowed in other areas of WTP site

apart from the project work area. Contractor or Subcontractor personnel discovered

in other areas of the WTP site without prior authorization by the City shall be

removed from the project and shall not be allowed access to the WTP site.

F. The Contractor shall provide the Construction Manager with a list of employees,

subcontractors, and subcontractor employees who will be accessing the WTP for

the project for approval by the Construction Manager. Only personnel approved by

the Construction Manager shall be allowed on the plant site. The list shall be

updated monthly or as needed.

G. Notify the Construction Manager of material deliveries to the WTP site including

a description of material to be delivered, date and time, and delivery company.

H. Notify the Construction Manager or Owner if any suspicious activity is noted

around or near the WTP site.

I. The employee ID badges will be checked by the plant security guard periodically

and the name on the badge shall match the name on the employee list.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION




015000-12


WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Material and Equipment



016000-1

SECTION 016000

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Description

B. Substitutions

C. “Or Equal” Submittals

D. Manufacturer's Written Instructions

E. Transportation and Handling

F. Storage, Protection, and Maintenance

G. Storage and Handling of Equipment On Site

H. Equipment List and Tagging

I. Special Tools and Lubricating Equipment

J. Care and Protection of New Electrical Equipment and Instrumentation

K. Electrical Work

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Proposed Manufacturers List: Within 15 calendar days of the date of the Notice to

Proceed, submit to the Construction Manager a list of the names of proposed

manufacturers, suppliers, dealers and subcontractors, obtain approval of this list by

Owner prior to submission of any shop drawings. Upon request submit evidence to

Construction Manager that each proposed manufacturer has manufactured a similar

product to the one specified and that it has previously been used for a like purpose for

a sufficient length of time to demonstrate its satisfactory performance.

B. Provide material, spare parts, and equipment essential to the installation of the

equipment and materials, and otherwise shown to be provided under this contract,

which meet the following:

1. Standards: Design equipment and appurtenances in conformity with ANSI,

ASME, IEEE, NEMA, OSHA, NACE, AGMA, AISC, AWWA, and other

generally accepted standards. Equipment and appurtenances shall be of rugged




016000-2

construction and of sufficient strength to withstand all stresses which may

occur during fabrication, testing, transportation, installation, and all conditions

of operation.

2. Electrical Requirements: Electrical devices, motors, equipment, control panels,

electrical equipment enclosures, and other electrical equipment appurtenances

shall be labeled by UL or other approved testing agency. Shop drawings for

electrical equipment shall denote that the represented material has the approved

testing agency label. Nonlisted materials and special equipment devices not

normally listed by the approved testing agency and labeled shall equal or

exceed the latest standards for such types of equipment. The Contractor shall

be responsible for providing the services of an electrical inspection firm to

certify compliance of all nonlisted materials to the approved testing agency

standards and for providing materials with an inspection label in accordance

with the approved testing agency standards.

3. Complies with size, make, type, and quality specified or as specifically

approved, in writing, by Construction Manager.

4. Will fit into the space provided with sufficient room for operation and

maintenance access and to properly connect to piping, ducts and services as

applicable.

5. Manufacture and fabricate in accordance with the following:

a. Design, fabricate, and assemble in accordance with the standards

referenced and the requirements given in the pertinent sections,

clauses, paragraphs, and sentences, both directly and indirectly

applicable thereto, in that part of the Contract Documents.

b. Provide equipment which is new, unused, and correctly designed. It

shall be of standard first-grade quality, produced by expert workmen.

c. Details shall be designed for appearance as well as utility. Protruding

members, joints, corners, and the like, shall be finished in appearance.

All exposed welds shall be ground smooth and the corners of structural

shapes shall be mitered.

d. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges,

to be interchangeable.

e. Provide two or more items of same kind identical, by same

manufacturer.

f. Provide materials and equipment suitable for service conditions.




016000-3

g. Adhere to equipment capabilities, sizes, and dimensions shown or

specified unless variations are specifically approved, in writing, in

accordance with the Contract Documents.

6. Use material or equipment only for the purpose for which it is designed or

specified.

1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions:

1. Contractor’s requests for changes in equipment and materials from those

required by the Contract Documents are considered requests for substitutions

and are subject to Contractor’s representations and review provisions of the

Contract Documents when one of following conditions are satisfied:

a. Where required equipment or material cannot be provided within

Contract Time, but not as result of Contractor’s failure to pursue Work

promptly or to coordinate various activities properly.

b. Where required equipment or material cannot be provided in manner

compatible with other materials of Work, or cannot be properly

coordinated therewith.

2. Contractor’s Options:

a. Where more than one choice is available as options for Contractor’s

selection of equipment or material, select option compatible with other

equipment and materials already selected (which may have been from

among options for other equipment and materials).

b. Where compliance with specified standard, code or regulation is

required, select from among products which comply with requirements

of those standards, codes, and regulations.

B. Conditions Which are Not Substitution:

1. Requirements for substitutions do not apply to Contractor options on materials

and equipment provided for in the Specifications.

2. Revisions to Contract Documents, where requested by Owner or Construction

Manager, are "changes" not "substitutions".

3. Contractor’s determination of and compliance with governing regulations and

orders issued by governing authorities do not constitute substitutions and do




016000-4

not constitute basis for a Change Order, except as provided for in Contract

Documents.

1.4 “OR EQUAL” SUBMITTAL

A. This Section includes requirements related to the Contractor’s responsibilities for “Or

Equal” Submittal.

B. “Or Equal” Manufacturer

1. Whenever a material, article or method is specified or described by using the

name of a proprietary product or the name of a particular manufacturer(s) or

vendor(s), followed by the phase “or equal”, the specific item mentioned shall

be understood as establishing the type, function, dimension, appearance, and

quality desired and is to be the basis upon which bids are to be prepared. Other

manufacturer’s materials, articles and methods not named will be considered

as “Or Equal” provided required information is submitted in the manner set

forth herein and provided substitution will not require substantial revisions of

the Contract Documents. This applies to specific construction methods when

such are required by the Contract Documents.

2. Whenever a material, article, or method is specified or described without the

phrase “or equal”, no substitutions will be allowed.

C. Submittal of Proposed “Or Equal” Manufacturers

1. Bids shall be based on materials, articles and methods named and specified in

the Contract Documents. If the bidder proposes to use an “Or Equal”

manufacturer for named and specified materials, articles and methods followed

by the phrase “or equal” within the Contract Documents during the bidding

process, he shall submit a list of proposed substitutions on the Form for

Proposed “Or Equal” Major Equipment Schedule with his bid. This form is

provided in the Bid Form and Attachment portion of the Bid Documents for

this purpose. Request for “or equal” manufacturer received after bids are open

will not be considered except as stated herein.

D. Submittal of Data for Proposed “Or Equal” Manufacturer

1. In order for the “or equal” manufacturer to be considered, the Contractor shall

submit with the bid a complete data as set forth herein to permit complete

analysis of all proposed substitutions listed on his submitted Form For

Proposed “Or Equal” Major Equipment Schedule. No substitution will be

considered unless the Contractor provides required data in accordance with the

requirements of this Section. The Engineer will take such time is required to

ensure full compliance with all Contract requirements. Three copies of the




016000-5

following data shall be submitted in order for the “or equal” manufacturer to

be considered.

a. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed “or equal”

manufacturer with Contract Documents. The “or equal” manufacturer

shall not change design intent.

b. For products provide

(1) Identification, including manufacturer’s name and address.

(2) Manufacturer’s literature, including but not necessarily limited

to:

(a) Product description, performance and test data

(b) Reference standards

(3) Samples where appropriate.

(4) Name and address of similar projects on which product was

used, and date of installation.

c. Itemized comparison of proposed “or equal” manufacturer with

product methods specified. Different types of products and methods

will be considered provided final performance is at least equal to that

specified.

d. Data relating to impact on construction schedule occasion by the

proposed “or equal” manufacturer.

e. Proposed monetary changes supported by accurate cost data on

proposed “or equal” manufacturer in comparison with product or

method specified, including costs for redesigns required. Costs for

redesigns due to “or equal” manufacturer are the responsibility of the

Contractor.

f. In making request for “or equal” manufacturer, Bidder represents:

(1) He has personally investigated proposed product and

determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that

specified. He will provide the same guarantee for the “or equal”

manufacturer as for product specified.

(2) He will coordinate installation of accepted “or equal”

manufacturer into the Work, making such design and

construction changes as may be required for the Work to be




016000-6

complete in all respects in accordance with Contract

requirements without additional cost to the City.

E. Rejection of Proposed “Or Equal”

1. Substitutions will not be considered at any time if:

a. They are indicated or implied on Contractor’s drawings or project data

submittals without formal request submitted in accordance with this

Section.

b. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.

c. Acceptance will create problems in stocking of repair parts and in

future maintenance by the City.

F. Approval of “Or Equal”

1. The Construction Manager’s decision regarding evaluation of “or equal”

manufacturer shall be final and binding. All approved “or equal” manufacturers

will be incorporated into the Contract.

1.5 MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS

A. Manufacturer's Requirements: Store, maintain, handle, install, connect, clean,

condition, and adjust products, equipment, spare parts, and materials in accordance

with manufacturer's written instructions and in conformity with Specifications.

1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's

instructions, consult Construction Manager for further instructions.

2. Do not proceed with work without written instructions.

B. Instruction Distribution: Provide manufacturer's written instructions, obtain and

distribute printed copies of such instructions to parties involved in installation,

including three copies to Construction Manager. Maintain one set of complete

instructions at job site during storage and installation, and until completion of work.

C. Performance Procedures: Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions. Do not omit preparatory steps or installation procedures, unless

specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents.

D. Documentation: The Contractor shall document that Contractor has conformed to

Manufacturer’s Requirements and submit written documentation to the Construction

Manager.




016000-7

1.6 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Coordination with Schedule: Arrange deliveries of products, materials, and equipment

in accordance with construction Progress Schedules. Coordinate to avoid conflict with

work and conditions at site.

1. Deliver products and move from storage materials, equipment, and spare parts

in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging,

with identifying labels intact and legible.

2. Protect bright-machined surfaces, such as shafts and valve faces, with a heavy

coat of grease prior to shipment.

3. Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipments of products, materials, and

equipment to determine compliance with requirements of Contract Documents

and approved submittals and that material and equipment are protected and

undamaged.

B. Handling: Provide equipment and personnel to handle products, materials, spare parts,

and equipment by methods recommended by manufacturer to prevent soiling or

damage to materials and equipment or packaging.

1.7 STORAGE, PROTECTION, AND MAINTENANCE

A. General: Store and maintain equipment, spare parts, and materials from the time of

delivery until the time the Contractor moves the equipment from storage for

installation. Provide all storage facilities and storage maintenance in accordance with

these requirements. Equipment, spare parts, and material that has not been stored and

protected in accordance with the manufacturers written instruction, or not in acceptable

as new condition, shall not be incorporated into the completed work. Spare parts which

have not been stored on the site in accordance with the manufacturers written

instructions and are not as new condition shall be rejected as acceptable spare parts.

B. Exterior storage areas:

1. Coordinate location of storage areas with Construction Manager and Owner.

2. Arrange on-site storage areas for proper protection and segregation of stored

materials and equipment with proper drainage. Provide for safe travel around

storage areas and safe access to stored materials and equipment.

3. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to

prevent mixing with foreign matter.

4. Store materials such as pipe, reinforcing and structural steel, and equipment on

pallets, blocks or racks, off ground.




016000-8

5. Store fabricated materials and equipment above ground, on blocking or skids,

to prevent soiling or staining. Cover materials and equipment which are subject

to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings; provide adequate ventilation

to avoid condensation.

C. Interior Storage:

1. Store materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.

2. Store materials and equipment, subject to damage by elements, in weather tight

enclosures.

3. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges required by manufacturer's

instructions.

D. Accessible Storage: Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection

and inventory. Make periodic inspections of stored materials or equipment to assure

that materials or equipment are maintained under specified conditions and free from

damage or deterioration.

1. Perform maintenance on stored materials of equipment in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions, in presence of Owner or Construction Manager.

2. Submit a report of completed maintenance to Construction Manager with each

Application for Payment.

3. Failure to perform maintenance, to notify Construction Manager of intent to

perform maintenance or to submit maintenance report may result in rejection

of material or equipment.

E. Owner's Responsibility: Owner assumes no responsibility for materials, spare parts, or

equipment stored in buildings or on-site.

F. Contractor's Responsibility:

1. Contractor assumes full responsibility for protection of the equipment.

2. Contractor assumes full responsibility for protection of completed construction

and installation. Repair and restore damage to completed Work equal to its

original condition.

G. Special Equipment: Use only rubber tired wheelbarrows, buggies, trucks, or dollies to

wheel loads over finished floors, regardless if the floor has been protected or not. This




016000-9

applies to finished floors and to exposed concrete floors as well as those covered with

composition tile or other applied surfacing.

H. Surface Damage: Where structural concrete is also the finished surface, take care to

avoid marking or damaging surface.

1.8 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF EQUIPMENT ON SITE

A. Manufacturer’s Instruction for Storage and Handling shall be submitted in accordance

with Section 01330. The Contractor shall also maintain one complete set of all storage

and handling instructions at the job site through final acceptance.

B. Special attention shall be given to the storage and handling of equipment on site. As a

minimum, the procedure outlined below shall be followed.

1. Equipment shall not be shipped until approved by the Construction Manager.

The intent of this requirement is to reduce on site storage time prior to

installation and/or operation. Under no circumstances shall equipment be

delivered to the site more than three months prior to installation without written

authorization from the Construction Manager. Operation and maintenance data

as described in Section 01783 shall be submitted to the Construction Manager

for review prior to shipment of equipment.

2. Contractor shall notify Construction Manager of schedule of major equipment

and material deliveries.

3. All equipment shall be stored fully lubricated with oil, grease, etc. unless

otherwise instructed by the manufacturer.

4. A copy of the manufacturer’s storage instructions shall be given to the

Construction Manager and shall be carefully studied by the Contractor and

reviewed with the Construction Manager. These instructions shall be carefully

followed and a written record of this kept by the Contractor.

5. Lubricants shall be changed upon completion of installation and as frequently

as required thereafter during the period between installation and acceptance.

Mechanical equipment to be used in the work, if stored for longer than ninety

days, shall have the bearings cleaned, flushed, and lubricated prior to testing

and startup, at no extra cost to the Owner.

6. Prior to acceptance of the equipment, the Contractor shall have the

manufacturer inspect the equipment and certify that its condition has not been

detrimentally affected by the long storage period. Such certifications by the

manufacturer shall be deemed to mean that the equipment is judged by the

manufacturer to be in a condition equal to that of equipment that has been

shipped, installed, tested and accepted in a minimum time period. As such, the




016000-10

manufacturer will guarantee the equipment equally in both instances. If such a

certification is not given, the equipment shall be judged to be defective. It shall

be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

7. Contractor shall store his equipment and materials at the job site in accordance

with the contract requirements and as hereinafter specified. All equipment and

materials shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations

and as directed by the Construction Manager, and in conformity to applicable

statutes, ordinances, regulations and rulings of the public authority having

jurisdiction. The Contractor shall provide a temporary storage building for

storage of all major equipment items to be stored on site prior to incorporation

into the Work. Provision shall be made for electric service to power space or

strip heaters as necessary. Where space or strip heaters are provided within the

enclosure for motors, valve operators, motor starters, panels, instruments, or

other electrical equipment, the Contractor shall make connections to these

heaters from an appropriate power source and operate the heaters with

temperature control as necessary until the equipment is installed and being

operated according to its intended use. Where space heaters are not provided

but temperature and/or humidity control are recommended by the equipment

manufacturer, and for all electric panels, Contractor shall provide temporary

heat as required to meet the requirements as directed by the Construction

Manager.

8. The Contractor shall maintain an equipment storage rotation log for all

equipment provided. Rotation log shall include, as a minimum, the equipment

identification, date stored, date removed from storage, copy of manufacturer’s

recommended storage guidelines, date of rotation of equipment, and signature

of party performing rotation. Moving parts shall be rotated a minimum of once

weekly. Contractor shall submit a copy of the rotation log to the Construction

Manager at each monthly progress meeting. Failure to properly maintain stored

materials is sufficient cause for rejection of the equipment by the Construction

Manager.

9. Contractor shall enforce the instructions of Construction Manager regarding

the posting of regulatory signs for loadings on structures, fire safety, and

smoking areas.

10. Contractor shall not store unnecessary materials or equipment on the job site,

and shall take care to prevent any structure from being loaded with a weight

that will endanger its security or the safety of persons.

11. Materials shall not be placed within 30 feet of fire hydrants or no closer than

allowed by local codes. Gutters, drainage channels and inlets shall be kept

unobstructed at all times.




016000-11

12. Stored materials shall not encroach upon private property without written

agreement that storage on their property is acceptable.

13. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make

periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained

under specific conditions and free from damage or deterioration.

14. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from

damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove covering

when no longer needed.

15. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment and supplies

sold and delivered to the Owner under this contract until final inspection of the

work and acceptance thereof by the Construction Manager and Owner. In the

event any such material, equipment and supplies are lost, stolen, damaged, or

destroyed prior to final inspection and acceptance, the Contractor shall replace

same without additional cost to the Owner.

16. Should the Contractor fail to take proper action on storage and handling of

equipment supplied under this Contract within seven days after written notice

to do so has been given, the Owner and Construction Manager retains the right

to correct all deficiencies noted in previously transmitted written notice and

deduct the cost associated with these corrections from the Contractor’s

contract. These costs may be comprised of expenditures for labor, equipment

usage, administrative, clerical, engineering, and any other costs associated with

making the necessary corrections.

C. Payment for stored equipment, if approved by the Construction Manager, will be made

only if the construction schedule indicates that the equipment will be installed within

3 months of the date of delivery to the project site and all other requirements are met

for stored material payments.

1.9 EQUIPMENT LIST AND TAGGING

A. Contractor shall supply an equipment and valve list for all equipment and valves 4

inches and larger in diameter. Equipment and valve list shall include identification

letters and numbers shown on the Contract plans. Lists in both hard copy and electronic

format shall accommodate Asset Management identification numbers that will be

provided by the Owner. Each piece of equipment shall be identified in the field with a

two color engraved nonmetallic label with ½-inch engraving showing both the drawing

identification number and the Owner’s Asset Management identification number.

Labels shall be permanently secured to all equipment and valves.




016000-12

1.10 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICATING EQUIPMENT

A. General: Contractor shall provide for his own use, as per manufacturer's

recommendations, any and all special tools required for installation, checking,

alignment, balancing, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance. (Special tools are

those which have been specially designed or adapted for use on parts of the equipment,

and which are not customarily and routinely carried by maintenance mechanics.)

1.11 CARE AND PROTECTION OF NEW ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND

INSTRUMENTATION

A. To insure adequate protection of all electrical and instrumentation equipment, panels,

electric motors, process controllers and the like, all such equipment shall be stored in

a suitable enclosure designed to protect the equipment from dust and within

temperature ranges as recommended by the manufacturer of such equipment.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the storage facilities and

equipment stored therein and shall make provisions for all utilities required.

C. Continuous access shall be provided to the Construction Manager for all equipment so

stored.

D. During storage and after installation, all such equipment shall be covered with

Visqueen (polyethylene sheet), and the covers shall be taped to protect the equipment

from dust.

E. The covers shall remain on the equipment at all times during the construction period

except when necessary to make connections, adjustments or tests on the equipment.

1.12 ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Where definite requirements are not set forth in the Specifications, all electrical

equipment, materials and work under this Contract shall comply with the requirements

of the Occupational Safety and health Act (OSHA) and shall be in accordance with

applicable standards of ANSI, IEEE, IPCEA, and NEMA. The work shall be performed

in compliance with the latest issue of the NEC, all applicable state and municipal

regulations and codes, and the service rules of Dominion Virginia Power, unless

otherwise specified or directed.

B. All equipment and materials shall be listed as complying with the requirements of the

Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. for the particular applications wherever available.




016000-13

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION




016000-14

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Starting and Placing Equipment in Operation



016550-1

SECTION 016550

STARTING AND PLACING EQUIPMENT IN OPERATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Scope of Work

B. Definitions

C. Related Requirements

D. Submittals

E. Quality Control

F. Physical Checkout

G. Initial Start-Up

H. Minimum Equipment Pre-Start-up Requirements

I. System Start-up Procedures

J. Vibration Testing

K. Corrections to the Work

L. Functional Test

M. 30-Day Performance Test

N. Miscellaneous Constraints

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Contractor shall initially test, start-up and place all mechanical,

instrumentation and controls and electrical equipment and related systems

and system components installed by the Contractor into successful

operation according to manufacturer’s written instructions and as instructed

by manufacturer's field service representatives. Provide all material, labor

tools, equipment, and expendables required. Starting and placing equipment




016550-2

in operation shall include the following steps: physical checkout, initial

checks, tests and start-up, and functional testing and performance testing.

B. Equipment testing, startup, functional testing and performance testing shall

be satisfactorily completed prior to the request for issuance of the certificate

of Substantial Completion.

C. The start-up and testing procedures specified herein represent the minimum

requirements. If different requirements are specified in the individual

equipment specifications, the Contractor shall comply with the more

stringent requirements. The Contractor is responsible for bringing any

conflicts in procedures with specified requirements and manufacturer’s

procedures to the Construction Manager’s attention; however, the

Contractor is not relieved from any requirements unless specifically waived

in writing by the Construction Manager.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Functional Test: A test or tests in the presence of the Construction Manager

to demonstrate that the installed equipment, subsystem, or system meets

manufacturer’s installation and adjustment requirements and other

requirements specified including, but not limited to, noise, vibration,

alignment, speed, proper electrical and mechanical connections, thrust

restraint, proper rotation, and initial servicing.

B. Performance Test: A test performed in the presence of the Construction

Manager and after any required functional test specified, to demonstrate and

confirm that the equipment and/or system meets the specified performance

requirements.

C. Subsystem, System: The overall process (System), or portion thereof

(Subsystem), that performs a specific function. A system may consist of two

or more subsystems as well as two or more types of equipment.

1.4 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Specifications

1. Section 011100 - Summary of Work

2. Section 013250 - Progress Schedule

3. Section 013300 - Submittals

4. Section 016000 - Material and Equipment

5. Section 017830 - Operation and Maintenance Data

6. Section 017890 - Contract Closeout




016550-3

7. Section 018200 - Training

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit name, address, telephone number, and resume of proposed field

services technicians at least 30 days in advance of the need for such

services.

B. Submit for review in accordance with Section 01330 detailed testing

procedures for shop tests, field performance tests and final acceptance tests

as specified in the various equipment specification sections. Test procedures

shall be submitted at least 30 days in advance of the proposed test dates and

shall include at least the following information:

1. Name of equipment to be tested, including reference to

specifications section number and title.

2. Testing schedule of proposed dates and times for testing.

3. Outline specific assignment of the responsibilities of the Contractor

and manufacturers' factory representatives or field service

personnel.

4. Detailed description of step-by-step equipment testing

requirements, with reference to appropriate standardized testing

procedures and laboratory analyses by established technical

organizations (e.g., ASTM, AWWA, Standard Methods, etc.).

C. Submit in accordance with Section 01330 copies of test reports upon

completion of specified shop, performance and acceptance tests. Test

reports shall incorporate the information provided in the test procedures

submittals, modified to reflect actual conduct of the tests and the following

additional information:

1. Copy of all test data sheets and results of lab analyses.

2. Summary comparison of specified test and performance

requirements vs actual test results.

3. Should actual test results fail to meet specified test and performance

requirements, describe action to be taken prior to re-testing

equipment.




016550-4

D. Submit in accordance with Section 01330 copies of the manufacturer's field

service technician's report summarizing the results of his/her initial

inspection, operation, adjustment and pre-tests. The report shall include

detailed descriptions and tabulations of the points inspected, tests and

adjustments made, quantitative results obtained, suggestions for precautions

to be taken to ensure proper maintenance, and the equipment supplier's

Certificate of Installation.

E. Submit detailed start-up plan for each piece of equipment in accordance

with the manufacturer’s recommendations and approved O&M manuals.

Submit in accordance with Section 01330 a detailed start-up plan that

addresses detailed sequencing and start-up for the entire plant and water

conveyance to and from the plant. This plan shall cover all chemicals, all

equipment, all basins, and all related regulations and limits.

F. Furnish Construction Manager with three copies of the following. When

training is specified, furnish the copies at least 10 working days prior to

training.

1. "Certificate of Installation, Inspection and Start-up Services" by

manufacturers' representatives for each piece of equipment and each

system specified, certifying:

a. That equipment is installed in accordance with the

manufacturers' recommendations, approved shop drawings

and the Contract Documents.

b. That nothing in the installation voids any warranty.

c. That equipment has been operated in the presence of the

manufacturer's representative.

d. That equipment, as installed, is ready to be operated by

others.

2. Detailed report by manufacturers' representatives, for review by

Construction Manager of the installation, inspection and start-up

services performed, including:

a. Description of calibration and adjustments if made. Attach

copy.

b. Description of any parts replaced and why replaced.

c. Type, brand name, and quantity of lubrication used, if any.

d. General condition of equipment.

e. Description of problems encountered, and corrective action

taken.




016550-5

3. Detailed reports by Construction Manager of the equipment

acceptance tests (Section 01450).

4. Any special instructions left with Contractor or Construction

Manager.

G. Furnish Construction Manager with Certification of Calibration of all

testing equipment.

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall comply with this section, Section 01450 requirements,

and the specific equipment specifications for all equipment requiring

specific start-up procedures. The Contractor shall comply with all required

Quality Control procedures whether specified in the Contract Documents or

recommended by the Manufacturer’s published installation and start-up

documentation, including provision of authorized representatives to be

present at site to inspect, check, test, and approve equipment installation

prior to startup; supervision of placing equipment in operation; and

provision of a written report that equipment has been properly installed and

lubricated, is in accurate alignment, is free from any undue stress imposed

by connecting lines or anchor bolts, and has been satisfactorily operated

under full load conditions.

1.7 PHYSICAL CHECKOUT

A. Contractor shall conduct a physical checkout of all new equipment to insure

that installation is proper and complete. The manufacturer’s authorized

representative shall perform checkout and certify the installation.

B. General activities include:

1. Cleaning.

2. Removing temporary protective coatings.

3. Flushing and replacing greases and lubricants, where required by

manufacturer.

4. Lubrication: Synthetic oil is to be provided and used unless the

original equipment manufacturer states that they are not to be used.

5. Check shaft and coupling alignments and reset where needed.




016550-6

6. Check and set motor, pump and other equipment rotation, safety

interlocks, and belt tensions.

7. Check and correct if necessary leveling plates, grout, bearing plates,

anchor bolts, fasteners, and alignment of piping which may put

stress on pumping equipment connected to it.

8. All adjustments required.

9. Provide initial filling of lubricants and all other required operating

fluids.

1.8 INITIAL START-UP

A. Following physical checkout, Contractor shall perform initial start-up of

component equipment, under the supervision of the manufacturer’s

representative.

B. Contractor shall provide fuel, electricity, water, filters, and other

expendables required for initial start-up of equipment unless otherwise

specified.

C. Construction Manager and Owner may provide personnel to assist

Contractor in the initial start-up, but the prime responsibility for proper

mechanical operation will belong to Contractor. Manufacturers’

representatives shall be present during initial start-up and operation unless

otherwise acceptable to Construction Manager.

D. Start-up of either the heating or air conditioning systems is dependent upon

the time of year that the plant start-up is initiated. Contractor will be

required to return at the beginning of the next heating or air conditioning

season (whichever is applicable) to start the appropriate system.

1.9 MINIMUM EQUIPMENT PRE-START-UP REQUIREMENTS

A. Bearings and Shafting:

1. Inspect for cleanliness, clean and remove foreign materials.

2. Verify alignment.

3. Replace defective bearings, and those that run rough or noisy.

4. Grease as necessary in accord with manufacturer's

recommendations.

B. Drives:




016550-7

1. Adjust tension in V-belt drives, and adjust vari-pitch sheaves and

drives for proper equipment speed.

2. Adjust drives for alignment of sheaves and V-belts.

3. Clean and remove foreign materials before starting operation.

4. Verify proper lubrication including grease and oil levels.

C. Motors:

1. Check each motor for comparison to amperage nameplate value.

2. Correct conditions which produce excessive current flow, and which

exist due to equipment malfunction.

D. Pumps:

1. Check glands and seals for cleanliness and adjustment before

running pump.

2. Inspect shaft sleeves for scoring.

3. Inspect mechanical faces, chambers, and seal rings, and replace if

defective.

4. Verify that piping system is free of dirt and scale before circulating

liquid through the pump.

E. Valves:

1. Inspect hand and automatic control valves, clean bonnets and stems.

2. Tighten packing glands to assure no leakage, but permit valve stems

to operate without galling.

3. Replace packing in valves to retain maximum adjustment after

system is judged complete.

4. Replace packing on any valve which continues to leak.

5. Remove and repair bonnets which leak.

6. Coat packing gland threads and valve stems with a surface

preparation of "Moly-Cote" or "Fel-Pro", after cleaning.

F. Verify that control valve seats are free from foreign material, and are

properly positioned for intended service.

G. Tighten flanges and all other pipe joints after system has been placed in

operation.

1. Replace gaskets, which show any sign of leakage after tightening.

H. Inspect all joints for leakage.




016550-8

1. Promptly remake each joint that appears to be faulty; do not wait for

rust to form.

2. Clean threads on both parts, apply compound and remake joints.

I. After system has been placed in operation, clean strainers, drives, pockets,

orifices, valve seats and headers in fluid system, to assure freedom from

foreign materials.

J. Gates:

1. Inspect hand and automatic control gate operators, clean bonnets

and stems.

2. Adjust gate operators and stem guides to operate without galling.

3. Inspect, adjust and/or replace gate seals to correct leakage.

K. Remove rust, scale and foreign materials from equipment and renew

defaced surfaces.

L. Set and calibrate draft gages of air filters and other equipment.

M. Inspect fan wheels for clearance and balance. Provide factory-authorized

personnel for adjustment when needed.

N. Check each electrical control circuit, VFD’s, and other control equipment

to assure that operation complies with Specifications and contract

requirements to provide desired performance.

O. Inspect each pressure gage and thermometer for calibration. Replace items

which are defaced, broken, or which read incorrectly.

P. Repair damaged insulation.

Q. PLC and Digital Control Systems:

1. Point-to-point input and output signal check lists completed.

2. PLC and digital control panel shop test completed and shop test

reports approved by Construction Manager.

3. PLC and digital control panel installation completed including

application software installation.




016550-9

1.10 SYSTEM START-UP PROCEDURES

A. General: After all component pieces of equipment have been successfully

checked and started, a functional or system start-up test will be required for

all process equipment, HVAC, and electrical and instrumentation systems.

B. Function Tests: Specific functional tests shall be performed by the

Contractor in addition to the requirements of shop, field and other tests

called for in the technical specifications. Such tests shall demonstrate that

the component equipment functions as an entire system in accordance with

the design requirements.

1. The function testing shall include the completion of the Field

Testing Check Lists and other testing requirements of Section

01450, Quality Control.

2. The Construction Manager, Engineer and Owner may witness these

tests, at their option.

3. Approval of the functional test package by the Construction

Manager will be made within two weeks of the test date. Incorporate

minor comments on the procedures, equipment, and personnel prior

to testing. Major comments by the Construction Manager will

require a resubmission of the functional test package and test data.

4. Submit within one week after completion of the tests, the following

to the Construction Manager for approval:

a. Completed test forms for each device or system tested on

forms approved prior to the test.

b. Completed certification, the content of which was approved

prior to the tests.

c. A written summary of testing, reporting on the results and

summarizing the entire procedure.

d. A schedule for retesting, if necessary, including changes to

procedures, testing devices, or personnel. Any retesting

required to fulfill the intent of the test requirements due to

negligence, poor workmanship, or products that fail to meet

the Contract requirements shall be at no additional cost to

the Construction Manager or Owner.




016550-10

1.11 VIBRATION TESTING

A. Unless specified otherwise in the detailed equipment specifications, each

pump, blower, compressor, motor, or similar item of stationary rotating

equipment having a rated power in excess of 15 HP shall be tested after

installation for acceptable vibration levels as follows:

B. Vibration testing shall be performed by an experienced independent

factory-trained and authorized analysis expert (not a sales representative)

retained by the Contractor and approved by the Construction Manager. Each

unit or pump system shall be tested separately without duplicate equipment

running. All field testing shall be done in the presence of the Construction

Manager. The Construction Manager shall be furnished with four certified

copies of vibration test data for each test performed.

C. For systems with variable speed drives, tests shall be conducted at various

speeds between maximum and minimum. For systems with two-speed

drives, tests shall be conducted at both speeds. For systems with constant

speed drive, tests shall be conducted under various loading conditions as

determined by the Construction Manager.

D. Rotating equipment shall be tested for vibration in the field after installation

by the following method. Equipment, complete with drive systems in place

at the job site, shall not vibrate more than the values allowed herein, unless

otherwise specified in the detailed equipment specifications. All field tests

shall be running tests with the equipment operating on the product for which

it is intended, or a substitute acceptable to the Construction Manager. The

term displacement, as used herein, shall mean total peak-to-peak movement

of vibrating equipment, in mils; velocity or speed of the vibration cycle,

measured in G’s. Displacement and velocity shall be measured by suitable

equipment equal to IRD Mechanalysis, Bentley, Nevada.

E. Frequency of vibration, in cycles per minute (cpm), shall be determined

when vibration exceeds specified levels or as otherwise necessary.

Vibration shall be measured on the bearing housing, unless other locations

are deemed necessary by the vibration analysis expert and Construction

Manager.

F. For all equipment tested, vibration shall be checked in the radial and axial

directions. For pumps, axial vibration shall not exceed 0.1 in/sec; and radial

vibration shall not exceed that permitted by the Hydraulic Institute

Standards except that, at vibration frequencies in excess of 8,000 cpm, the

velocity shall not exceed 0.2 in/sec. In cases where vibration requirements




016550-11

are more stringent in the individual technical specifications, those

requirements shall prevail.

G. For gear boxes, gear reducers, speed increasers, etc., vibration shall be

tested by either velocity or acceleration measurements, as deemed

appropriate by the Construction Manager and the vibration analysis expert.

Unless otherwise specified in the detailed equipment specifications, radial

vibration shall not exceed 0.2 in/sec; axial vibration shall not exceed 0.1

in/sec.

H. Unless otherwise specified for all fans, radial and axial vibration shall not

exceed 0.1 in/sec in accordance with GSA PBS 15-15. For all other

equipment, radial vibration shall not exceed 0.2 in/sec, and axial vibration

shall not exceed 0.1 in/sec.

I. All rotating assemblies of high speed equipment shall be statically and

dynamically balanced. The dynamic balance data must be certified and

results submitted to the Construction Manager.

J. Unless otherwise specified, critical speeds of all rotating equipment shall

meet the following:

1. For still shaft designs, the first critical speed of the rotating

equipment shall be at least 25 percent above the maximum design

operating speed.

2. For flexible shaft designs, critical speeds will be at least 25 percent

above or below normal design operating speeds.

K. The Contractor shall be responsible for unit and system assembly vibration

testing and their results, which shall be within the specified limits. Copies

of test results shall be submitted to the Construction Manager for review.

Should the vibration field test results exceed shop test results or the limits

specified herein, the Contractor shall correct the deficiencies within 30

days. After corrections have been completed, the vibration testing shall be

re-run and the results re-submitted to the Construction Manager for review.

L. Noise or vibration in any rotating equipment, which the Construction

Manager or Engineer judges to be excessive or damaging, shall be cause for

rejection.




016550-12

1.12 CORRECTIONS TO THE WORK

A. Contractor shall correct any items of work failing to meet the specified

requirements at no cost to the Owner. Correct the nonconforming items by

rework, modification or replacement as directed by the Construction

Manager. All corrected items shall be re-tested at no additional cost.

1.13 FUNCTIONAL TEST

A. Once all associated infrastructure has been completed and individual system

functional tested completed, demonstrate functional testing for a minimum

one hour period of successful operation and then all facilities must also run

for the performance testing without interruption or failure as a prerequisite

to Substantial Completion.

B. Complete the Field Testing Check Lists shown in Section 01450 and correct

all problems identified.

C. If other unrelated Work by other Contractors is incomplete and is necessary

to complete Functional Testing of any equipment or systems, Contractor

shall reschedule their test, within their Contract Times, at no additional cost

to the Owner.

D. All chemical systems shall be successfully tested with water during the

Functional Test.

1.14 30-DAY PERFORMANCE TEST

A. Prior to Substantial Completion of the installation, the Contractor shall

oversee a 30-day, process performance test of the completed facility. During

the 30-day process performance test the completed construction shall be

operated by Construction Manager and Owner staff under the direction of

Contractor and shall continuously meet all performance requirements

established by the Contract Documents and Project requirements and shall

operate without fault, failure or defect for a continuous period of 30 calendar

days. Individual equipment failures that are corrected within 24 hours and

do not prevent the entire Project from continuously satisfying the

established performance requirements shall not require the 30 day

consecutive test to be re-started unless the failure recurs.

1. Any failure of the complete Project construction to meet all

performance requirements, or any individual equipment failure that

(a) requires more than 24 hours to correct, (b) recurs during the 24

hour correction period requiring further correction, or (c) occurs




016550-13

more than once during the test period, shall require the 30 day

consecutive test period to be restarted. (NOTE: All O&M manuals

shall be approved and turned over and field training shall be

completed no sooner than 15 days prior to start of 30-day

Performance Test).

B. Contractor Responsibilities

1. Review performance test requirements and procedures.

2. Correct any outstanding punchlist items prior to the test.

3. Provide specified start-up materials and operating supplies for the

30-day tests duration.

4. Provide Supplier’s authorized representative to supervise placing

equipment or systems in operation and provide guidance during

performance testing per applicable specification section.

5. Provide to the Construction Manager a list of 24-hour “on call”

representative supervisory persons who will monitor the

performance testing and serve as liaison for the Construction

Manager and Owner.

6. Provide the necessary craft or labor assistance, in the event of an

emergency equipment failure requiring immediate attention

(emergency is defined as a failure of function which precludes the

further operation of a critical segment of; or the whole of the work)

with a response time of not less than four hours from the time of

notification.

7. Provide necessary Supplier’s representatives and operating supplies

for retesting systems that fail to pass the initial performance tests

due to deficiencies in products or workmanship at no additional cost

to the Construction Manager and Owner.

8. Provide to the Construction Manager a performance test report for

approval which details all testing conducted and any problems

experienced and how problems were corrected. The Contractor shall

obtain approval of the Performance Test Report prior to requesting

project substation completion.

C. If other unrelated Work by other Contractors is incomplete and is necessary

to complete 30-Day Performance Testing of any equipment or systems,




016550-14

Contractor shall reschedule their test, within their Contract Times, at no

additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FUNCTIONAL TESTING

A. Field Test Participation: Provide competent and experienced technical

representatives of all equipment manufacturers and system suppliers as

necessary to participate in field testing of the equipment.

B. Trouble-Free Operation: Provide competent and experienced technical

representatives of all equipment manufacturers and system suppliers as

necessary to place the equipment in trouble-free operation after completion

of start-up and field tests.

APPENDIX A – FUNCTIONAL TESTING PROCEDURES

This appendix contains general Functional Testing Procedures.

APPENDIX B – PERFORMANCE TESTING PROCEDURES

This appendix contains general Performance Testing procedures and the Manufacturers’

Certificate of Installation, Testing and Instruction.

END OF SECTION


016550-15

APPENDIX A

FUNCTIONAL TESTING PROCEDURES

A-1 GENERAL

1. Prior to the introduction of water into any tank, pumping system, or operating any

mechanical equipment, conduct a thorough inspection of the tank removing all

debris. Check all related mechanical equipment and pipelines for extraneous

materials and remove such materials prior to operating the mechanical equipment.

2. Lubricate all equipment prior to test. Lubrication shall be performed as

recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

3. During the test period, test all alarm and control functions of the system and

complete final testing check lists or equipment for function in accordance with the

Contract Documents.

4. Demonstrate that all controls, panels and other ancillary equipment associated

with the system being tested perform as indicated and as specified during the

testing. Replace any defective items at no cost to the Owner. If failure of these

devices halts the testing while in progress, the test shall be rerun at no additional

cost to the Owner.

016550-16

NO TEXT FOR THIS PAGE

016550-17

APPENDIX B

PERFORMANCE TESTING PROCEDURES

B-1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF PERFORMANCE TESTING

1. All checkout and functional testing of the system or equipment being tested shall

have been successfully completed prior to performance testing.

2. All installed instrumentation and controls shall be available for all systems or

equipment being tested during the entire test period.

3. The Contractor shall provide operating supplies (fuel, lubricants, chemicals,

power, etc.) in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

4. The equipment and process control devices shall be operated by the Owner under

the guidance of the Construction Manager and Supplier’s representatives. Facility

operation during the performance testing will be carried out by the Owner staff

under Contractor’s direction and monitored by the Construction Manager and

Contractor.

5. Systems or equipment failing to perform as specified shall be retested at the

direction of the Construction Manager.

6. The Contractor shall be available at all times during the performance tests to

repair, correct, adjust or replace faulty equipment and instrumentation at no cost

to the Construction Manager or Owner.

B-2 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE

Upon successful completion of the performance test, each major manufacturer shall

complete an EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF

INSTALLATION, INSPECTION AND START-UP SERVICES certificate (form

follows).

016550-18

CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION, INSPECTION AND START-UP SERVICES

Project

Equipment

Specification Section

Contract

I hereby certify that the named equipment has been inspected, adjusted and operated by the Manufacturers'

Representative and further certify:

1. That the equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations,

approved shop drawings and the Contract Documents.

2. That nothing in the installation voids any warranty.

3. That equipment has been operated in the presence of the manufacturer's representative.

4. That equipment, as installed, is ready to be operated by others.

MANUFACTURERS' REPRESENTATIVE

Signature Date

Name (print)

Title

Representing

CONTRACTOR

Signature Date

Name (print)

Title

Attach the detailed report called for by Specification Section 014500.

Complete and submit three copies of this form with the detailed report to CONSTRUCTION MANAGER

as specified.

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Lines and Grades



017220-1

SECTION 017220

LINES AND GRADES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. General

B. Surveys

C. Datum Plane

D. Protection of Survey Data

1.2 GENERAL

A. Construct all work in accordance with the lines and grades shown on the Drawings.

Assume full responsibility for keeping all alignment and grade.

1.3 SURVEYS

A. Control Points: Perform all survey, layout, and measurement work.

1. Keep Construction Manager informed, sufficiently in advance, of the times

and places at which survey, layout, and measurement work is to be

performed.

2. Provide an experienced survey crew including an instrument operator,

competent assistants, and any instruments, tools, stakes, and other materials

required to complete the survey, layout, and measurement of work

performed by the Contractor.

1.4 DATUM PLANE

A. All elevations indicated or specified refer to the U.S.C. & G.S. Datum are expressed

in feet and decimal parts thereof, or in feet and inches.

Mean Low Water Datum (U.S.C. & G.S.) = City Datum - 1.36

Mean Sea Level Datum (U.S.C. & G.S.) = City Datum - 0.19

Zero of U.S. Weather Bureau Gauge = City Datum +2.15

B. Horizontal coordinates are Virginia State Plan coordinates.

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Lines and Grades



017220-2

1.5 PROTECTION OF SURVEY DATA

A. General: Safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, known property corners,

monuments, and bench marks made or established for the Work. Reestablish them

if disturbed, and bear the entire expense of checking reestablished marks and

rectifying work improperly installed.

B. Records: Keep neat and legible notes of measurements and calculations made in

connection with the layout of the Work. Furnish copies of such data to the

Construction Manager for use in checking the Contractor's layout. Data considered

of value to the Owner will be transmitted to the Owner by the Construction

Manager with other records on completion of the Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Cleaning



017400-1

SECTION 017400

CLEANING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Final Cleaning

B. Final Inspection

1.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. Requirements: At the completion of work and immediately prior to final

inspection, clean the entire project as follows:

1. Thoroughly clean, sweep, wash, and polish all work and equipment

provided under the Contract, including finishes. Leave the structures and

site in a complete and finished condition to the satisfaction of the


2. Direct all subcontractors to similarly perform, at the same time, an

equivalent thorough cleaning of all work and equipment provided under

their contracts.

3. Remove all temporary structures and all debris, including dirt, sand, gravel,

rubbish and waste material.

4. Should the Contractor not remove rubbish or debris or not clean the

buildings and site as specified above, the Owner reserves the right to have

the cleaning done at the expense of the Contractor.

B. Employ experienced workers, or professional cleaners, for final cleaning.

C. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be

cleaned.

D. In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, conduct final inspection of

sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces, and of concealed spaces.

E. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials

from sight-exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces. Polish surfaces so

designated to shine finish.

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Cleaning



017400-2

F. Repair, patch, and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent

surfaces.

G. Remove snow and ice from access to buildings.

H. Vacuum clean all interior spaces, including inside cabinets.

I. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible. Do not

drop or throw materials from heights.

J. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from

cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly-painted surfaces.

K. Clean interior of all panel cabinets, pull boxes, and other equipment enclosures.

L. Wash and wipe clean all lighting fixtures, lamps, and other electrical equipment

which may have become soiled during installation.

M. Perform touch-up painting.

N. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of the grounds.

O. Remove erection plant, tools, temporary structures and other materials.

P. Remove and dispose of all water, dirt, rubbish or any other foreign substances.

1.3 FINAL INSPECTION

A. After cleaning is complete the final inspection may be scheduled. The inspection

will be done with the Owner and Construction Manager.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Lead Paint Coated Materials Management



017420 - 1

017420SECTION 017420

LEAD PAINT COATED MATERIALS MANAGEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PURPOSE

A. This Specification sets out the requirements for worker protection, environmental

protection, and waste disposal for protecting the public, Contractor workers, other

job site workers, and the environment during stabilization and removal of surface

coatings containing lead at the exterior of the City of Richmond Water Filtration

Plant buildings in preparation of re-coating.

B. The scope of work involves the removal of painted wood fascia at the exterior of

the Plant 1 and Plant 2 buildings and the stabilization and removal of delaminated

and deteriorated lead containing surface coating (paint) on wood fascia and

underlying steel I-beam and roof supports at the exterior of the Plant 2 building.

The limits and location of the fascia replacement and stabilization of the steel beams

and associated roof members for Plant 2 are shown on the contract drawings.

Painted fascia boards are to be removed and disposed of as construction debris.

Lead paint coatings, on the steel I-beam surfaces at the building exterior at the

fascia, are to be stabilized in order to remove deteriorated and delaminated paint.

Paint removal methods may include the use of wet scraping techniques, HEPA

exhausted sanders, powered scrapers, needle guns or roto peeners, chemical

removal (not methylene chloride based), vacuum, water blasting or other methods

that minimize the generation of lead-containing dust. Minimizing the amount of

dust is crucial. Abrasive blasting may be utilized, but must be done inside an

approved enclosure. Lead containing debris must be vacuumed. Vacuum(s) must

be equipped with a HEPA filter.

1. Prohibited Lead Paint / Dust Removal Methods:

a) Open flame burning

b) Chemical stripping with methylene chloride based paint strippers

c) Uncontained abrasive blasting

d) Uncontained power washing

e) Dry sanding or scraping

f) Power sanding without HEPA attachment

g) Hot cutting or welding prior to removing lead paint.

C. Samples of the coatings at the exterior of steel I-beams and roof supports at the Plant

2 building have been analyzed and found to contain detectable concentrations of lead.

1. Test results are provided for bidding purposes only. At project start up,

conduct worker exposure monitoring for all metals that may be present in




017420 - 2

the paint, and adjust all protection, training, medical surveillance, and

recordkeeping provisions according to the results. Note that the results of

any worker exposure monitoring that is undertaken by the Contractor have

no bearing on the environmental protection and waste handling

requirements of this specification.

1.2 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE

A. Implement and maintain programs and procedures which comply with the

requirements of this Specification and all applicable standards and regulations.

Comply with all applicable regulations even if the regulation is not specifically

referenced herein. If a State or local regulation is more restrictive than the

requirements of this Specification, follow the more restrictive requirements.

B. Identification of the items in this specification which are of specific interest to the

City of Richmond in no way relieves the Contractor of the responsibility to comply

with all regulatory requirements, nor should it be construed that the City of

Richmond, the EPA, OSHA, or state and local regulators are only interested in

these items.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Latest Edition - the latest edition of the following acts, regulations, guides, and

standards form a part of this Specification.

B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

1. 29 CFR 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Regulations for

General Industry

2. 29 CFR 1910.134, Respiratory Protection

3. 29 CFR 1926, Occupational Safety and Health Regulations for the

Construction Industry

4. 29 CFR 1926.20, General Safety and Health Provisions

5. 29 CFR 1926.21, Safety Training and Education

6. 29 CFR 1926.51, Sanitation

7. 29 CFR 1926.55, Gases, Vapors, Fumes, Dusts, and Mists

8. 29 CFR 1926.62, Lead

9. 29 CFR 1926.103, Respiratory Protection

F. State and Local Regulations

1. 16 VAC 25 -175 – 1926.62 – Virginia OSHA Lead Standard




017420 - 3

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Lead Health and Safety Plan

A Lead Health and Safety Plan (LHASP) must be developed by the Contractor and

submitted to the Owner prior to the Initiation of work and should be specific to the

job site. Filing of the plan will not constitute approval by the Owner. A copy of the

OSHA Lead Standard and other prevailing regulations should be submitted with

this plan. Safety Data Sheets (SDSs) for any chemical products to be used on the

site should be submitted. The contractor's project supervisor shall demonstrate that

he or she has read and understands these documents. Training certifications for

supervisors and employees shall be submitted. A copy of the LHASP, applicable

standards, SDSs and Certifications must be on site at all times.

The LHASP must include, but is not limited to

a. General Introduction

b. Lead Health and Safety Organization and Responsibilities

c. Exposure Monitoring for Lead and Other Known Hazards

d. Engineering and Administrative Controls

e. Respiratory Protection

f. Protective Work Clothing and Equipment

g. Hygiene Facilities and Practices

h. Housekeeping, including protection of existing plant water treatment and

storage facilities and equipment

i. Medical Surveillance Program, including Medical Removal Protections and

Appropriate Worker Notification Procedures

j. Decontamination Procedures

k. Employee Information and Training Procedures

l. Record Keeping

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ABRASIVE BLASTING MATERIALS

Abrasive blasting with abrasive containing crystalline silica can cause serious or fatal

respiratory disease. The National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)

has recommended that the use of abrasive containing more than 1% crystalline silica be

prohibited.




017420 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKER PROTECTION

A. Engineering and Work Practice Controls

Engineering and work practice controls shall be the primary control methods to

limit exposure to lead and other occupational hazards. Where feasible, preference

shall be given to those paint removal and surface preparation methods which

capture debris at the source. Lead-containing paint must be removed prior to

welding or torch cutting of surfaces. 29 CFR Part 1926.354 requires that paint be

removed at least 4 inches from the area of heat application in enclosed spaces. In

the open air, employees shall be protected by a respirator. All power tools used for

paint removal shall be equipped with vacuum shrouds which capture fine dust at

the point and time of generation, and transport the dust to collection systems

equipped with HEPA filters. Such tools include needle guns, scrapers, and roto

peeners. Extended handles should be used on cutting tools whenever possible to

reduce exposure.

B. Training

Lead specific training should at a minimum, satisfy existing federal and state

regulations. Training on other specific hazards identified on the site shall also be

provided. The employer must have a written plan developed for conducting

employee training of lead hazards in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62(l). The

training will cover, at a minimum:

The content of the interim lead standard and its appendices;

The sources and degree of lead exposure associated with specific tasks;

The purpose, proper selection, fitting, use and limitations of respirators;

The purpose and description of medical surveillance and medical removal

protection including the health effects of lead;

Engineering controls and work practices associated with the employee's job

assignment including training on work practices that reduce lead exposure;

The contents of the LHASP

Instructions that chelating agents should never be used except under the

direction of a licensed physician and never as a routine method of removing

lead from the body;

The right of employees and their designated representatives to exposure and

medical records in a timely manner as specified in 29 CFR 1910.20.

Training content and duration must comply with EPA Standards, or state and local

standards which are at least as protective as the EPA standards. Documentation

which verifies that training for workers and supervisors is current and valid must




017420 - 5

be on site at all times. Training must be presented in a language that is

understandable to workers.

C. Exposure Monitoring/Initial Assessment

1. Collect representative personal air samples at the beginning of the paint

stabilization work (at project start-up) to determine employee exposures to

lead and other toxic metals that might be present in the coating. Tasks

resulting in the potential exposure to toxic metals include, but are not

limited to, pressure water washing, vacuum shrouded power tool cleaning,

dry or wet abrasive blast cleaning, cleanup, and debris handling operations.

Collect full shift (at least 7 hours) air samples for workers in each job

classification in each exposure area. Provide the City of Richmond with the

results of the analysis within the same 5 day notification period required

for the employees.

2. When lead is present, protect workers during the initial monitoring to the

anticipated exposure levels as dictated by 29 CFR 1926.62 and as

specified below. A few activities in addition to those identified by OSHA

are included. Use the same level of protection when other toxic metals are

found in the coating, unless OSHA has developed a comprehensive health

and safety standard for that metal (e.g., cadmium and inorganic arsenic).

In those cases, implement the protection requirements of the standard for

that metal.

a) Assume an exposure of at least 50 µg/m3: Manual demolition of

structures containing lead-containing coatings or paint (e.g., dry

wall), manual scraping, manual sanding, heat gun applications,

power tool cleaning with dust collection systems, and spray

painting with lead paint. Although not identified in 29 CFR

1926.62, include water washing and the operation of abrasive grit

recovery equipment in this category.

b) Assume an exposure of at least 500 µg/m3: Using lead-containing

mortar, lead burning, or conducting the following activities where

lead-containing coatings or paint are present: rivet busting, power

tool cleaning without dust collection systems, cleanup activities

where dry expendable abrasives are used, and the movement and

removal of abrasive blasting enclosures. Although not identified in

29 CFR 1926.62, include water jetting and wet abrasive blasting

removal of paint in this category.

c) Assume an exposure of more than 2,500 µg/m3: Activities

involving lead containing coatings or paint on structures

disturbed by abrasive blasting, welding, cutting, and torch

burning.




017420 - 6

d) During any of the above activities, provide appropriate respiratory

protection, personal protective clothing and equipment, change

areas and washing facilities, and employee training. Maintain the

protection as specified above until the test results are received, then

modify the protection measures as necessary.

3. Collect and analyze all air samples according to the appropriate NIOSH

method, or equivalent, for the metal of concern (e.g., Method 7082 for lead,

Method 7048 for cadmium, Method 7300 for chromium, and Method 7900

for inorganic arsenic).

4. Conduct periodic monitoring of Contractor workers, and provide written

employee notifications within five days of receipt of results in accordance

with the applicable OSHA standard for the metal of concern (e.g., 29 CFR

1926.62 for lead). At a minimum, this requires monitoring at project start

up, and after any changes in work practices are made which could have

an effect on airborne exposures. If there is no OSHA standard for the

detected metal, conduct the monitoring and employee notification based

on the requirements of OSHA 29 CFR 1926.62. Provide the City of

Richmond with the results of any subsequent monitoring within the same

5 day notification period required for the employee.

D. Action Level

1. The Action Level for lead is 30 µg/m3 as an eight (8) hour Time Weighted

Average (TWA).

2. In addition to the initial protection provided, invoke the following protective

measures when the airborne exposure to a toxic metal found in the coating

exceeds the Action Level, as specified in 29 CFR 1926.62:

a) Exposure Monitoring

b) Housekeeping

c) Employee Medical Surveillance and Medical Removal

Protection

d) Employee Information and Training

e) Signs and Regulated Areas

f) Recordkeeping

E. Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)

1. The PEL for airborne lead exposure is 50 µg/m3 as an 8 hour TWA.




017420 - 7

2. In the event that extended work shifts are allowed, use the following

formula to adjust the PEL: Adjusted PEL = 8 hr. PEL x (8 ÷ hours worked

in a day).

3. In addition to complying with the requirements identified when exceeding

the Action Level, invoke the following protective measures when the

airborne exposure to a toxic metal found in the coating exceeds the PEL,

as specified in 29 CFR 1926.62:

a) Compliance Program, including engineering, administrative, and

work practice controls

b) Respiratory Protection

c) Protective Clothing and Equipment

d) Hygiene Facilities and Practices

F. Housekeeping

1. Clean accumulations of dust or debris containing lead or other toxic metals

daily, at a minimum. Clean more frequently if visible accumulations are

observed that could be carried outside of the regulated area by wind, workers

shoes, rain water, or other means.

2. Conduct all cleaning with HEPA-filtered vacuums. Do not use compressed

air for housekeeping purposes unless it is used in conjunction with a

ventilation system capable of capturing the resulting airborne particulate.

3. Containerize any debris for proper disposal.

G. Respiratory Protection Program

The contractor shall implement a respiratory protection program in accordance with

the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.134. The minimum respiratory protective

equipment shall be selected based upon the task that a worker performs as specified

in the Interim Lead Standard (29 CFR 1926.62(d)).

These requirements can be modified if, and only if, the City’s Industrial Hygiene

Consultant can verify that exposures permit the use of other less protective

respirators. Contractors must supply workers with respirators that are NIOSH

certified at no expense to the worker.

H. Protective Clothing and Equipment

1. Provide protective clothing and equipment and ensure they are worn

by all employees who enter regulated areas.




017420 - 8

2. Clean or replace the protective clothing as required by the appropriate

OSHA standard for the toxic metal that is present. In the case of lead, clean

or replace the clothing weekly if the airborne exposure levels are less than

200 µg/m3 as an 8-hour TWA; clean or replace the clothing daily if the

exposure levels are greater than or equal to 200 µg/m3. Do not use

disposable clothing for any longer than one day.

3. Do not remove or clean the clothing by any means that reintroduces the

toxic metals into the ambient air such as brushing, shaking, or blowing. Use

vacuums equipped with HEPA filters for cleaning.

4. Store the used clothing in labeled, sealed containers.

a) If the clothing is to be laundered and it has been exposed to lead, label

the containers with the following: “CAUTION: CLOTHING

CONTAMINATED WITH LEAD. DO NOT REMOVE DUST BY

BLOWING OR SHAKING. DISPOSE OF LEAD

CONTAMINATED WASH WATER IN ACCORDANCE WITH

APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE, OR FEDERAL

REGULATIONS”.

b) If the clothing is disposable, label the containers as clothing

contaminated with lead and other toxic metals, if applicable. Apply

hazardous waste labels as appropriate after testing.

I. Personal Hygiene Facilities and Equipment

1. Provide clean lavatory and hand washing facilities in accordance with

OSHA sanitation standard 29 CFR 1926.51. Locate the hand washing

facilities in close proximity to the paint removal operation, in an area that is

convenient for washing prior to eating or smoking.

2. Provide showers when exposures exceed the PEL. Confirm that all

employees whose exposures exceed the PEL shower prior to leaving the

project site. Allow City of Richmond Representatives to use the lavatory

and hand washing/shower facilities.

3. Filter and containerize all hygiene water. Provide filtration and testing of

the water as described above under Protective Clothing and Equipment.

4. Prohibit eating, drinking, smoking, chewing of food or tobacco products,

or the application of cosmetics in any area where the exposure to toxic

metals exceeds the PEL or within regulated areas, and confirm that




017420 - 9

workers thoroughly wash hands and face prior to undertaking any of

these activities.

5. Provide clean lunch and break areas for use by all employees, and maintain

airborne concentrations in these areas below the Action Levels.

6. Provide clean change area(s) for employees whose exposures exceed the

PEL. Equip the change area(s) with separate storage facilities for street

clothing that are adequately segregated to prevent cross-contamination

from work clothing. Assure that employees do not leave the project site

wearing any clothing that was worn while performing activities where

exposures exceeded the PEL.

3.2 WORK AREA PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare Work Areas in a manner that will protect Owner's personnel and

property and contain the work area so that no dust or debris leaves the work area.

B. Preparing Building Exteriors: Ensure adequate measures are in place to prevent dust and

debris from escaping the work area and to limit airborne lead content below the Action

Level of 30 ug/m3 (micrograms per cubic meter) adjacent to the Work Area.

1. Close all doors and windows of the buildings.

2. Erect barricades and install warning tape or signs as necessary to prevent

inadvertent exposure of passersby to LBP in all forms, including, but not

necessarily limited to dust, particles, and fumes.

3. Completely cover grounds and any vegetation extending 10 feet beyond the

perimeter or a sufficient distance to collect falling debris with minimum 6-mil

thick polyethylene sheets with joints between sheets lapped and taped; with one

edge taped to adjacent building surfaces below area of work; and with free ends

secured in position with stakes, tie-down lines or weights. Cover sufficient ground

area to capture wind-blown chips, dust and particles. Contractor is responsible for

any paint debris found at project completion.

Special precautions for protection of treated water contained within the Filter

Galleries is required. The Contractor shall protect the Filter Galleries in a manner

that minimizes paint chip waste from entering the water.

4. Post warning signs at all entrances to the Work Area that states the following, as

required in OSHA Lead in Construction Standard:




017420 - 10

DANGER

LEAD WORK AREA

MAY DAMAGE FERTILITY OR THE UNBORN CHILD

CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM

DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE IN THIS AREA

3.3 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL

A. All materials, whether hazardous or non-hazardous, shall be disposed of in

accordance with all laws and the provisions of this Section and any or all applicable

federal, state, county, or local regulations and guidelines. It shall be the sole

responsibility of the Qualified Contractor to assure compliance with all laws and

regulations relating to this disposal. Ensure waste is properly characterized. The

result of each waste characterization (TCLP for RCRA materials) will dictate

disposal requirements. Until analytical results are available, all waste materials

(including water) shall be segregated and treated as hazardous.

B. Testing of Lead Waste Materials

1. Testing of lead paint removal or stabilization waste materials by use of the

Toxicity Characteristic Leachate Procedure (TCLP) will be completed by the

Contractor. The testing of material shall be performed as obtained to minimize

the storage of “assumed” hazardous material. The Contractor will segregate the

waste materials and take at least one (1) composite sample of the waste streams

listed below for the TCLP lead analysis. The following materials shall be tested

to determine whether or not they are hazardous:

a) Low lead waste (e.g., filtered wash water, HEPA vacuumed

disposable coveralls and plastic sheeting, etc.).

b) Concentrated lead waste (e.g., paint chips and dust, sludge from

paint stripping, HEPA vacuum debris and filters, mop heads, rags

used for removing caustic stripper, unfiltered wash water,

respirator filters, etc.).

C. Handle, transport, and dispose lead or lead-contaminated material classified as

hazardous waste in accordance with 40 CFR 260, 40 CFR 261, 40 CFR 262, 40

CFR 263, 40 CFR 264, and 40 CFR 265. Comply with land disposal restriction

notification requirements as required by 40 CFR 268.

D. Within 60 days of shipment of wastes, provide the Owner copies of all waste

disposal records including completed shipping documents, and evidence of disposal

at permitted disposal facilities.




017420 - 11

---END of SECTION---

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Shutdowns and Tie-Ins



017450-1

SECTION 017450

SHUTDOWNS AND TIE-INS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. General Requirements

B. Scheduling of Shutdown

C. Connections to Existing Mains, Sewers and Pipelines

D. Notice of Operational Impact (NOI)


A. Section 01110 - Summary of Work

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination Work: Perform all cutting, fitting or patching of the Work that may

be required to make the several parts thereof join in accordance with the Contract

Documents. Perform restoration with competent workmen skilled in the trade.

B. Coordination of Shutdowns: Coordinate shutdown of existing facilities with

Owner. Shutdowns may include, but not be limited to, connections, tie-ins, or

anything that will affect the Owner’s normal operations.

1.4 SCHEDULING OF SHUTDOWN

A. Connections to Existing Facilities: If any connections, replacement, or other work

requiring the shutdown of an existing facility is necessary, schedule such work at

times when the impact on the Owner's normal operation is minimal. Overtime, night

and weekend work without additional compensation from the Owner, may be

required to make these connections, especially if the connections are made at times

other than those specified.

B. Request for Shutdowns: Submit a final written request for each shutdown and tie-

in to the Owner and the Construction Manager at least seven City working days in

advance of any required shutdown. Written requests for each shutdown shall be

made by means of a Notice of Operational Impact (NOI). Section 1.6 below

summarizes requirements of NOIs.




017450-2

C. All shutdowns to existing plant and pumping facilities shall be kept to an absolute

minimum duration. Shutdowns and tie-ins to existing facilities and to new work to

be done under this construction contract, shall be done in a manner and at a time

approved by the Construction Manager. A detailed plan of each shutdown and tie-

in shall be submitted by the Contractor (including procedure and time table) for the

Construction Manager's approval. The detailed plan shall be submitted well in

advance of the date scheduled for starting such work to allow time for review by

the Construction Manager and for making revisions to the plan as may be required.

D. No shutdowns shall be made to any part of the existing facilities without the

permission of the Construction Manager.

E. To keep shutdowns to an absolute minimum time:

1. Do all preparatory work possible at each place of work prior to the specified

facility being taken out of service.

2. Have adequate personnel and equipment to work simultaneously, if

required, at more than one location of shutdown work.

3. Work continuously more than the regularly scheduled working day or work

double shifts, if directed by the Construction Manager.

4. Perform work at a time of day, night or on weekends when the least water

demand on the plant or pumping facility exists if directed by the


5. Use non-shrink grout or high early-strength concrete at those connection

points which may require new concrete work to be joined to existing.

F. Provide all temporary connections and/or controls to operate equipment which may

be necessary until final connections and/or controls are complete.

G. The "maximum permissible shutdown", as referred to hereinafter, shall be the total

number of consecutive hours or days that normal plant or pumping operation may

be interrupted for the performance of that portion of the work. Schedule a work

force of sufficient number and shifts to complete the work within the allowed time.

If no maximum permissible shutdown time is given, it shall be understood that it

will be kept at the absolute minimum duration required to perform the work and

within the time frame established by the approved Progress Schedule.




017450-3

1.5 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING MAINS, SEWERS AND PIPELINES

A. Connections to existing piping shall be governed by the following conditions:

1. Locations of existing piping shown on the Plans should be considered

approximate.

2. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for determining exact location of

existing piping to which he shall make connections, or which he may disturb

during earth-moving operations, or which may be affected by his work in

any way.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the removal of any pipelines from

service to fit the needs of the OWNER. This could require the performance

of certain connections at night.

4. Cut pipes as shown or required with machines specifically designed for this

work.

5. Install temporary plugs to keep out all mud, dirt, water and debris.

6. Provide all necessary adapters, fittings, pipe and appurtenances required.

7. Connections to existing piping shall be carefully done to avoid damage to

the portion of the main remaining in place and shall be in accordance with

the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations.

8. Submit to the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER for approval a detailed,

dimensioned drawing and laying schedule showing laying lengths of all

pipe, fittings, and specials proposed for each connection prior to performing

the work.

9. Scheduling connections to the existing piping shall be coordinated with the

OWNER. The work shall be performed when water demands are not

critical, as directed by the OWNER. Existing valves shall be operated by

the OWNER’s personnel only.

10. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER

for approval a detailed schedule of operations for each connection, at least

fourteen (14) days prior to beginning the work. After receiving approval,

the CONTRACTOR shall provide the ENGINEER with at least 48 hours

notice prior to beginning work.

11. Provide as-built record drawings for all existing pipeline connections.




017450-4

B. All work and costs associated with conditions governing connections to existing

piping shall be included with the prices bid for the various classified unit price and

lump sum Contract Items and no separate payment will be made therefor.

1.6 NOTICE OF OPERATIONAL IMPACT (NOI)

A. Format: Written requests for shutdowns or other impacts on existing facilities shall

be accompanied by a NOI. An example of a NOI is attached at the end of this

section. The format of the NOI shall include:

1. Location

2. Activity

3. Impacts

4. Schedule

5. Procedure

6. Support Requirements

7. Personnel

B. Procedure for Development of Final NOI: Submit a draft NOI to the Construction

Manager at least three weeks prior to the written request for shutdown or for

notification of operational impacts on existing facilities. The draft NOI will include

the following sections prepared by the Contractor: Location, Activity, Impacts,

Schedule, Procedure, and Support Requirements. It will also include Contractor

Personnel proposed for the impact. Include supporting information with the draft

NOI. Examples of supporting information include Figures and Confined Space

Entry plan.

C. The Owner and the Construction Manager will review the draft plan and provide

comments to the Contractor. Revise the draft NOI and re-submit for comment.

Make necessary submittals until an acceptable NOI is developed. The Construction

Manager will assist the Contractor to revise the NOI drafts.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Safeguards: Provide all shoring, bracing, supports, and protective devices

necessary to safeguard all work and existing facilities during shut downs and tie-in

operations.

END OF SECTION

NOI EXAMPLE

017450-5

NOI EXAMPLE

017450-6

NOI EXAMPLE

017450-7

NOI EXAMPLE

017450-8

NOI EXAMPLE

017450-9

NOI EXAMPLE

017450-10

NOI EXAMPLE

017450-11

NOI EXAMPLE

017450-12

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Operation and Maintenance Manuals



017830-1

SECTION 017830

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Submittals

B. Format and Contents

C. Payment

D. Asset Management Data Forms


A. Section 013300 - Submittals

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Construction Manager five

(5) hard copies and four (4) electronic copies on CD of the final Operation and

Maintenance Manuals for all equipment and associated control systems furnished and

installed under this Contract.

B. Submittal Schedule:

1. Prior to the installation of equipment, submit to the Construction Manager for

approval one (1) electronic draft copy (PDF format ONLY) of each set of

manuals with all specified material. The Construction Manager will retain the

draft copy. Make corrections as necessary and submit any missing material for

the manuals.

2. Prior to requesting the substantial completion, submit to the Construction

Manager, for approval, one (1) electronic copy (PDF format ONLY) of the

entire manual.

3. Revised copies of the preliminary Manual shall be submitted to the

Construction Manager at the time of training or thirty (30) days prior to system

start-up, whichever comes first.

4. Furnish to the Construction Manager, after final manual approval, all final

copies of the accepted manual configuration. All copies shall be submitted prior

to requesting certification of substantial completion.




017830-2

1.4 FORMAT AND CONTENTS

A. Provide space for a reduced set of record Contract Drawings, size approximately 11 by

17 inches and folded to 8-1/2 by 11 inches and an electronic copy on CD. Drawings

and CD will be furnished by the Construction Manager. Provide space in the manual

for a reduced set of Contractor’s As-Built Drawings, size approximately 11 by 17

inches and folded to 8-1/2 by inches.

B. One copy of all approved and as-built working drawings and diagrams for all

equipment furnished. The working drawings and diagrams shall be reduced to either 8-

1/2 by 11 inches or to 11 inches in the vertical dimension and as near as practicable to

17 inches in the horizontal dimension. Such sheets shall be folded to 8-1/2 by 11 inches.

C. One copy of all specified material certifications, test data, curves and test reports on 8-

1/2 by 11-inch size paper or 11 inches maximum vertical dimension by approximately

17 inches in the horizontal dimension. Such sheets shall be folded to 8-1/2 by 11 inches.

D. One copy of each manufacturer's installation and storage instructions, technical

bulletins, lubrication and maintenance instructions, and spare parts lists. This material

shall include such printed matter as diagrams, prints and drawings necessary to provide

full information required for the proper storage, installation, operation, maintenance,

and repair of the equipment and the ordering of spare parts, except for equipment that

may be furnished by the Owner. All instruction material and parts lists shall be

furnished on 8-1/2 by 11 inch commercially printed or typed forms. Such forms shall

include equipment name, serial number, and other identifying references. The manual

shall contain only that information which applies to the equipment provided.

Unnecessary information, advertising and theoretical data not directly pertaining to the

equipment being supplied shall not be included in the manual.

E. One valve schedule, giving the valve number, location, fluid and fluid destination for

each valve to be provided, prepared on 8-1/2 by 11-inch printed or typed forms as

specified. All valves in the same piping system shall be grouped together in the

schedule. A sample of the valve numbering system to be used will be furnished by the

Construction Manager. Valve numbers may include up to a six digit alpha-numeric

designation.

F. List of final electrical relay settings and control and alarm contact settings and device

calibration reports shall be included in a separate section of the manual.

G. Electrical interconnection wiring diagram for equipment furnished under this including

all control systems, including wiring diagrams to show wiring between all equipment,

systems and subsystems on this project in a separate section of the manual. Label and

identify all wires.

H. Provide copies of PLC and digital control system final application programs,

operational profiles, GDP, HMI and OMI video screens, alarm logs, input and output




017830-3

signal list and signal names, program logic diagrams, control system setpoint and timer

setting and other related application software.

I. Provide copies of PLC and digital program software licenses naming City of Richmond

as the owner of licenses.

J. Provide a copy of the final approved short circuit and coordination study for the project.

K. Calibration reports for all instrumentation and control equipment and devices including

but not limited to pressure, level, temperature, and flow transmitters and switches. The

manual shall include a master list of equipment and devices with the calibrated range

of operation, set-points, trip set-points, and rest set-points shown in the tables.

L. Provide the manual with the following certifications and equipment data summaries:

1. Equipment Data Summary (see attached form)

2. Preventive Maintenance Summary (see attached form)

3. Certification of installation, inspections and start-up services

4. Certification of post start-up services

5. Certification of instruction services.

M. Each copy of the manual shall be assembled in one or more binders, each with title

page, typed table of contents and heavy section dividers with copper reinforced holes

and numbered plastic index tabs. Each manual shall be divided into sections paralleling

the equipment specifications sections. Binders shall be 3-ring, hard-backed. All data

shall be punched for binding, and composition and printing shall be arranged so that

punching does not obliterate any data. The cover and binding edge of each manual shall

have the project title, Division designation and manual title printed thereon, all as

furnished and approved by the Construction Manager.

N. Where more than one binder is required, they shall be labeled Volume 1, Volume 2,

and so on. The table of contents for the entire set, identified by volume number, shall

appear in each binder.

O. CD-ROM Based Documentation: Provide three (3) complete sets of manufacturer’s

documentation on CD-ROM media for all equipment, including operation and

maintenance information, drawings, and catalogue literature.

1.5 PAYMENT

A. The costs of the Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be included in the contract

item for all equipment and associated control systems furnished and no separate

payment will be made therefor.




017830-4

1.6 ASSET MANAGEMENT DATA FORMS

A. The operation and maintenance manual shall include completed asset management data

and maintenance data forms for all new equipment that cost of $5,000 or more.

Examples of the Contractor asset management data and maintenance data forms are

furnished at the end of this section.

B. The Owner will provide the Contractor with blank data collection forms. Examples of

the form are attached at the end of this section. The Contractor shall complete forms

including all items.

C. The Contractor shall provide a completed form for each new equipment element.

D. The Contractor shall also provide a completed form for each equipment element with

a salvage cost of $5,000 or more that is removed from the facility by this Contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL CHECK LIST

A. The Operation and Maintenance manual shall include the information shown in the

check list at the end of this section.

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Operation and Maintenance

Manuals



017830-5

CITY OF RICHMOND, VIRGINIA


Asset Management

Equipment Data Summary

Equipment Name:

Specification Reference:

Manufacturer

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Number Supplied:

Location/Service:

Model No: Serial No:

Type:

Size/Speed/Capacity/Range (as applicable):

Power Requirement (Phase/Volts/Hertz):

Local Representative

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Date of Manufacture:

Installation Date:

Expected Equipment Life (years):

Warranty Period:

Equipment Cost:

Total Installed Equipment Cost:


Manuals



017830-6

CITY OF RICHMOND VIRGINIA


Asset Management

Preventive Maintenance Summary

Equipment Name:

Location:

Manufacturer:

Address:

Telephone:

Model No: Serial No:

Maintenance Task Lubricant/Part D W M Q SA A

O&M Manual

Reference

NOTES:


Manuals



017830-7

Operation and Maintenance Manual Check List

1. Equipment operation and maintenance information

2. Approved and as-built working drawings and diagrams

3. Material certification, test data, test curves, and test reports

4. Manufacturers installation and storage instructions

5. Valve schedule

6. Electrical relay settings

7. Electrical control and alarm settings

8. Electrical interconnection wiring diagrams (point-to-point diagrams)

9. I&C equipment calibration reports

10. I&C equipment lists with calibrated signal ranges and trip and reset set-points data

11. PLC final application program

12. PLC system operational profiles

13. GDP, HMI and OMI screens

14. PLC system logic diagrams and completed point-to-point check lists

15. Short circuit and coordination study

16. Warranty start and completion dates

17. Asset Management data summary (forms)

18. Preventive Maintenance summary (forms)

19. Certification of installation, inspection and start-up services

20. Certification of post start-up services

21. Certification of instructional services

22. Completed and approved field testing check list

23. Approved functional testing reports

24. Approved 30-day performance test reports

25. Other information and data required in the technical specification sections

END OF SECTION


Manuals



017830-8


WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Contract Close Out



017890-1

SECTION 017890

CONTRACT CLOSE OUT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Submittals

B. Record Drawings

C. Warranties and Bonds

D. Spare Parts, Special Tools, and Maintenance Products

E. Substantial Completion

F. Releasing Completed Work for Use

G. Final Cleaning

H. Final Inspection

I. Certificate of Final Completion.


A. Section 014500 - Quality Control

B. Section 016000 - Material and Equipment

C. Section 017830 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Certificates: Prior to conducting the project performance test, submit

manufacturer's certificates confirming that materials and products have been properly

installed and are ready to be placed in service.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Prior to conducting the project performance test,

submit all operation and maintenance manuals and data required for proper operation

and maintenance of products and equipment.




017890-2

C. Project Record Documents: Project record documents required by this Section shall

be submitted prior to beginning the Substantial Completion Inspection.

D. Prior to Final Inspection:

1. Provide submittals to the Owner that are required by governing or other

authorities.

2. Submit Bonds, Warranties, Guarantees and similar documents.

3. Submit spare parts in accordance with this section.

4. Submit evidence of compliance with requirement of governing authorities.

E. Upon receipt of the Certificate of Final Completion submit Final Application for

Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum

remaining due.

F. Submit to the Owner, with the Final Application for Payment, a sworn affidavit that all

labor, service, materials, and Subcontractors have been paid and that there are no suits

pending in connection with the Work done or labor and materials furnished under the

Contract.

1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. At the site keep and maintain one record copy of the following Contract Documents,

reference documents and all technical documents.

1. Drawings.

2. Specifications.

3. Addenda.

4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.

5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.

6. Manufacturer's instructions for assembly, installation, and adjusting.

B. Using drafting symbols and standards consistent with the original documents, annotate

Contract Drawings neatly and clearly in color to show all changes made during the

construction period.

C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.

D. On Record Drawings, legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:

1. Location, size and material for piping, concealed and exposed.

2. Size and routing of conduits.




017890-3

3. Size and location of pull boxes and number and type of conductors installed

therein.

4. Changes in product and equipment dimensions, structural openings,

foundations.

5. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in

construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the work.

6. Measure horizontal location of building, concrete pads, fencing and other

project facilities. Locations shall be referenced to Virginia State Plane

Coordinate System.

7. Provide field measurement location and pipe elevation drawings for all outside

pipelines, valves, and pipe fittings on 8-1/2 x 11 inch sheets. Provide facility

locations in Virginia State Plane Coordinates and field measurement reference

to visible and accessible site features.

8. Field changes of dimensions and details.

9. Details not on original drawings.

10. Any other variations between the work actually provided and that shown on

the Contract Drawings.

11. GPS coordinates for new underground pipe, fittings, and valves.

12. Change Order Work.

E. Annotated drawings are to be made available to Construction Manager for reference at

all times. Provide annotated drawings to be reviewed monthly at the time of payment

application. Provide copies of field measurement drawings to Construction Manager

showing the GPS coordinates and site field measurements and elevations for new

underground pipe, fitting and valves that have been placed into service or operation.

Contractor partial payments will be withheld if this data is not provided within four

weeks of the new work being placed into service to perform its design functions. Copies

so provided will be retained by the Construction Manager. Should the annotated

drawings be found not current with the work, an additional retainage of one percent of

the total application amount will be deducted from the monthly payment. Such

additional retainage will be released in future payments if the drawings are brought

current.

F. At completion of the Contract and before final payment is made, deliver to the

Construction Manager one set of clearly readable, reproducible Contract Drawings

reflecting all changes made during construction. Mark each drawing "Record Drawing"




017890-4

in ink. Include copies of the Record Drawings in the Operation and Maintenance

Manuals. Also provide a complete set of the field measured pipeline, fitting and valve

location drawings and as-built site survey drawings.

1.5 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

A. Prior to Final Inspection deliver to the Owner the original and one copy of all bonds,

warranties, guarantees and similar documents, including those customarily provided

by manufacturers and suppliers which cover a period greater than one year. Show

Owner as beneficiary of these documents. Begin warranty periods from the Date of

Substantial Completion or the Date of Final Completion when Substantial Completion

is not required by the Owner.

1.6 SPARE PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS, AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS

A. Furnish spare parts in quantities specified in individual specification sections. Arrange

for delivery of these items to the Owner immediately prior to final inspection of the

work. Provide to the Construction Manager an itemized list on delivery of each spare

part or special tool which matches the identification tag attached to each item. At this

time, the Owner will inventory the spare parts and special tools. If the inventory is not

complete or some items are damaged, provide the missing items and replace damaged

items.

B. No spare parts or special tools will be accepted by the Owner until notice of final

inspection unless the Construction Manager expressly requests the advance delivery of

items. When so requested, deliver such items to the Owner. Deduct items delivered in

advance from the inventory and furnish the Construction Manager with signed receipts

for items delivered in advance along with the final inventory list.

C. Furnish special tools and lubricating equipment in accordance with this Section and

individual specification sections. Special tools are considered to be those tools which,

because of their limited use, are not normally available but which are necessary for

maintenance of particular equipment.

D. For each type of equipment provided under this Contract, furnish a complete set of all

special tools which may be needed for the adjustment, operation, maintenance, and

disassembly of such equipment. Furnish only tools of high grade, smooth forged alloy

tool steel. Manufacture grease guns of the lever type.

E. The Contractor shall provide an enclosed weatherproof and lighted facility for storage

of spare parts and special tools during the construction period.

F. Store and be responsible for spare parts and special tools until acceptance by the

Owner.

G. Deliver all items to a location as directed by the Construction Manager.




017890-5

H. Include the cost of all spare parts and special tools and the storage and delivery thereof

in the Contract Item for each material and equipment item. No separate payment will

be made therefor.

1.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. When the Contractor considers the entire work sufficiently completed in accordance

with the Contract Documents so that the work may be beneficially occupied for the

purposes for which it was intended, the Contractor shall, in writing to the Owner and

Construction Manager, certify that the entire work is substantially complete and request

that the Construction Manager issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion. Within a

reasonable time thereafter, the Owner, the Contractor and Construction Manager shall

make an inspection of the work to determine the status of completion. If the

Construction Manager does not consider the work substantially complete, the

Construction Manager will notify the Contractor in writing giving his reasons therefor.

If the Construction Manager considers the work substantially complete, the

Construction Manager will prepare and deliver to the Owner a Certificate of Substantial

Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. The certificate shall

include the project equipment and any special warranty periods that apply to the project

work. There shall be attached to the certificate a list of tentative items to be completed

or corrected before final payment. This list shall be identified as the PUNCH LIST OF

OPEN ITEMS and may be added to at the Owner's discretion for work not completed

in conformance with the Contract Documents. This tentative PUNCH LIST OF OPEN

ITEMS shall be cost loaded as determined by the Owner based on the estimated value

of work involved to complete the associated items. This retained value shall be reduced

monthly as a basis for payment to the Contractor based on the difference between

outstanding retained value during the invoice period and the value of the PUNCH LIST

OF OPEN ITEMS provided record drawings have been received in accordance with

the General Conditions of the Contract. No payment made therefore shall be less than

one thousand dollars ($1,000.00) except for final payment. When it has been

determined by the Owner that all items identified in the PUNCH LIST OF OPEN

ITEMS are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, final payment shall

be made.

B. Inspection

1. General: The work shall be subjected to continuous inspection and in addition

to the formal Substantial Completion inspections for each Phase of the work

requiring Substantial Completion. Each inspection shall be performed by the

Contractor in the presence of the Construction Manager. The inspection shall

be conducted in accordance with the requirement of Section 014500 - Quality

Control and field testing check lists completed for all equipment and systems

provided. All required labor, materials, equipment, instruments, lubricants and

incidentals necessary to perform these inspections shall be furnished by the

Contractor. Before proceeding to the next inspection, all discrepancies and




017890-6

deficiencies observed during each inspection shall be noted and corrected and,

if directed by the Construction Manager, the inspection shall be rescheduled

and repeated at no additional cost to the Owner.

a. The Contractor shall not request the Substantial Completion inspection

until after the 30-day performance test has been completed and the test

report approved by the Construction Manager.

b. Refer to individual specification sections for specific requirements for

placing equipment and systems in operation.

c. Notification: When the Contractor considers the Work ready for each

inspection, the Contractor shall so notify the Construction Manager in

writing for each inspection. Each inspection shall be performed by the

Construction Manager within 10 days after receipt of the request.

2. Substantial Completion Inspection:

a. Perform a SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION to fully

demonstrate to the Construction Manager that all individual project

components function as required by the Contract Documents and that

all systems are internally coordinated, as well as coordinated with other

systems. In addition, it shall demonstrate that all major site work has

been brought to final configurations and restoration initiated.

b. All equipment and system functional and performance tests shall be

completed and their test reports provided from the Contractor and

approved by the Construction Manager prior to the Substantial

Completion Inspection being scheduled.

c. The Construction Manager will prepare a LIST OF DEFICIENT

ITEMS to be accomplished prior to performing the Final Inspection.

1.8 RELEASING COMPLETED WORK FOR USE

A. It is the intent of these Specifications that all newly constructed Work be placed in use

as rapidly as it can be constructed, inspected and accepted and placed in service for its

intended use. Arrange operations to permit access to all such parts of the Work by the

Owner and other contractors for the Owner.

B. Taking over of parts of the Work for operation before completion of the entire Contract

shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility for proper integrated operations

of all parts of the Work, nor shall it act to relieve him of any responsibilities under the

Contract except as follows:




017890-7

1. When parts of the Work are accepted by the Construction Manager in advance

of the date of acceptance of all the Work and such Work is taken over for use

by the Owner. The Contractor shall provide maintenance on Work taken over

for use by the Owner. The warranty for this Work shall begin at the date of

Substantial Completion of the entire project.

2. The Construction Manager will issue certificates describing the Work which is

taken over for use by the Owner and the Contractor shall furnish all

maintenance and guarantee information of manufacturers or suppliers that is

applicable to the Work being taken over for use.

1.9 FINAL CLEANING

A. Removal of Contractor's Materials: At the conclusion of the Work, promptly take away

all erection plant, tools, temporary structures and materials belonging to the Contractor.

Remove and promptly dispose of all water, dirt, rubbish or any other foreign

substances.

B. Cleaning Materials and Equipment: Thoroughly clean all materials installed and clean

all existing structures, materials or equipment soiled during construction and deliver

over such materials and equipment undamaged in a bright, clean and polished

condition.

1.10 FINAL INSPECTION

A. When the Contractor considers the entire work complete in accordance with the

Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, in writing to the Owner and Construction

Manager, certify that the entire work is complete and request that the Construction

Manager issue a Certificate of Final Completion for all work included in the Contract

Documents. Within ten calendar days thereafter, the Owner, the Contractor and

Construction Manager shall make a FINAL INSPECTION of the work to determine

the status of completion. If the Construction Manager considers the work complete, the

Construction Manager will prepare and deliver to the Owner a Certificate of Final

Completion which shall fix the Date of Final Completion for all work identified in the

Contract Documents.

B. If the Construction Manager does not consider the work complete, the Construction

Manager will issue to the Contractor a LIST OF DEFICIENT ITEMS to be completed

in accordance with the Contract Documents to achieve Final Completion. This list

identified as the LIST OF DEFICIENT ITEMS may be added to at the Owner's

discretion for work not completed in conformance with the contract documents and

shall include all incomplete work items previously identified in the LIST OF

DEFICIENT ITEMS issued with the Certificate of Substantial Completion for the

entire work.




017890-8

C. The LIST OF DEFICIENT ITEMS shall be cost loaded as determined by the Owner

based on the estimated value of work involved to complete the associated items. This

retained value shall be reduced monthly as a basis for payment to the Contractor based

on the difference between the outstanding retained value during the invoice period and

the value of the LIST OF DEFICIENT ITEMS provided record drawing have been

received in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract. No payment made

therefore shall be less than one thousand dollars ($1,000.00) except for final payment.

When the Contractor verifies to the Owner's and Construction Manager's satisfaction

that all items identified in the LIST OF DEFICIENT ITEMS have been corrected in

accordance with the Contract Documents final payment shall be made. This inspection

shall demonstrate that all elements of the project are ready to be placed in operation

and all work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.11 CERTIFICATE OF FINAL COMPLETION

A. The Work will be deemed complete as of the date set by the Contractor if, upon Final

Inspection, the Construction Manager determines that no further work, physical or

otherwise, is required to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract

Documents. Upon determination that all Work is completed, the Construction Manager

will issue a Certificate of Final Completion. This Certificate of Final Completion shall

serve as Contractor’s authorization to generate a requisition for final payment. The

Certificate of Final Completion shall include the project, equipment and any special

warranty periods.

B. However, if such inspection, in the opinion of the Construction Manager, reveals items

of Work still to be performed, the Contractor shall promptly perform them and then

request a reinspection. In the event the Construction Manager then determines that the

Work is complete, the date of final completion shall be deemed to be the last day of

such reinspection.

C. The Owner may at its sole discretion issue a Certificate of Final Completion for

signature by the Owner, Construction Manager and Contractor; following the

expiration of the time fixed for completion in the Contract or the time for completion

as modified through a change order to the contract even though such items of work as

identified in the LIST OF DEFICIENT ITEMS are not complete in accordance with

the Contract Documents. Any items identified on the LIST OF DEFICIENT ITEMS

which have not been completed in accordance with the contract documents within the

time fixed for completion in the Contract or the time for completion as modified

through a change order to the contract shall be identified on the Certificate of Final

Completion as incomplete and shall be credited to the Owner based solely on the

Owner's determination of the cost of such items; and, an adjustment to the total contract

value shall be made via a change order to the contract at the Owner's discretion.




017890-9

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACT CLOSE OUT CHECK LIST

A. Table 017890-1 is a contract close out check list that will be used to coordinate contract

close out activities.

END OF SECTION

017890-10

Table 017890-1

PROJECT CLOSE OUT CHECK LIST

Item Requirement Date

to CM

Date

Approved

Date

Completed

Date Provided

to City

Coded

Notes

1. Functional Testing Report 1

2. Training 2

3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

4. Manufacturer’s Certification of Proper Installation

5. Spare Parts Transfer Log

6. Completed Building and Other Permits

7. Building Occupancy Certificate

8. Performance Testing Report

9. Tapes, Pictures and Videos

10. Substantial Completion

11. Preliminary Punch List

12. Final Punch List

13. Contractor Notice of Completion

14. Final Inspection

15. Final Completion

16. Record Drawings

17. Final MBE-3 Form

18. Final Payment Request for Close Out

19. Project Close Out Recommendation (CM)

017890-11

PROJECT CLOSE OUT CHECK LIST

Item Requirement Date

to CM

Date

Approved

Date

Completed

Date Provided

to City

Coded

Notes

20. Project Close Out Recommendation (Engineer)

21. Miscellaneous Close Out Support Information

22. Release of Claims from Contractor

23. Final Affidavit of Payment of Claims

24. Final Affidavit of Release of Liens

25. Contractor Performance Evaluation

26. Close Out Letter to City Procurement Services

27. Contract Close Out Notice

Coded Notes: 1. Including field inspection check lists for all work

2. Including Certificate of Instructional Services

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Training



018200-1

SECTION 018200

TRAINING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Submittals

B. Training

C. Hours of Training

D. Training Outline

E. Certificate

F. Substantial Completion

G. Equipment Use

H. Forms

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit training outline and other information described for approval at

least 45 days prior to the proposed date for the training sessions. Provide the

training in two phases with phase one provided before the work is started up and

tested and phase two provided after the work has been in service for 6 months. Also

provide additional training at the end of the warranty period.

B. Credentials: Submit for approval credentials of equipment manufacturer

representatives who are to be course instructors. Submit credentials at least 30 days

prior to a proposed training session.

C. Training Manual: Provide a proposed training manual including the topics

presented in this Section shall be submitted for approval.

1. Identify specific components and procedures in the proposed training

outline.

2. Detail specific training topics. Describe "hands-on" demonstrations planned

for the training.




018200-2

3. Reference training aids to be utilized in the training (i.e. video tapes, slides,

transparencies) and attach where applicable.

4. Include training materials.

5. Indicate the duration of each training segment.

1.3 TRAINING

A. Scheduling: Verify scheduling with the Owner at least 14 days prior to beginning

training sessions.

B. Number of Copies: For each training class, provide instructional material for at

least fifteen attendees plus five extra copies, plus duplicate copies of all audio-

visual aids utilized during each training course.

C. The Contractor shall bear all costs of the training program. Salaries, fringe benefits,

payroll taxes, and unemployment compensation costs for City personnel will be

borne by the Owner. The cost of training shall be included in the lump sum Contract

Item for which each item of equipment or system is included and no separate

payment will be made therefor.

D. Taping of Training: Provide audio and color recording of all classroom instruction

sessions, including manufacturers' representatives' hand-on equipment instruction

and classroom sessions.

1. Use only DVD or other alternative digital format, suitable for playback on

equipment commercially available in the United States.

2. Include all of the manufacturer's training session on each DVD.

3. DVDs shall be produced by a qualified, professional recording company,

unless the Contractor demonstrates satisfactory skills acceptable to the

Owner.

4. Furnish Owner with two (2) complete sets of DVDs fully indexed and

cataloged with printed labels stating sessions and dates taped.

5. Owner to furnish DVD playback equipment.

E. Provide the services of knowledgeable, technically competent, factory trained

specialists to instruct City personnel in the operation and maintenance of the

equipment and system components listed in this Section. The Owner will furnish

training classroom space.




018200-3

1. Coordinate utility services with the Owner, with a minimum of 30 days prior

notice.

2. Provide a combination of classroom and "hands-on" instruction designed to

completely familiarize operating and maintenance personnel with the

systems theory, standard operating procedures, safety features and

emergency procedures, and general maintenance of all components.

3. Conduct all training during regular hours on weekdays at a time required by

the Owner. Anticipate at least one nighttime training session for each

equipment and system listed below.

1.4 HOURS OF TRAINING

A. The equipment and systems for which training is to be given and the minimum

number of hours of training is specified as follows:

Equipment Name

Initial Training After Startup,

Functional Testing and Prior

to Performance Test

Additional Training After

Substantial Completion and

Prior to Final Completion

Number of

Sessions

Minimum

Hours Per

Session

Number of

Sessions

Minimum

Hours Per

Session

Adjustable Frequency

Drives 2 8 2 4

Pumping Units 2 4 2 2

HVAC Systems 3 4 3 2

B. Length of Training: The minimum lengths of training sessions as listed above are

for actual classroom time, excluding additional time required for preparation and

lag-time between sessions.

1.5 TRAINING OUTLINE

A. Equipment Operation

1. Describe equipment's operating (process) function.

2. Describe equipment's fundamental operating principles and dynamics.




018200-4

3. Identify equipment's mechanical, electrical and electronic components and

features.

4. Identify all support equipment associated with the operation of the subject

equipment.

B. Detailed Component Description

1. Identify and describe in detail each component's function.

2. Where applicable, group related components into subsystems.

3. Identify, and describe in detail, equipment safety features and control

interlocks.

C. Equipment Preventive Maintenance

1. Describe preventive maintenance inspection procedures required to perform

and inspect the equipment in operation, and spot potential trouble symptoms

(anticipate breakdowns).

2. Outline recommended routine lubrication and adjustments (preventive

maintenance).

D. Equipment Troubleshooting

1. Define recommended systematic troubleshooting procedures.

2. Provide component specific troubleshooting checklists.

3. Describe applicable equipment testing and diagnostic procedures to

facilitate troubleshooting.

E. Equipment Corrective Maintenance

1. Describe recommended equipment preparation requirements.

2. Identify and describe the use of special tools required for maintenance of

the equipment.

3. Describe component removal/installation and disassembly/assembly

procedures. Perform “hands on” disassembly/assembly of common

disassembly/assemble procedures for the equipment.




018200-5

4. Perform “hands-on” demonstrations of at least two common corrective

maintenance repairs.

5. Describe recommended measuring instruments and procedures, and provide

instruction on interpreting alignment measurements, as appropriate.

6. Define recommended torquing, mounting, calibration, and alignment

procedures and settings, as appropriate.

7. Describe recommended procedures to check/test equipment following

corrective repair.

F. PLC and Digital Control System Programs

1. When three training sessions are required, sessions 1 and 2 shall describe

system operation, operational profile, GDP, HMI and OMI operator screen

systems and system alarms and reset functions.

2. When three training sessions are required, the third section shall be designed

to describe the operational profile and the PLC and digital system software

application programs.

1.6 CERTIFICATE

A. Provide "Certificate of Instructional Services" signed by Construction Manager and

equipment representative, verifying that training has been accomplished to

satisfaction of all parties. Use form provided in this section and furnish

Construction Manager with three copies.

1.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Training provided by manufacturers' representative, Construction Manager and

Owner does not constitute substantial completion.

1.8 EQUIPMENT USE

A. Use of equipment for training will not void manufacturers' or contract warranties.

1.9 FORMS

A. Complete and submit three copies of the following form to Construction Manager

upon completion of training as required.




018200-6

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION




018200-7

CERTIFICATE OF INSTRUCTIONAL SERVICES

Project

Equipment

Specification Section

Contract

I hereby certify the equipment Manufacturers' Representative has instructed Owner's

personnel in startup operation and maintenance of this equipment as required in the

Contract Documents.

MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE

Signature Date

Name (print)

Title

Representing

CONTRACTOR

Signature Date

Name (print)

Title

CONSTRUCTION MANAGER

Signature Date

Name (print)

Title




018200-8

COMMENTS:

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Special Project Provisions



019000-1

SECTION 019000

SPECIAL PROJECT PROVISIONS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Subcontracts and Assignments

B. Contractor's Employees

C. Clarification Requests

D. Area of Operations

E. Work Adjacent to Existing Facilities

F. Existing Facilities Shown on Contract Drawings

G. Relocation of Existing Facilities

H. Diagrammed Pipelines

I. Photographs or Video Recording

J. Permits

K. ACOE Permit

L. Marine Resources Commission Permit

M. CSX Transportation

N. Richmond Metropolitan Authority (RMA)


A. Section 013250 - Progress Schedule

B. Section 013300 - Submittals

C. Section 017890 - Contract Close Out

1.3 SUBCONTRACTS AND ASSIGNMENTS

A. If the Owner finds that the proposed subcontractor is qualified, the Contractor will be

notified in writing. The Owner may revoke approval of any subcontractor when such

subcontractor evidences an unwillingness or inability to perform his work in strict

accordance with these Contract Documents. Notice of such revocation of approval

will be given in writing to the Contractor.

B. The Contractor shall promptly, upon request, file with the Owner a conformed copy

of the subcontract. The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in

all subcontracts relative to the work to bind subcontractors to the Contractor by the

terms of these Contract Documents, insofar as applicable to the work of

subcontractors, and to give the Contractor the same power as regards terminating any

subcontract that the Owner may exercise over the Contractor under provisions of

these Contract Documents.




019000-2

C. Each subcontract and each lower tier subcontract shall include appropriate provisions

to bind all subcontracting tiers to the requirements of this Contract.

D. No assignment will receive approval unless the instrument of assignment contains a

clause to the effect that it is agreed that the funds to be paid the assignee under the

assignment are subject to a prior lien for services rendered or materials supplied for

the performance of the work called for in the Contract in favor of all persons, firms,

or corporations rendering such services or supplying such materials.

1.4 CONTRACTOR'S EMPLOYEES

A. Character and Competency: The Contractor and his subcontractors shall employ

upon all parts of the work herein contracted for only competent, skillful, and

trustworthy employees. Should the Owner at any time give notice, in writing, to the

Contractor or his duly authorized representative on the work that any employee in his

opinion is incompetent, disorderly, careless, unobservant of instructions, or in any way

a detriment to the satisfactory progress of the work, such employee shall immediately

be dismissed and not again allowed upon the "Site".

1.5 CLARIFICATION REQUESTS

A. During the work the Contractor may request clarification of the information presented

of the Contract Documents. Such requests for information shall be in writing on a

Clarification Request Form. The final format for the Clarification Request Form will

be provided to the Contractor at the preconstruction meeting.

1.6 AREA OF OPERATIONS

A. The Contractor shall limit his operations generally to the area around the facilities

included in the Contract.

B. Access or work required in other areas of the site shall be arranged and coordinated

with the Construction Manager.

1.7 WORK ADJACENT TO EXISTING FACILITIES

A. All existing facilities, construction or adjacent property shall be adequately protected,

to the satisfaction of the Engineer, during all work under the Contract. Such facilities

include but are not limited to structure, building, utilities, process pipelines, plant yard

piping, storm and sanitary sewerage, excavations, ditches, tress, conduits and

electrical systems, any existing facilities and any appurtenances thereto.




019000-3

B. Any existing facilities, construction or adjacent property which are damaged,

disturbed, destroyed or otherwise, in the opinion of the Construction Manager, have

their usefulness or operation impaired by work under this Contract shall be replaced

by new and equal items or restored, all to the satisfaction of the Construction

Manager, by the Contractor at his own expense and no separate payment will be made

therefor.

1.8 EXISTING FACILITIES SHOWN ON CONTRACT DRAWINGS

A. The Contract Drawings are considered to be substantially complete and accurate with

respect to the types and locations of existing facilities, but are not guaranteed to be

absolutely so.

B. It is the Contractor's responsibility to make his own investigations to fully inform

himself of the location, character, condition and extent of all existing facilities as may

be encountered and as may affect the construction operations.

1.9 RELOCATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

A. The work shall include all labor, materials, equipment and all work necessary to

relocate any existing facilities (including lights, ductwork, electrical conduit and

wiring, small piping and the like), whether shown or not, that interfere with the proper

installation of the new and relocated piping and equipment as required.

1.10 DIAGRAMMED PIPELINES

A. Various pipelines are shown on the Contract Drawings in diagram form. Where such

pipelines are shown only in diagram, they shall be arranged clear of other pipelines,

equipment and walking areas, and be accessible for maintenance. Such pipelines shall

be fitted and installed in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with approved

shop drawings. An adequate number of unions shall be provided in main pipe and

branch pipe runs to facilitate dismantling or removal of pipeline sections without

disturbing adjacent branch or connecting lines.

B. The final locations of hose valves, pipe drain valves, and other such appurtenances

included as a part of diagrammed pipelines shall be as shown on approved shop

drawings or as approved in the field by the Construction Manager.

C. The cost of furnishing, fabricating, locating, erecting and otherwise completely and

properly installing all diagramed pipelines shall be included in the lump sum Contract

Item for Structures and Equipment Work and no separate payment will be made

therefor.




019000-4

1.11 PHOTOGRAPHS OR VIDEO RECORDING

A. From time to time during progress of the work, photographs or video record of the

work will be taken by the Construction Manager, the Owner or their authorized

representatives at no expense to the Contractor. The Contractor shall, however,

furnish access to the work at all times for this purpose and shall furnish such

assistance as may be required.

B. The photographs or video recording thus taken shall be the property of the Owner.

Nothing herein outlined shall be construed as prohibiting the taking of photographs or

videotapes by the Contractor or his agents provided it is done at no expense to the

Owner.

1.12 PERMITS

A. The Contractor shall obtain permits from various City agencies necessary for the

work. This will include but not be limited to:

Building Permit

Mechanical Permit

Electrical Permit

Plumbing Permit

B. The City will make preliminary permit applications, pay all the permit fees and obtain

preliminary permits for the use of the Contractor for the permits listed below. The

Contractor shall complete all permit applications and take complete responsibility for

these permits and all other permits needed.

Building Permit

Mechanical Permit

Electrical Permit

Plumbing Permit

C. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the permit application and approved permit to

the Construction Manager prior to starting any work that involves land disturbance or

work in the street.

D. The Contractor shall obtain any other permits required from any Federal, State, or

City agencies having jurisdiction for the work. The Contractor shall be required to

comply with all provisions of such permits regarding workmanship, schedules,

maintenance of existing operations, notification of starting construction time




019000-5

restrictions upon closing streets, traffic control, and other conditions under which the

permit is issued.

E. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all other permits, licenses and other

authorizations required from the prosecution of the work, including the cost of all

work performed in compliance with the terms and conditions of such permits, licenses

and authorizations, whether by himself or others. The Contractor's cost to obtain any

required permits shall be included under the various unit price or lump sump Contract

Items and no separate payment will be made therefor.

F. The Contractor shall provide copies of all permits to the Construction Manager prior

to commencing any work associated with a required permit. The Contractor shall

abide by all requirements of all permits.

G. Compliance with any permit does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to

complete the work as shown, specified and required for a complete operating system.

H. City requirement to obtaining water service permits for making connections and

improvements to the water system are shown in Table 019000-1.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

Table 01900-1

019000-6

City of Richmond Department of Public Utilities

General Water Construction Notes

1. All water construction and materials shall be in accordance with the City of Richmond

Water Distribution System Design Guidelines and Standard Specifications and Details.

2. Final acceptance of the water utility improvements by the City of Richmond Department

of Public Utilities shall not be made until all work shown on the approved utility plans is

complete, including all pipeline work, paving, grading, and any necessary adjustments.

3. The contractor must provide as-builts with requisite information depicting the

horizontal and vertical location of all proposed mains, services, bends, and

appurtenances with ties to right-of-way, curb\pavement lines, or alternate objects as

needed to locate the mains in the field. The improvements will not be accepted until the

as-built information has been reviewed and accepted by the City Water Utility Inspector

and Technical Services.

4. The contractor must contact the City of Richmond Department of Public Utilities

Construction Inspector at (804) 646-8497 to schedule a preconstruction meeting at

least 72 hours prior to beginning any water related construction activity.

5. The contractor is responsible for obtaining all required permits for the work. Water

Utility permits may be obtained through the Department of Public Utilities Development

Services office located in room 115 in City Hall.

6. The contractor shall not operate any existing valves and must request valve operation by

City forces no less than 48 hours in advance of any planned work.

7. Unless otherwise noted, the minimum cover for water mains is 42 inches.

8. Water for use by the contractor from a public water main or hydrant within the City of

Richmond shall require a City issued portable water meter with backflow device. The

contractor should contact the utility Cross Connection Specialist located at 400

Jefferson Davis Highway (Rm. 143), Tuesday through Friday (9 a.m. to 11 a.m.) to

make an application, contractor may call (804) 646-8502 for any questions related to

this program.

9. All water pipe used within the City’s distribution system shall be ductile-iron, meeting

the requirements of AWWA C151 – Latest Revision with mechanical or push-on joints.

The pipe shall be asphaltic coat outside and cement-lined and seal-coated inside in

Table 01900-1

019000-7

accordance with AWWA C104. Pipes shall be furnished in nominal lengths of 18 or 20

feet and shall include all jointing materials. All pipe must meet the minimum thickness

class as noted below:

Diameter (in) Thickness Class

3 51

4 53

6 54

8 54

12 & larger 52

019000-8


WTPFM - Facilities Modifications ROUGH CARPENTRY



061000 - 1

SECTION 061000

ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this

Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Wood blocking and nailers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include

the following:

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.

2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.

3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service.

4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.

5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.

6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate

component materials and dimensions and include construction and application

details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment

manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials

comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net

amount of preservative retained.




061000 - 2

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment

manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials

comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated

materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber

both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing

by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that

moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified

before shipment to Project site.

5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for

each type of treatment.

B. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum

allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and

design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood.

2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.

3. Power-driven fasteners.

4. Powder-actuated fasteners.

5. Expansion anchors.

6. Metal framing anchors.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification

marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that

the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material

tested.




061000 - 3

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air

circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting,

securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Certified Wood: Materials shall be produced from wood obtained from forests

certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-

001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."

B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no

grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable

rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review.

Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to

inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark

grade stamp on end or back of each piece.

3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by

DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are

indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for

interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for

exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for

items in contact with the ground.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for

untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by

the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:




061000 - 4

1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact

with masonry or concrete.

2. Do not use treated lumber for roof construction.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials

complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as

determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified

testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber by Pressure Process: Products with a flame

spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no

evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an

additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet

beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements

specified above for fire-retardant-treated lumber by pressure process after

being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898.

Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28

percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent

relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested

according ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be

calculated according to ASTM D 6841.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of

qualified testing agency.

E. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or

attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking.




061000 - 5

2. Nailers.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber

and any of the following species:

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.

2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.

3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.

4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.

5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

6. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.

7. Northern species; NLGA.

8. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content

and any of the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB.

2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA,

WCLIB, or WWPA.

3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir; Construction or No. 2 Common

grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

4. Eastern softwoods; No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA.

5. Northern species; No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.

6. Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or

WWPA.

D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3

grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to

eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut

lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of

other work.




061000 - 6

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with

requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-

preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide

fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with

ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563

hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated

below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load

imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the

load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per

ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with

ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593

and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for

use as a sill sealer; 1-inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected

from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

B. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from

manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

C. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a

pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density

polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall

thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.




061000 - 7

D. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation

containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide

containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line,

cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as

needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking and similar supports to comply

with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional

Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to

comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation

walls.

E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing

materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and

intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for

fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.

F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with

installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with

defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use

with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of

preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid

water.

2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid

water.

H. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as

indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.




061000 - 8

2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building

Code.

3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and

Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International

Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.

I. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that

will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or

will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install

fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail

heads unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to

shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work.

Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush

with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

C. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking,

install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

D. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled

lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of

ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no

longer required.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If,

despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-

registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with

EPA-registered label.

B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry

becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by

spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Interior Architectural Woodwork



064023 - 1

SECTION 064023

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For Cabinets, cabinet hardware and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations,

large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

C. Samples:

1. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, for each finish

system and color, with exposed surface finished.

2. Plastic-laminates, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.

3. Thermoset decorative panels, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.

D. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification

Program certificates.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of cabinets and counters.

B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural

Woodwork Quality Standards."

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates for

woodwork.

1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is

enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining

temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the

construction period.

PRODUCTS

1.04 WOODWORK FABRICATORS

A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide interior architectural

woodwork by fabricator complying with the Quality Standards noted above.




064023 - 2

1.05 MATERIALS

A. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood, Eastern white pine,

sugar pine, or western white pine.

B. Wood Products:

1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder

containing no urea formaldehyde.

2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.

3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.

C. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished

with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with

LMA SAT-1.

D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not

indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

1.06 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide fabricator’s standard cabinet hardware and accessory materials

associated with architectural woodwork, except for items specified in Division 8

Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)."


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-

dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

1.08 FABRICATION

A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to

Project site. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing,

trimming, and fitting.

1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom.

2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to

remove splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat

of varnish.

B. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets:

1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.

2. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate

as follows:




064023 - 3

a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS.

b. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.

c. Edges: Grade HGS, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.

3. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber.

4. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.

5. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate

manufacturer's full range of patterns, matte finish.

6. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above

compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops.

C. Plastic-Laminate Countertops:

1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.

2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate

manufacturer's full range of patterns, matte finish.

3. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.

4. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard made with exterior glue or exterior-

grade plywood.

1.09 SHOP FINISHING

A. Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup,

cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

B. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to

concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.01 INSTALLATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in

installation areas. Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work

as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96

inches. Shim as required with concealed shims.

C. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and

are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and

to provide unencumbered operation.

1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more

than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration

into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips or No. 10 wafer-head sheet

metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.




064023 - 4

D. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or

other supports into underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and wall

with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

END OF SECTION

WTPFM - Facilities Modifications Slate Shingles



073150 - 1

SECTION 073150

SLATE SHINGLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Slate shingles.

2. Underlayment.

3. Minor repairs to slate roof


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples:

1. Slate Shingle: Full size, of each color, size, texture, and shape.


A. Sample warranty.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each color of slate shingle from single quarry capable of

producing slate of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which roofing Installer agrees to repair or replace

slate roofing that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.




073150 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SLATE SHINGLES

A. Slate Shingles: ASTM C 406, Grade S1; hard, dense, and sound; chamfered edges, with

nail holes machine punched or drilled and countersunk. No broken or cracked slates, no

broken exposed corners, and no broken corners on covered ends that could sacrifice

nailing strength or laying of a watertight roof.

1. Thickness: Match existing roof slates.

2. Surface Texture: Smooth.

3. Size: Match existing roof slates.

4. Nail Holes: Two per shingle.

5. Butt Shape: Standard square cut.

6. Color: Match existing roof slates

7. Weather-Exposure Color Change: Unfading.

8. Slate is reported to be a product of the Buckingham Slate Company.

B. Starter Slate: Slate shingles with chamfered nail holes front-side punched.

1. Length: Exposure of slate shingle plus head lap.

2.02 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type II, asphalt-saturated organic felt, unperforated.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free.

B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type,

grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in slate-shingle roofing and

remain watertight.

C. Slating Nails: ASTM F 1667, hard copper, stainless-steel, or cut-brass, smooth

shanked, wire nails; 0.135-inch minimum thickness; sharp pointed; with 3/8-inch-

minimum diameter flat head; of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 3/4 inch

into sheathing.

1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as

flashing.

D. Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire

nails with low-profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-inch minimum diameter.

E. Slate Hooks: Stainless steel, black coated, 10 gauge.




073150 - 3

2.04 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. General: Comply with requirements in Section 07620 "Sheet Metal Flashing and

Trim."

1. Sheet Metal: Copper or Zinc-tin alloy-coated stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PROTECTION OF EXISTING ROOF

A. Do not walk on existing slate roof.

B. Either provide a scaffold and plank system, or hang a ladder from the roof peak to

provide access to broken slates. Provide access to ladder by means of a boom lift.

3.02 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the

eaves. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum

of 4 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten

with felt underlayment nails.

1. Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet

underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less

than 3 inches in direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches

over self-adhering sheet underlayment.

3.03 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in

Section 07620 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA

Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."

3.04 SLATE-SHINGLE REPLACEMENT

A. General:

1. Cut replacement slates on the ground to match the existing slate size and

thickness.

2. Remove existing nails holding broken slates with a nail ripper. Secure slates to

remain as necessary.




073150 - 4

3. Install slate hook at bottom of slate location, driving vertical leg into the

sheathing.

4. Gently set the replacement slate into place, and hook the bottom edge of the slate

over the slate hook.

B. Cut and fit slate neatly around roof vents, pipes, ventilators, and other projections

through roof.

C. Remove and replace damaged or broken slate shingles.

3.05 MINOR REPAIRS TO SLATE ROOF

A. General: Removal of Existing Loose or Damaged Shingles:

1. Using a slate ripper, carefully remove any loose, cracked and broken slate shingles from

the roof, taking care not to break those that are only loose. Remove any remaining small

pieces of slate.

2. Store removed full slate shingles for reuse.

B. Acceptance of Roof Deck: Inspect roof deck for flaws which could prevent the proper

installation of the new slates. Report any defects in writing.

C. Replacement of Slate Roofing:

1. Slide in new slates to replace broken, missing or cracked slates. Reuse existing full slates

wherever possible.

2. Line up slate in its course making sure any pre-punched holes are covered by the slates

above.

3. Neatly fit the slate around all pipes, vents and other penetrations.

4. Mark location of new nail hole through the vertical joint of slates in the overlying course,

approximately 5 inches from the head of the overlaying slate or 2 inches below the tail of

the second course of slate above.

5. Punch or drill new hole and nail slate into position using copper nails as specified. Cut

nail head as required to fit between slates in overlaying courses. Nail shall not be driven

so far as to put strain on the slates; slate should hang from the nail.

6. Slates overlapping sheet metal shall have the nails so placed as to avoid puncturing the

sheet metal.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean work areas of all debris as roofing work progresses. At conclusion of job, clean up loose

slates, containers and nails and leave job site neat and clean.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM - Facilities Modifications Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim



076200 - 1

SECTION 076200

SHEET METAL AND FLASHING

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.02 SUMMARY


1. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications.

2. Formed steep-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.

1.03 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and

locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.

B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and

wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive

installation.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural

movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without

failing.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of

individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured

product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and

keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.




076200 - 2

3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each

item and location in Project.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory

indicated with factory-applied finishes.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet

metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose

products have a record of successful in-service performance.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other

materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet

metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from

exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of

sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace

sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-

applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads,

structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather

without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other

defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle,

leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA

Roofing Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more

stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface

temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of




076200 - 3

components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental

effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar

heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.02 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage

by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish

required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance

required; with smooth, flat surface.

1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish

containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color

coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal

surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written

instructions.

2. Color: White, with low-gloss finish to match existing.

3. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-

colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and

wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants,

and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and

trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or

manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking

rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads

and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-

washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using

plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed

EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners

bearing on weather side of metal.




076200 - 4

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets

suitable for metal being fastened.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of

type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal

flashing and trim and remain watertight.

D. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing

compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving

joints, including riveted joints.

E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.

2.04 ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Hanging Guttters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces,

corner pieces, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-

long sections. Furnish flat stock gutter bracket and flat stock gutter spacers and

straps fabricated from the same metal as the gutter but with thickness twice the

gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion joint covers and gutter

accessories from the same metal as the gutter.

1. Gutter Profile: Half-Round, according to SMACNA’s “Architectural

Sheet Metal Manual.

2. Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch wide exposed cover.

3. Gutters with Girth matching existing gutter: Fabricate from the following

materials:

a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.

B. Downspouts: Fabricate round or rectangular downspouts to match existing,

complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as

downspouts and brackets.

1. Fabricated Hanger Style: Fig. 1-35-A or 1-35-D.

2. Fabricate from the following material:

a. Aluminum, 0.024 inch thick.

2.05 STEEP-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Roof Edge Flashing and Rake: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long, but not

exceeding 12-foot-long sections. Furnish with 6-inch-wide, joint cover plates.

1. Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch- wide, concealed

backup plate.




076200 - 5

2. Fabricate from the Following Materials:

a. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance

with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions

affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of

substrates.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and

securely anchored.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work

securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use

fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items

as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes.

Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds,

and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in

watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be

covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least

two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and

free of buckling and tool marks.

5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal

contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against

galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating

or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or

cited sheet metal standard.




076200 - 6

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim

with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous

metal, or cementitious construction.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and

trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24

inches of corner or intersection.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1

inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less

than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and

locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as

required for a tight installation.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.

1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked

flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to

completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of

installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent

movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at

higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at

temperatures below 40 deg F.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in

Section 07920 "Joint Sealants."

G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.

3.03 HANGING GUTTER INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-

drainage system according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise

indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of

roof-drainage system.

B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with joints sealed with sealant. Provide for

thermal expansion. Anchor gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor gutter in

position. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to

downspouts.

1. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutters.




076200 - 7

2. Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to continuous cleat or apron

flashing.

3. Anchor gutter with gutter brackets spaced not more than 30 inches apart to

roof deck, and loosely lock to front gutter bead.

4. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with non-corrosive fasteners,

removable or hinged for cleaning gutter.

5. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through

slotted holes at 24 inches on center.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1 ½ inch telescoping joints.

1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspout securely to

walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at spacing not to exceed 60

inches on center.

2. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from the

building.

3. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system if present.

3.04 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance

requirements, and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where

possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps,

joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to

recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated.

Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to

substrate at staggered 3-inch centers.

3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within

installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on

Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of

matching profiles.

3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation

and weathering.

B. Clean off excess sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal

flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's

written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim




076200 - 8

installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended

by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and

trim in clean condition during construction.

D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have

deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair

procedures.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Joint Sealants



079200 - 1

SECTION 079200

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals:

1. Shop Drawings: Surface preparation instructions. Indicate where each product

is proposed to be used.

2. Samples: Material proposed for use showing color range available.

B. Informational Submittals:

1. Installation instructions.

2. Applicator Qualifications: Documentation indicating a minimum of 5 years

experience installing sealants in projects of similar scope.

3. Certificate of Compliance: Proposed materials meet specification

requirements.

4. Special guarantee.

1.02 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Ambient Temperature: Between 40 and 80 degrees F (4 and 27 degrees C) when

sealant is applied unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Sealant Characteristics:

1. Uniform, homogeneous.

2. Free from lumps, skins and coarse particles when mixed.

3. Nonstaining and nonbleeding.

4. Hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum, measured by ASTM C661

method.

5. Immersible may be substituted for nonimmersible.

B. Sealant Color: Unless specifically noted, match color of the principal wall material

adjoining the area of application.




079200 - 2

C. Type 4-Multi-part Polyurethane, Nonsag, Nonimmersible: Polyurethane base,

multicomponent, chemical curing; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25.

1. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Sonneborn; Sonolastic NP-II

b. Pecora Corp.; Dynatrol II

c. Tremco; Dymeric.

d. Sika Chemical Corp.; Sikaflex 2C.

e. Other approved equal.

D. Type 10-Sanitary Sealant: Silicone sealant formulated to resist mould growth and

repeated exposure to high humidity whilst retaining adhesion, flexibility and color.


a. Dow Corning; 786.

b. General Electric; Sanitary Sealant.

c. Other approved equal.

E. Type 11-Fire Penetration Sealant:


a. Dow Corning; Fire Stop Sealant or Foam.

b. General Electric; Pensil Sealant or Foam.

c. 3M Corp.; Fire Barrier Caulk CP25 and Putty 303.

d. Other approved equal.

2.02 BACKUP MATERIAL

A. Nongassing, extruded, closed-cell round polyethylene foam rod, compatible with

sealant used and approved by sealant manufacturer.

B. Size: As shown or as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Provide for all joints

larger than 3/16 inch wide.

C. Manufacturer and Products:

1. Haveg Industries; Minicel.

2. Dow Corning; Ethafoam SB.

3. Sonneborn; Sonfoam.

4. Other approved equal.

2.03 ANCILLARY MATERIAL

A. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for

specific applications.




079200 - 3

B. Joint Cleaner: Noncorrosive and nonstaining as recommended by sealant

manufacturer as being compatible with joint materials.

C. Primer: Nonstaining type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Limit the use materials in any single joint to one unless approved or recommended by

manufacturer.

B. Install joint sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193.

C. Horizontal and Sloping Joints of 1 Percent Maximum Slope: Use self-leveling (Grade

P) joint sealant.

D. Sloped, Vertical and Overhead Joints: Use nonsag (Grade NS) joint sealant.

E. Use joint sealant as required for the applicable application and as follows:

_________Joint Size_______ ___________Sealant Type__________

Less than 1” 4

Less than 2” 4

Over 2” As manufacturer’s recommendations

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Verify that joint dimensions, physical and environmental conditions are acceptable

for the material being used.

B. Surfaces to be sealed shall be clean, dry, sound and free of dust, loose mortar, oil and

any other deleterious materials.

1. Mask adjacent surfaces where necessary to maintain neat edges.

2. Commencement of work will be construed as acceptance of conditions.

3. Apply primer to dry surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer

C. Verify that joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant being

used.

D. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve the required width/depth

ratios.

E. Carefully follow manufacturer’s instructions for mixing multi-component products.




079200 - 4

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Use joint filler to achieve required joint depths to allow sealants to perform as

intended.

1. Install backer material as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

2. To greatest degree possible provide full length sections without joints or

splices.

B. Use bond breaker as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

C. Seal joints around window, door and louver frames, expansion joints and as indicated.

D. Sealant Materials: Follow manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions.

E. Joints: tool slightly concave after installation.

1. When tooling white or light colored sealant use a water wet tool.

2. Finish joints to be free of air pockets, foreign matter ridges and sags.

F. Tape Sealant: Compress to 50% of expanded thickness and install in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent surfaces of any smears or other soiling resulting from sealant

application.

B. Replace damaged surfaces resulting from from sealing or cleaning operations..

3.05 JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Use sealant Type 4 for building joints and as indicated.

B. Use sealant Type 10 for joints between countertops and backslashes and around

plumbing fixtures where they abut walls and floors.

C. Use sealant Type 11 to seal voids and holes around penetrations through fire rated

assemblies or elements..

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Steel Doors And Frames



081113 - 1

SECTION 081113

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Applicable information for each type of door and frame, including:

1. Frame conditions and anchorage details, including a frame schedule.

2. Elevations of each type of door, including a door schedule.

3. Details of any special requirements for door hardware.

1.02 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Properly identify each item with the number used in the contract documents.

B. Store doors upright, in a dry, protected area, at least 1” of the ground or floor and at

least ¼” between units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Curries Manufacturing.

B. The Ceco Corp..

C. Monarch Steelcraft

D. Steelcraft Manufacturing.

E. Republic Steel Corp..

F. Othe approved equal.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Base Metal Material:

1. ASTM A366; sheet steel, cold-rolled, stretcher level.

B. Hollow Metal Frames:

1. Products of hollow metal door manufacturer.

2. ANSI 250.8, except as modified herein.

3. Frames for Doors and Sidelites: 16 gauge for interior, welded type, of shape

and profile indicated.




081113 - 2

4. Prepare floor and wall anchors, reinforcement and cutouts for hardware to

meet requirements of ANSI A115 and ANSI A250.6.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: ANSI A250.8, except as modified herein. ANSI A115 and

ANSI A250.6 to receive hardware specified elsewhere in these specifications.

1. Doors:

a. Flush Panel Half Glazed, 16 gauge, Level 3.

b. Flush end closure at top of doors.

c. Hollow Metal Pre-Glazed Doors and Side Lights: As indicated; all

glazing to be tempered and conform to Specification Section 08800

Glazing.

2.03 FACTORY FINISHING REQUIREMENTS

A. Phosphate treat metal for paint adhesion.

B. One shop coat of baked on rust inhibiting primer compatible with finish coating

indicated in Section 09902, Painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Frames:

1. Follow SDI 105 and manufacturer’s instructions.

a. Maintain scheduled dimensions, keep head level, and maintain jambs

plumb and square.

b. Secure anchors and connections to adjacent construction.

B. Doors:

1. Hollow Metal Doors: ANSI A250.8.

2. Hardware: In accordance with manufacturer’s templates and instructions.

a. Adjust operable parts for correct operation.

b. Remove hardware, with the exception of prime coated items, tag, box

and reinstall after finish painting is completed.

C. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with

underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.02 FIELD PAINTING

A. Where prime coat has been damaged, sand smooth and touch up with compatible

primer used in shop preparation.

1. Remove rust before painting.

2. Perform as soon as possible after installation.




081113 - 3

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed doors and frames from damage by other construction operations..

END OF SECTION




081113 - 4

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Acoustical Steel Door & Frame Assemblies



083474 - 1

SECTION 083474

ACOUSTICAL STEEL DOOR & FRAME ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Non-rated acoustic pressed steel frames.

B. Non-rated acoustic hollow metal doors.

C. Perimeter and bottom acoustic seals, threshold, [and astragal].

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A480/A480M-06b - General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless Heat-

Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

B. ASTM A653/A653M-06 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

C. ASTM E90-04 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne

Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.

D. ASTM E413-04 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.

E. AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2006, Structural Welding Code - Steel.

F. HMMA 802-92 - Manufacturing of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

G. HMMA 840-99 - Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

H. HMMA 865-03 - Guide Specifications For Swinging Sound Control Hollow Metal

Doors and Frames.

I. NFPA 80-07 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.

J. UL 10C-98 - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

K. ANSI/ICC A117.1-2003 - Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and

Facilities


A. Acoustic Performance: Minimum Sound Transmission Class (STC) 59 tested to

ASTM E90. Label indicating sound transmission class shall be applied to the door

and door frame.




083474 - 2

B. Installed Door and Frame Assembly: Conform to ANSI/ICC A117.1

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide product data on door construction.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate door and frame elevations, anchor types and closure

methods, finishes location of cut-outs for hardware and cut outs for glazing.

C. Samples: Submit manufacturer's door finish sample, frame corner sample, as well

as perimeter acoustic gasket.

D. Test Data:

1. Submit test data indicating compliance with the Sound Transmission Class

(STC) requirements. Include laboratory name, test report number, and

date of test.

E. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.


A. Perform work to requirements of HMMA (Hollow Metal Manufacturers

Association) standards.

B. Manufacturer: Minimum 5 years documented experience manufacturing acoustic

steel door and frame assemblies.

C. Pre-installation Meeting: Convene a pre-installation meeting before start of

installation of acoustic door and frame assemblies. Require attendance of parties

directly affecting work of this section, including contractor, architect, installer, and

manufacturer's representative. Review installation and coordination with other

work.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products.

B. Comply with HMMA 840.

C. Weld minimum two temporary jamb spreaders per frame prior to shipment.

D. Remove doors and frames from wrappings or coverings upon receipt on site and

inspect for damage.

E. Store in vertical position, spaced with blocking to permit air circulation between

components.




083474 - 3

F. Store materials out of water and covered to protect from damage.

G. Clean and touch up scratches or disfigurement caused by shipping or handling with

zinc-rich primer.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Limited Warranty: Five (5) years from date of supply, covering

material and workmanship.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design:

AMBICO Limited or approved equal

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Sheet Steel:

1. Galvanized steel to ASTM A653/A653M, ZF180 (A60).

B. Reinforcement Channel: To CSA G40.20/G40.21, coating designation to

ASTM A653/A653M, A25.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Hinges: Cam lift

B. Glazing Stops: Formed galvanized steel channel, butted corners; prepared for

countersink screws.

C. Glass: Type as tested to achieve STC and fire ratings. Glass to be factory supplied

and pre-installed.

D. Primer: Rust inhibitive zinc chromate.

E. Threshold: Smooth and flush, to provide a seal for door in closed position.

F. Astragal: To be supplied loose ready for field assembly by others

G. Perimeter and bottom acoustic seals: To provide a seal for door in closed position.




083474 - 4

H. Removable Mullion: To be provided at multiple leaf openings, where occasional

access is required. Mullions with perimeter seals to be supplied by door and frame

manufacturer.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Manufacture doors and frames to STC rating of 59, measured in accordance with

ASTM E90.

B. Steel Doors:

1. Sheet steel faces, thickness, design, and core suitable to achieve specified

STC performance.

2. Acoustic core construction, longitudinal edges, mechanically inter-locked

with visible edge seams.

3. Reinforce doors where surface-mounted hardware is required.

4. Drill and tap for mortised, templated hardware.

5. Top and Bottom Channels: Inverted, recessed, welded steel channels.

6. Astragals: Metal acoustic astragals with integral acoustic seals for double

doors.

C. Steel Frames:

1. Sheet steel, metal thickness and appropriate to maintain door STC and fire

ratings, mitred corners, fully welded seams.

2. Factory assemble and weld frames.

3. Mullions for Double Doors: Removable type.

D. Factory install glazing.

E. Affix permanent metal nameplates to door and frame, indicating manufacturer's

name, door tag, and STC rating where it shall be clearly visible.

2.05 FINISHES

A. Factory Door Finish: Factory applied zinc chromate primer to be applied to all

exposed surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install components to manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Install steel doors and frames to HMMA 840 standards and in accordance with

NFPA 80 and local authority having jurisdiction.




083474 - 5

C. Utilize welders certified by American Welding Society (AWS) for field welding.

D. Coordinate with wall construction for anchor placement.

E. Set frames plumb, square, level and at correct elevation.

F. Allow for deflection to ensure that structural loads are not transmitted to frame.

G. Adjust operable parts for correct clearances and function.

H. Install and adjust perimeter and bottom acoustic seals.

I. Finish paint in accordance with Section 09 91 15.

3.02 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation tolerances of installed frame for squareness, alignment, twist and

plumbness are to be no more then ± 1/16in (1.5mm) in compliance with HMMA

841.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Provide qualified manufacturer's representative to instruct installers on the proper

installation and adjustment of door assemblies.

B. Provide manufacturer's representative to inspect door installation, and test

minimum ten (10) cycles of operation. Correct any deficient doors.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Aluminum Windows



085113 - 1

SECTION 085113

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Large scale details and layout of windows, operators, anchors and adjoining

construction with all materials indicated accurately and to scale.

2. Manufacturer’s literature including brochures or catalogs, specifications,

instructions and standard details illustrating products intended for use.

B. Samples: Typical samples of a corner piece with the intended finish.

C. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Manufacturer’s Certification of Compliance.

2. Reports of factory quality control tests.


A. All Units: Meet construction and testing requirements of ANSI/AAMA 101-93,

Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, and carry the quality certified label of

AAMA.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store window units in vertical position and off the ground on dunnage, preferably

inside a building, protected from weather, abuse and damage and in compliance with

AAMA recommendations.

B. Avoid aluminum contact with known contaminants.

1.04 SPECIAL GUARANTEE

A. Provide manufacturer’s extended guarantee or warranty, with OWNER named as the

beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall provide for

correction, or at the option of the OWNER, removal and replacement of Work

specified in the Specification Section found to be defective during a period of 5 years

from the date of Substantial Completion.




085113 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Correct alloy and temper to comply with specified requirements.

B. Hardware: Corrosion-resistant and compatible with aluminum; suitable for intended

use, location and identical to that used on tested units.

C. Anchors and Fasteners:

1. Exposed: Aluminum or Type 304 stainless steel

2. Concealed: Aluminum or Type 304 stainless steel.

D. Sealants:

1. AAMA 800-92 to seal metal to metal, non-working joints.

2. Color to be compatible with adjacent materials.

E. Weatherstripping: High quality materials capable of meeting environmental exposure

and performance requirements.

1. Pile Weatherstrip: AAMA 701-92.

2. Closed Cell Elastomeric: ASTM C509-94.

3. Dense Elastomeric: ASTM C864-93.

F. Glass and Glazing: All glazing to be 1-inch insulating glazing units as specified in

Section 08800, Glazing.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and assemble frame, sash and ventilator members into windows and

window systems in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings, and as required by

ANSI/AAMA 101-93.

B. Mechanical Fasteners, welded components and hardware items shall not bridge

thermal barriers unless the window units tested also have thermal bridges.

C. Sealing Insulating Glass Units: Designed so that water entering the space around

around the unit will drain and not remain in contact with the edge seal of the glass.

D. Glazing Beads:

1. Sloped and coped to uniformly tight hairline joints at corners.

2. Material may be prefinished.




085113 - 3

2.03 FINISH

A. Finish components after fabrication, except those that may be prefinished as

specified.

B. Exposed framing members shall be free of scratches and other surface defects.

C. Fluoropolymer Paint Coatings: AAMA 605.2-85, or clear Class I anodic coating as

noted on schedule.

2.04 ANCILLARY MATERIALS

A. Isolation Tape:

1. Manufacturer’s and Products:

a. Tremco; 440

b. 3M; EC 1202

c. Presstite; 579.6

B. Screens:

1. Furnish rigid metal frame screens to match window frames at all operating

vents and sashes.

2. ASTM D3656-94, Class 1, 18 by 16 mesh.

2.05 SINGLE HUNG ALUMINUM THERMAL WINDOWS

A. Main frame and all extruded sections shall be of 6063-T5 alloy, and meet AAMA

DH.HC50. Window shall be Kawneer, Model 8400TL Single Hung. No substitution

will be allowed.

B. Design load shall be 50 psf.

C. Frame shall be capable of receiving a 1-inch insulated glass and all joints shall be

Sigma-arc welded.

D. Provide a polyvinyl chloride thermal break separator between the inside and outside

for all frames.

2.06 ANCILLARY MATERIALS

A. Tests:

1. Resistance to Air Infiltration: No greater than 0.06 cfm per square foot of

area, as tested in accordance with ASTM E283-91.

2. Resistance to Water Infiltration: No leakage in frame at a test pressure of 8

psf, as tested in accordance with ASTM E331-93.




085113 - 4

3. Resistance to Uniform Loading: When tested under a load of 30 psf, in

accordance with ASTM E330-90:

a. Maximum deflection: No greater than 1/175 times the span for any

member.

b. When load is removed, no evidence of permanent deformation or

damage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Verify dimensions by taking measurements at the site to the greatest extent possible.

B. Verify that openings are within allowable dimensional tolerances, are plumb, level,

clean and provide a solid anchoring surface.

C. Verify conformance with reviewed Shop drawings and that dimensions and

conditions are correct prior to installing windows.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Window and Window Components:

1. Plumb and align window faces in a single plane for each wall plane.

2. Erect windows and materials square and true and in proper alignment with

other work, anchored to maintain position when subjected to normal thermal

and building movement and 30 psf wind loads.

3. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Installation shall be weathertight as specified under Article Source Quality

Control.

B. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete, cement plaster or stucco with

isolation paint, or isolation tape cut to a neat line.

3.03 GLAZING

A. Glass may be factory or field installed.

B. Install in full accordance with Section 08800 Glazing, and glass manufacturer’s

instructions.

3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove protective materials and clean windows with potable water or water with an

approved soap or detergent.




085113 - 5

B. Inspect and readjust glazed ventilators as necessary for free operation at completion.

C. Adjust windows for correct operation.

D. Lubricate hardware and moving parts in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

E. Leave windows in closed position after final adjusting and cleaning.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed window units from materials that could cause damage, such as lime,

mortar, runoff from concrete and copper, careless handling of tools, weld splatter,

acids, roofing asphalt, solvents and abrasive cleaners.

END OF SECTION




085113 - 6

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Door Hardware



087100 - 1

SECTION 087100

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Product Data: Manufacturer’s published literature for each item of finished

hardware required.

2. Finish Hardware Schedule: Furnish complete and detailed schedule of all

items being furnished.

B. Informational Submittals: Two samples of each type of glass and glazing material to

be used.

1. Operation and Maintenance Data.


A. Qualifications of Supplier: Recognized supplier of architectural finish hardware, with

a proven record of supplying hardware for a minimum of 5 years and is, or employs, a

qualified architectural hardware consultant.

B. Qualifications of Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC): Certified by Door and

Hardware Institute.


A. Before delivery, clearly identify and label each item of hardware with description and

location of installation.

B. Provide secure storage for finish hardware items until installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Provide products of one manufacturer for each product in order to achieve

standardization of appearance, maintenance and replacement..

B. Finishes: ANSI A156.18.




087100 - 2

2.02 FASTENERS

A. Stainless steel unless indicated otherwise.

2.03 HINGES

A. ANSI A156.1.

B. Quantity per Door Leaf (Minimum):

Door Height Hinges

5’ -0” – 7’ -6” 1 ½ pairs

Over 7’ -6” 2 pairs

C. Hinge Height:

Door Width Hinge Height

Up to 3’ -0” 4 ½ - inches

3’ -0” – 4’ -0” 5 – inches

D. Hinge Width: minimum required for clearance of trim and providing 180-degree

swing.

E. Exterior Hinges: Non-removable pin.

F. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel No. 630.

G. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Stanley; FBB191-32D

2. McKinney; TB2314

3. Lawrence; BB4101-32D

4. ANSI/BHMA; A5112

2.04 LOCKS AND LATCH SETS

A. Mortise Locks: ANSI A156.13, Series 1000, Grade 1 and A115.1

1. Materials: Brass or Stainless Steel

2. Trim: Wrought or forged lever handles and roses.

3. Core Cylinders: Interchangeable, removable; minimum 6 pins.

4. Throw: 5/8-inch minimum.





087100 - 3

a. Sargent; LNH.

b. Schlage; 03.

c. Best; 3H Fairbanks.

B. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel No. 630.

C. Manufacturers and Types:

1. Mortise Entrance Lock with Lever:

a. Sargent; 8245-LNH

b. Schlage; L9456-03

c. Best; 35H7F3H

d. ANSI/BHMA; F12, F13

2. Latch:

a. Sargent; 9U15

b. Schlage; C10S

c. Best; 84K0N4C

d. ANSI/BHMA; F75

D. Keying:

1. Lock Cylinders: Operate by Master Key system that allows for future

expansion.

2. Keylocks: Key new locks into existing Master Key system, as directed by, and

coordinated with the CM.

3. Keys: Two per lock; tag with required schedule information.

4. Mater Keys; hand, or send to CM by registered mail.

2.05 CONSTRUCTION KEY SYSTEM

A. Removable construction core system for locks.

2.06 CLOSERS

A. ANSI A156.4.

B. Size closers in accordance with manufacturer’s standards and recommendations.

Mount regular arm closers on pull side.

C. Finish: Satin chromium-plated No. 626.

D. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Regular arm:




087100 - 4

a. LCN 4010 Series.

b. Sargent; 350 Series.

c. ANSI/BHMA C02011

2.07 STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. ANSI A156.16.

B. Machine Screws: In threaded anchors at masonry and concrete.

C. Self-Tapping Screws: At stud partitions or metal mountings.

D. Finish: Satin chromium-plated No. 626.

E. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Floor Stop:

a. BBW or GJ; F121X.

b. Baldwin; 4086.

c. ANSI/BHMA L02131

2. Wall Stop:

a. BBW or GJ; WC9X.

b. Baldwin; 4031.

c. ANSI/BHMA L02241

2.08 KICKPLATES

A. Solid metal, not plated.

B. Width of door leaf less 1 ½” at single leaf.

C. Finish: Satin stainless steel No. 630.

D. Types and Manufacturers: Builders Brass Works, Baldwin or Cipco as follows:

1. 10-inches high by 0.05-inch thick.

2.09 THRESHOLDS

A. Thresholds: One-piece full width of scheduled opening.

B. Provide with stainless steel machine screws in threaded expansion anchors.

C. Finish: Mill finish aluminum.




087100 - 5

D. Types and Manufacturers:

1. Pemko; 175A Saddle, 4”x ½”.

2. Reese; S104A Saddle, 4”x ½”.

2.10 SILENCERS

A. Thresholds: One-piece full width of scheduled opening.

B. At each latch side of frame without seals.

C. Three silencers per leaf.

2.11 NAMEPLATES

A. Material: Plastic plate; 1/8-inch thick with beveled edges.

B. Types and Manufacturers: Builders Brass Works, Baldwin, Trimco as follows:

1. 2-inch high backplate with 1”-inch high white Helvetica medium letters; text

as provided by Owner.

2.12 TEMPLATES

A. To match hardware supplied.

B. Make available for coordination purposes no more than ten (10) days after receipt of

approved Hardware Schedule.

2.13 EXIT HARDWARE

A. Exit Doors: Always operable from the inside without the use of a key.

2.14 DUST PROOF STRIKE

A. Designated for use with the bottom bolt of all flush bolts.

B. Spring loaded plunger returns to floor anytime bolt is retracted.

C. Strike hole is ¾” dia. And -1/8” deep

D. Finish: US26D (Satin Chrome)

2.15 FLUSH BOLTS

A. Fully automatic – inactive door is latched, bolts are extended when active door closes,

door is unlatched, bolts retract when active door is opened.




087100 - 6

B. Low Actuation Forces – Top bolt has no spring tension

C. Fits standard ANSI A115.4 Door Frame preparations

D. Non-handed

E. Standard Rod length: 12 inches

F. Finish: US32D (Satin Stainless)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: In accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Ensure work is neat, secure and provides correct function.

C. Latchbolts:

1. Install to correctly engage strikes automatically.

2. In no case should additional manual pressure be required to engage the latch.

D. Stops and holders: set to allow doors to open to maximum extent with hitting adjacent

structure or fixed objects.

E. Wall Mounted Hardware: Install over solid blocking.

F. Thresholds:

1. Cope ends neatly and snug to frame profile.

2. Set in sealant and seal to frames at ends.

G. Hardware: Adjust for easy noise free operation.

3.02 MOUNTING DIMENSIONS

A. Standard Door Hardware Locations: As recommended and published by Door and

Hardware Institute, unless noted otherwise.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Cover and protect exposed surfaces of hardware during installation and until

Substantial Completion.

B. Fit, dismantle and reinstall finish hardware as required for finish painting.




087100 - 7

C. Remove protective measures prior to final cleaning and install final cylinders.

3.04 HARDWARE SETS

A. Office Doors: HW-1

1. 1-1/2 pr butt hinges.

2. 1 lockset.

3. 3 silencers.

4. 1 floor stop.

5. (Ref. Finish Plans for threshold type)

6. (Ref. Acoustical Steel Door & Frame Assemblies

section 08374 for additional acoustical hardware)

B. Restrooms: HW-2

1. 1-1/2 pr butt hinges.

2. 1 lockset (locks from inside).

3. 1 closer.

4. 3 silencers.

5. 1 floor stop.

6. (Ref. Finish Plans for threshold type)

C. Double Door Storage & Utility Rooms : HW-3

1. 3 pr butt hinges.

2. 1 lockset

3. 1 metal threshold.

4. 2 closers.

5. (Ref. Acoustical Steel Door & Frame Assemblies

section 08374 for additional acoustical hardware)

6. 1 set flush bolts

7. 1 dust proof floor strike

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Glazing



088000 - 1

SECTION 088000

GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including

those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by

reference to this Section:

1. Doors.

2. Storefront framing.

3. Glazed entrances.

4. Mirrors.

5. Interior borrowed lites.


A. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis

according to ASTM E 1300 by a qualified professional engineer, using the

following design criteria:

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from

vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type

factors for short-duration load.

3. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by

differential shading within individual glass lites.

B. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material

type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for

adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous

testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those

submitted.




088000 - 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision

glass; 12 inches square.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and

location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product

manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are

indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in

this Section or in referenced standards.

1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North

American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for

Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated,

permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC. Label shall

indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing

standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers

or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of

IGCC.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's

standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass

units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated

glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to

glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to

manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other

indications of deterioration in coating.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard

form in which laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass

units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of

laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not




088000 - 3

attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass

contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation,

delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes

exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.


C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard

form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass

units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of

insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not

attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass

contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the

obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Basis of design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, by

“VIRACON, INC.”; available products that may be incorporated into the Work

include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. AFG Industries, Inc.; Krystal Klear.

2. Guardian Industries Corp.; Ultrawhite.

3. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite.

4. PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire.

B. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass

lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

C. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS

heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply

with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is

indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float

glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where

fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

D. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes

basic-protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 2 when




088000 - 4

tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width

and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project and shall be installed in

same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project.

1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade.

E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance

properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on

procedures indicated below:

1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based

on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h

x deg F.

2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-

glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program.

3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear)

unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.

C. Clear single pane with translucent laminated film (interior locations).

2.3 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of

glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to

ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal.

2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.

2.4 TEMPERED GLASS

A. As indicated on drawings.




088000 - 5

2.5 LAMINATED GLASS

A. Basis of design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, by

“VIRACON, INC.”; available products that may be incorporated into the Work


1. AFG Industries, Inc.; Krystal Klear.

2. Guardian Industries Corp.; Ultrawhite.

3. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite.

4. PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire.

B. Thickness: ¼” Minimum, comprising two layers of 1/8” glass interlayered with

0.030” PVB interlayer.

2.6 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and

hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:

1. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.

2. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.

3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned

EPDM silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with

ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain

watertight seal.

1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by

inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or

pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of

glazing.

2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one

another and with other materials they will contact, including glass

products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates,

under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant

manufacturer based on testing and field experience.




088000 - 6

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written

instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications

indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system,

not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,

Subpart D.

4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with

ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

2.8 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent

solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous

surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and

glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with

ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to

continuous pressure.

2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject

to continuous pressure.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket

manufacturer.

B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness

of 85, plus or minus 5.

C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by

glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral

movement (side walking).

E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell

material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise

produce optimum glazing sealant performance.




088000 - 7

2.10 GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type No. 1 as indicated on drawings: Clear float glass.

1. Thickness: 1/4 inch .

B. Glass Type No. 2 at all interior glazing locations and as indicated on drawings:

Clear fully tempered float glass.


2. Provide safety glazing label.

C. Glass Type No. 3 at all storefront locations and as indicated on drawings:

Laminated glass.


2. Provide safety glazing label.

D. Glass Type No. 4 at all exterior locations and as indicated on drawings Low-e-

coated, clear insulating glass.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch.

2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 1/4 inch.

3. Outdoor Lite: Float glass .

4. Interspace Content: Air .

5. Indoor Lite: Float glass .

6. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface.

7. Visible Light Transmittance: 73 percent minimum.

8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: .29 maximum.

9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: .27 maximum.

10. Solar Transmittance: 38 percent maximum.

E. Glass Type No. 4A as indicated at exterior windows in Office Rooms 2203 and

2205. As Type 4 but to have Viracon V1086 Frit on interior face.




088000 - 8

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants,

gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are

indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during

installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face

clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove

damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged

glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could

weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as

determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced

glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set

blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing

glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from

moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass

manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

3.2 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed

edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not

stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to

jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to

heads and sills.




088000 - 9

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together,

not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape

manufacturer.

E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by

inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against

faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward

centers of openings.

G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.3 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing,

between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to

prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems

until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in

position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for

optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete

wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching

crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to

glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from

construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do

come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended

in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry

surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month,

for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in

writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is

damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction

period.




088000 - 10

END OF SECTION 088000

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Louvers and Vents



089000 - 1

SECTION 089000

LOUVERS AND VENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum and formed-metal louvers.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 23 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in

AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in

referenced standards.

B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades; i.e., the axes of the blades are

horizontal.

C. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water

and drain it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit

and away from opening.

D. Storm-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven rain

performance, as determined by testing according to AMCA 500-L.


A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis

by a qualified professional engineer, using structural performance requirements

and design criteria indicated.




089000 - 2

B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and

the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated

without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue

caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and

anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the

building.

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq.

ft. , acting inward or outward.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface

temperature changes, without buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of

components, failure of connections, or other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material

surfaces.

D. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements

specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those

provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages

showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings

Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles,

angles, and spacing.

1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of

preventing water intrusion.

2. Show mullion profiles and locations.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and

sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.




089000 - 3


A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents from single source from a single

manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color

finish.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's

"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and

installation procedures.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field

measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for

forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 319.

D. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise

indicated.

2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel

fasteners.

3. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of

louvers.

E. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion

anchors, made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without

failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load

imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a

qualified independent testing agency.




089000 - 4

2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly.

Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly

mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and

handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-

fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates.

1. Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at joints where

indicated.

C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and

frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.

D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with

allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material

tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.

1. Frame Type: Exterior flange unless otherwise indicated.

E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than

recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less.

1. Exposed Mullions: Where indicated, provide units with exposed mullions

of same width and depth as louver frame. Where length of louver exceeds

fabrication and handling limitations, provide interlocking split mullions

designed to permit expansion and contraction.

G. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds

concealed from view, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver

manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted

connections between frame members necessary.

2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of

the following:

a. Air Balance Inc.; a Mestek company.

b. Construction Specialties, Inc.




089000 - 5

c. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

2. Louver Depth: 6 inches .

3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch for blades

and 0.080 inch for frames.

4. Mullion Type: Exposed.

5. Louver Performance Ratings:

a. Free Area: Not less than 8.0 sq. ft. for 48-inch- wide by 48-inch-

high louver.

b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 950 fpm.

c. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg static pressure drop

at 700-fpm free-area exhaust and intake velocity.

6. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

2.4 LOUVER SCREENS

A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.

1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.

2. Screening Type: Bird screening except where insect screening is indicated.

B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced

a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c.

C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.

1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which

screens are attached.

2. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached.

3. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert for insect screens

and non-rewirable, U-shaped frames for bird screens.

D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:

1. Bird Screening: Flattened, expanded aluminum, 3/4 by 0.050 inch thick.




089000 - 6

2.5 BLANK-OFF PANELS

A. Insulated, Blank-Off Panels: Laminated panels consisting of insulating core

surfaced on back and front with metal sheets and attached to back of louver.

1. Thickness: 1 inch.

2. Metal Facing Sheets: Aluminum sheet, not less than 0.050-inch nominal

thickness.

3. Insulating Core: Rigid, glass-fiber-board insulation or extruded-

polystyrene foam.

4. Edge Treatment: Trim perimeter edges of blank-off panels with louver

manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum-channel frames, not less than

0.080-inch nominal thickness, with corners mitered and with same finish

as panels.

5. Seal perimeter joints between panel faces and louver frames with gaskets

or sealant.

6. Panel Finish: Same type of finish applied to louvers, but black color.

7. Attach blank-off panels with clips or sheet metal screws.

2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal

Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Finish louvers after assembly.

B. High-Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with

AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in

both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed

metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written

instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

of standard and non-standard colors.




089000 - 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for

installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry

construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with

adjacent work.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to

screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight

connection.

C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and

secured.

D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint

fillers, as indicated.

E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore

finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be

refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire

unit or provide new units.

F. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact

with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action

by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with

waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.

G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver

installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply

with Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver

installation.




089000 - 8


A. Test operation of adjustable louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully

functioning units that comply with requirements.

B. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary

covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let

soil accumulate during construction period.

C. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or

detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.

D. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no

evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as

determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.

1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches

color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Non-load Bearing Metal Wall Framing



092216 - 1

SECTION 092216

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS



A. Deliver materials to site, in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged

containers, with labels intact clearly indicating manufacturer and material.

B. Storage:

1. Store materials inside, under cover, stacked flat, off the floor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond.

B. Dale/Incor.

C. G-P Gypsum Corporation.

D. Dietrich.

E. US Gypsum Company.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Furnish materials from a single manufacturer only.

B. Studs, Tracks, Furring Channels and Accessories:

1. ASTM C645.

2. 20-gauge galvanized steel C-studs with 1 5/8-inch flanges and ancillary items.

3. Size shall be 3 5/8 inches wide unless indicated otherwise.

C. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 16-gauge, free of rust, coated with factory

applied rust-inhibitive finish, 1 ½-inch deep, weighing not less than 475 pounds per

1,000 linear feet

D. Furring Channels: Roll-formed hat shaped section of 25-gauge galvanized steel with a

face width of 1 3/8-inches and a depth of 7/8-inch..

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Non-load Bearing Metal Wall Framing



092216 - 2

E. Resilient Furring Channels:

1. Roll-formed section of 25-gauge galvanized steel with face width of 1 ½-

inches designed for resilient attachment of gypsum board to framing.


a. United States Gypsum; RC-1 channel.

b. Gold Bond; resilient channels.

F. Z Furring Channels: US Gypsum or Gold Bond.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 ERECTION

A. Preparation: Provide, install and maintain necessary scaffold, staging, trestles,

temporary heating, lighting and ventilation as necessary for the duration of the work.

B. Layout: Set out partitions as indicated.

C. Tracks:

1. Attach metal runner tracks to floor slabs with recommended fasteners located

2-inches from each end and spaced a maximum of 24-inches on center.

2. Attach head tracks to structural overhead.

D. Studs and Other Framing:

1. ASTM C754.

2. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions in positioning studs and engaging

with floor and head tracks.

3. Splices will not be permitted.

4. Provide double full-length studs at door and side-light jambs.

5. Over door and side-light openings place horizontally a cut-to-length section of

runner with a web-flange bend at each end secured to jamb studs. Install

vertical studs at 16-inches on center over the door extending to the head track.

6. Wall Mounting Accessories and Cabinets: Coordinate and provide horizontal

stud or flat strap blocking as necessary to provide adequate support.

E. Furring:

1. Space furring channels to match stud spacing.

2. Provide adequate furring at full perimeter of drywall.

F. Leave framing plumb, aligned, braced and anchored ready to receive gypsum board.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications GYPSUM BOARD



092900 - 1

SECTION 092900

GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.

2. Tile backing panels.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural

framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.



B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim

accessory indicated.


A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at

least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality

standards for materials and execution.

1. Install mockups for the following:

a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed

locations.

b. Each texture finish indicated.




092900 - 2

2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and

wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.

3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become

part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial

Completion.


A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against

weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential

causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to

prevent sagging.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum

board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and

conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that

are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not

limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to,

fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide

materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated

according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. Low-Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing

and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'

"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various

Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."




092900 - 3

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content

plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 10% percent.

B. Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500

miles of Project site.

C. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in

each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following:

1. American Gypsum.

2. CertainTeed Corp.

3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.

4. Lafarge North America Inc.

5. National Gypsum Company.

6. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.



D. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.



E. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, Level 1.




092900 - 4

1. Core: As indicated on Drawings.


3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to

ASTM D 3274.

F. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With

moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.

1. Core: 1/2 inch, regular type.


3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to

ASTM D 3274.

2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with

manufacturer's standard edges.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the following:

a. American Gypsum.

b. CertainTeed Corp.

c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.

d. Lafarge North America Inc.

e. PABCO Gypsum.

f. Temple-Inland.

g. USG Corporation.

2. Core: As indicated on Drawings.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.

b. Bullnose bead.

c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint

compound.




092900 - 5

f. Expansion (control) joint.

g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that

is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type

taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,

fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable

topping compound.

D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:

1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and

setting-type, sandable topping compound.

E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping

compound and setting-type, sandable topping compound.

2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation

standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly

adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.




092900 - 6

1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel

members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size

recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

E. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing,

with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions

affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged,

and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end

joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger

abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges

and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not

force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where

intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end

joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical

joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints

at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum

panels.




092900 - 7

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces

(above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or

smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than

8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside

of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by

structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at

structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these

locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal

joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel

is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings or where required for fire-resistance-

rated assembly.

3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces where indicated.

4. Abuse-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.

5. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application

to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise

indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to

framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated

assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in

alternate courses of panels.




092900 - 8

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally

unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated

assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to

framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill

screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying

base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply

base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints

one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints,

unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face

layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located

over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud

or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or

required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite

sides of partitions.

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing)

and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally

(perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring

member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to

supports with screws.

D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered

to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum

board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and

temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Water-Resistant Backing Board: Install where indicated with 1/4-inch gap where

panels abut other construction or penetrations.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces

to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.




092900 - 9

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with

same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,

penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare

gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound

from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically

indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and

according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.

3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise

indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in

Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

4. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in

Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written

instructions for use as exposed soffit board.

F. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.




092900 - 10

G. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from

floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or

otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct

sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction

period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not

limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to,

fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications TILING



093000 - 1

SECTION 093000

TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Ceramic tile.


1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction,

control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces.

2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" water-resistant backer board.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in

ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.

C. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.



B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show

widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation

joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include

Samples of accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification:




093000 - 2

1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and

finish required.

2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each

type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make

samples at least 12 inches square, but not fewer than 4 tiles. Use grout of

type and in color or colors approved for completed Work.

3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish

required.

4. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile,

signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product and special

purpose tile.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products

installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified

with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent

of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size

indicated.

2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for

each type, composition, and color indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one

source or producer.

1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and

of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each

contiguous area.




093000 - 3

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a

uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one

manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products

specified in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product:

1. Joint sealants.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and

to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and

execution.

1. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.

2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if

undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation

by other trades.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken

and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for

labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a

dry location.

C. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.

D. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent

coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does

contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before

setting tile.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is

complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the

levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.




093000 - 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for

types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise

indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with

ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI

standards referenced by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation

schedules, and other requirements specified.

C. Low-Emitting Materials: Tile flooring systems shall comply with the testing and

product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard

Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources

Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in

factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in

colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

E. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile

assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or

edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing

that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a

record of successful in-service performance.

F. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type,

protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by

precoating with continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not

coat unexposed tile surfaces.

2.2 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Porcelain Floor and Wall Tile

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on

Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.

b. Crossville, Inc.

c. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.

d. Deutsche Steinzeug America, Inc.




093000 - 5

e. Interceramic.

f. Lone Star Ceramics Company.

g. Grupo Porcelanite.

h. Portobello America, Inc.

i. Seneca Tiles, Inc.

2.3 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.



a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company.

b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.

c. Bostik, Inc.

d. C-Cure.

e. Custom Building Products.

f. Jamo Inc.

g. Laticrete International, Inc.

h. MAPEI Corporation.

i. Mer-Kote Products, Inc.

j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.

k. Summitville Tiles, Inc.

l. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.

2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl

acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project

site.

3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for

nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

2.4 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement

and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.

B. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.



a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company.

b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.

c. Bostik, Inc.

d. C-Cure.

e. Custom Building Products.




093000 - 6

f. Jamo Inc.

g. Laticrete International, Inc.

h. MAPEI Corporation.

i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.

j. Summitville Tiles, Inc.

k. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.

2.5 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that

comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in


B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile

adjoining sealed joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS;

Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates

indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile

joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of

high humidity and extreme temperatures.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following:

a. DAP Inc.; 100 percent Silicone Kitchen and Bath Sealant.

b. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786.

c. GE Silicones; a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700.

d. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latasil Tile & Stone Sealant.

e. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant.

f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland

cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting

materials for installations indicated.

B. Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated

to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout;

compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after

grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.

1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5

percent oil with a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 87.




093000 - 7

2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating

that is specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary

protective coating for tile.

C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without

harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and

installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints

and that does not change color or appearance of grout.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following:

a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company; Grout Sealer.

b. Bostik, Inc.; CeramaSeal Grout & Tile Sealer.

c. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978.

d. Custom Building Products; Grout and Tile Sealer.

e. MAPEI Corporation; KER 003, Silicone Spray Sealer for

Cementitious Tile Grout.

f. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer.

g. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout

and Tile Sealer.

h. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; TA-257 Silicone

Grout Sealer.

2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout

manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers,

mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform

quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with

Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and

other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings

that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing

compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone;




093000 - 8

and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for

installations indicated.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and

mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has

been completed.

3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile

joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation

with Architect.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory

blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of

colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not

factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before

installing.

B. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or

needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat

them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat

unexposed tile surfaces.

3.3 TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA

installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of

the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are

referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules,

and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form

complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate

work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint

alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile

without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim,

finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical

outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap

tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate

exposed tile edges.




093000 - 9

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile

work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area.

Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile.

Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as

joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in

finished work.

2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or

indicated to be same size, align joints.

3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of

adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise

indicated.

F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint

widths:

1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch.

2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.

G. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond

dimensions indicated.

H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints,

including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints

during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut

joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces

directly above them.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in


I. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent

floor unless otherwise indicated.

1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed

above adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement

mortar (thin set).

J. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints according to grout-

sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated




093000 - 10

grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft

cloth.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile

surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

2. Clean grout smears and hazes from tile according to tile and grout

manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after

installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout

manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by

testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal

surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces

with clean water before and after cleaning.

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating

manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap

and remove coating to prevent drain clogging.

B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during

construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by

tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls

and floors.

C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective

cleaner from tile surfaces.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Acoustical Ceilings



095113 - 1

SECTION 095113

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Detailed layout of grid, based on field dimensions, indicating hanger

spacing, fastening and splicing details and changes in level details.

2. Manufacturer’s data and standard details for installation.

B. Samples:

1. One 12-inch square sample of tile material.

2. One sample, 6-inch long, of each type of suspension unit.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original containers marked with

manufacturer’s label indicating name, pattern, size and thickness.

B. Store materials in original, undamaged containers, in a location that prevents

damage or soiling by weathering.


A. Maintain humidity of 65 percent to 75 percent in the area where acoustical tile

materials are to be stored and installed for at least 24 hours before installation and

at least 24 hours after installation.

B. Maintain a consistent temperature of between 55 degrees and 70 degrees prior to

and during installation if ceiling material.

1.04 EXTRA MATERIAL

A. Additional acoustical units from the same production run as that installed shall be

provided equal to a minimum of 1 percent of the area installed but not less than 5

whole tiles.




095113 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. All suspension system components, materials and accessories shall be the product

of one single manufacturer.

B. ASTM C635, Intermediate Duty:

1. Exposed Aluminum Tee Grid:

a. Non-rated, ligh-duty, spaced to fit 24 by 24 lay-in panels.

b. Color: White.

c. Exposed Flange Width: 15/16-inch.

d. Edges: Tegular.

e. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong; (Ref Interior Finish Schedule & Legend)

2. Approved equal.

2. Edge Molding:

a. Minimum 0.020-inch stell, channel- or angle-shaped.

b. Minimum flange width of 15/16-inch.

c. Finish to match main members.

3. Hanger Wire: ASTM A641, minimum 12-gauge, galvanized, soft

annealed, mild steel wire.

4. Wire Ties: ASTM A641, 18-gauge, galvanized, annealed steel wire.

5. Furnish manufacturer’s standard hold down clips and accessories required

for a complete seismic zone installation.

2.02 ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Flat Lay-In Sound Absorption (NRC) + Sound Blocking (CAC) panels:

1. Basis of Design: Armstrong; Total Acoustics: Lyra High CAC

Item No.: 8732PB

2. Material: Lyra PB High CAC : Composite of fiberglass with acoustically

transparent membrane and wet formed mineral fiber.

3. Surface Finish: Acoustically transparent membrane with factory-applied

latex paint

4. Fire Performance: ASTM E84 and CAN/ULC S102 surface burning

characteristics. Flame Spread Index 25 or less. Smoke Developed Index 50

or less.




095113 - 3

5. ASTM E1264 Classification: Type X11, Form 2, Pattern E Fire Class A

6. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 42 minimum.

7. NRC: .95 minimum ; Articulation Class: 200

8. Light Reflectance: LR 0.75 or greater.

9. Nominal Size: 24 inches by 24 inches by 5/8-inch thick.

10. Edges: Square.

11. Finish and Color: Painted white.

12. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong

b. Celotex

c. U.S.G.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SEQUENCING

A. Lay out grid.

B. Coordinate with mechanical and electrical equipment in framing and cutting

material around ceiling penetrations.

C. Install suspension systems after mechanical and electrical work above ceiling is

complete.

D. Install acoustical panel units.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED GRID SYSTEM

A. Hang level and in straight alignment directly from structure in accordance with

ASTM C636 and the manufacturer’s current printed directions for type of

installation required.

B. Hanger Wires:

1. Space wires maximum 4 feet on center in each direction and securely

attach to structure above.

2. Install additional hangers at ends of each suspension member and at light

fixtures, 6-inches from vertical surfaces.

3. Do not splay wires more than 6-inches in a 4-foot vertical drop.

4. Provide four-way wire splays at 45 degrees from main runner to support

structure for every 144 square feet of ceiling area.

5. Wrap wire three times and turn vertically upwards.

6. Where hanger wires cannot be hung vertically from structure above due to

ducts, pipes, cable trays or other obstructions provide trapezes of steel




095113 - 4

channels (minimum 2-inch deep, 16-gauge cold-rolled carrying channels)

hung on steel rods or 8-gauge wire from structure above. Hang ceiling

wires from these trapezes or similar approved members supporting ducts

or pipes. Do not hang directly from ducts or pipes.

7. Follow suspension system manufacturer’s instructions for modified

installation required for seismic zones.

C. Edge Moldings:

1. Install at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces.

2. Miter corners where moldings intersect or install corner caps.

3. Attach to vertical surfaces with mechanical fasters appropriate to

substrate.

D. Provide additional channels, hangers and trapezes as required to support edges of

ceiling around and under adjacent mechanical and electrical work.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Install with pattern running in one direction.

B. Place material to bear all around on suspension members.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean soiled or discolored unit surfaces after installation. Replace any that will

not produce a clean, as new appearance.

B. Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids and other defects in painted surfaces.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Resilient Flooring



096519 - 1

SECTION 096519

RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples:

1. Two 12-inch square samples of tile material.

2. Two samples, 3-inch long, of resilient base.

3. Two samples, 3-inches long, of trim/edging material.

B. Product Data:

1. Manufacturer’s certificate of compliance.

2. Operation and Maintenance data:

a. Manufacturer’s published data.

b. Manufacturer’s recommended products, methods and procedures.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original containers marked with manufacturer’s

label indicating name, pattern, size and thickness. Store in compliance with

manufacturer’s requirements.


A. Maintain ambient temperature of between 70 and 90 degrees F in the area where

flooring materials are to be installed for at least 24 hours before installation and at

least 48 hours after installation.

B. Maintain a minimum temperature of 55 degrees F after flooring is installed except as

specified above or required by material manufacturer.

1.04 EXTRA MATERIAL

A. Additional flooring material from the same production run as that installed shall be

provided equal to a minimum of 1/2 percent of the area installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Flooring products of the following manufacturers, meeting these Specifications, may

be used on this project:

1. Afco Rubber Corp.

2. Armstrong World Industries.




096519 - 2

3. Azrock Floor Products.

4. Congoleum Corp.

5. Endura, Division of the Biltrite Corp.

6. Kentile Floors, Inc.

7. Mohawk Group

8. Roppe.

9. Other Approved Equal.

2.02 FLOOR COVERING MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish materials uniform in thickness and size with edges cut accurately

and square; uniform in color with variations in variegated patterns kept to a

minimum.

B. Luxury Vinyl Tile (LVT):

1. Floating LVT

2. Size 18 inches by 36 inches by .20” gauge.


a. Mohawk Group / Mass Appeal Metal 859 “On the line”

b. Approved equal.

2.03 BASE MATERIALS

A. General: ASTM F1861, uniform 0.125-inch thickness and in as long lengths as

practicable for the installation.

1. Factory premolded internal and external corners to match base material when

available.

2. Vinyl Base: Type TV, Group 2.

3. Style: varies, ref. Interior Finish Legend & Schedule

4. Height: 4-inches.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Trim: Furnish in lengths as long as practicable to suit installation conditions.

B. Reducers:

1. Standard rubber or vinyl floor reducer in thickness to suit adjoining floor

finishes, by 1-inch wide, tapered or beveled-edge strip.


a. Johnsonite; Reducer Series RRS.

b. Mercer; 633 Tile Reducer.

c. Approved equal.

C. Adhesive: as recommended by tile manufacturer.

D. Primer and crack Filler: As recommended by tile manufacturer.




096519 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrate for excessive moisture content and unevenness that would affect

the installation or quality of the resilient flooring as specified.

B. Correct all defects prior to commencing the installation..

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove dirt, oil, grease and other foreign matter from surfaces to receive floor

covering.

B. Prime surfaces to receive floor covering as recommended by manufacturer.

3.03 APPLICATION OF ADHESIVES

A. Install Mix and apply adhesives in full accordance with manufacturer’s written

instructions.

B. Apply uniformly over surfaces:

1. Cover only the area that can be covered by flooring material within

recommended working time of the adhesive.

2. Remove any adhesive that dries or films.

3. Do not soil walls, bases or adjacent areas with adhesive.

4. Promptly remove any spillage or surplus.

C. Apply adhesive with recommended tool.

D. Clean trowel and maintain notches as necessary to ensure proper application of

adhesive.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF TILE MATERIAL

A. Start tile at center of room or space, working towards the edges.

B. Do not install tiles less than half tile width except in irregularly shaped spaces that

offer no alternative.

C. Cut perimeter tiles neatly and accurately to fit within 1/32-inch of abutting surfaces.

D. Use reducer edge strips at exposed edges.

E. Fit flooring material neatly and tightly into breaks and recesses, up to bases, around

pipes and penetrations, under saddles or thresholds, and around permanently places

cabinets and equipment.




096519 - 4

F. Lay tile parallel to the main axis of the room or space, in straight courses with cross

joints perpendicular and square.

G. Roll the installed flooring with a 75- to 100-pound roller in both directions

immediately on completion.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF BASE

A. General: Remove defects from floor and wall that prevent a level and true installation

of base material.

1. Install base around perimeter of room or space, as indicated, and at toe spaces

of cabinets.

2. Unroll base material and cut accurately to desired lengths for minimum

number of joints.

3. Match edges at joints or double cut adjoining lengths to give a continuous

appearance.

B. Top-Set Base:

1. Apply adhesive and firmly adhere to wall surface.

2. Press down to ensure bottom cove edge follows floor profile.

3. Ensure top and bottom edges of base are in firm contact with wall and floor.

4. Unless otherwise approved by the A/E or owner, use preformed internal and

external corners.

5. Scribe base accurately and tightly to adjoining materials.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF TRIM MATERIAL

A. Provide reducers where floor covering terminates leaving an exposed edge.

B. Provide transition strip where floor covering abuts another floor material.

C. Center trim on exposed edge or center of opening. Fit ends to frames or adjoining

surfaces.

D. Apply adhesive and bond securely to substrate in true straight lines.


A. Upon completion of installation and after materials have set, clean surfaces in a

manner recommended by material manufacturer.

B. Repair adjacent surfaces damaged by flooring installation.

C. Wax finishing:

1. Provide wax, cleaner or other finishing material recommended by flooring

manufacturer.




096519 - 5

2. Apply one coat of nonslip wax or other finish recommended by manufacturer

of flooring material.

D. Protect completed installation from traffic and damage until Substantial Completion

using kraft paper, plywood or hardboard panels.

END OF SECTION




096519 - 6


WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Carpet



096813 - 1

SECTION 096813

TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes carpet.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated.

B. Samples: For each color and texture required.

1. Carpet: 12-inch- square Sample.

2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long

Samples.

C. Maintenance data.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering

Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program

requirements.


A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."


A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and

Section 7.12, "Ventilation."

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to,

more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind

strength, excess static discharge, and delamination.




096813 - 2

1. Warranty Period: Lifetime of carpet.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MODULAR CARPET TILE

A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide carpet

equal to the following:

1. J&J Flooring Group; Kinetex.

a. Style #1814 Velocity; Color: 1603 Position.

B. Construction: Loop

C. Wear Layer: 100% Solution Dyed Polyester

D. Standard Backing: Polyester Felt Cushion

E. Dye Method: Solution Dyed

F. Pattern: Ashlar.

G. Total Weight: 4.5 oz – 5.2 oz/ square foot

H. Total Thickness: 0.205 inches

I. Dimensions: 24”x24” modules

J. Special Treatments: Kinetex ProTex.

2.02 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-

based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and

subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for

installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer.

1. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives with VOC content not more than 50g/L when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24).

C. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet

manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form

secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.




096813 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the

following:

1. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-

Down Installation."

B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for

seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay

of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.

C. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,

removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

END OF SECTION




096813 - 4


WTPFM - Facilities Modifications EXTERIOR PAINTING



099113 - 1

SECTION 099113

EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the

following exterior substrates:

1. Steel.

2. Galvanized metal.

3. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).

4. Wood.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming of metal

substrates with primers specified in this Section.

2. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the

application of paint systems on interior substrates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees,

according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,


C. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85

degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.




099113 - 2

E. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and

application instructions.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss

of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.

2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.

3. Label each coat of each Sample.

4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use

same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product

category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

3. VOC content.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color

applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and

finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and


execution.




099113 - 3

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for

application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100

sq. ft.

b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional

mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added

cost to Owner.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the

Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically

approves such deviations in writing.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas

with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and

residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air

temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85

percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet

surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,

but are not limited to, the following:

1. Behr Process Corporation.




099113 - 4

2. Benjamin Moore & Co.

3. Duron, Inc.

4. Envirocoatings Canada Inc.

5. Euclid Chemical Company.

6. ICI Paints.

7. M.A.B. Paints.

8. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.

9. Pratt & Lambert.

10. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in

other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and

that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible

with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and

application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field

experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing

by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate

indicated.

C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities

having jurisdiction.

D. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.

2.3 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: MPI #4.




099113 - 5

2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water-based: MPI #3.

B. Primer, Bonding, Water-based: MPI #17.

C. Primer, Bonding, Solvent Based: MPI #69.

D. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for

exterior use in paint system indicated.

2.5 METAL PRIMERS

A. Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive for Metal: MPI #79.

B. Primer, Alkyd, Quick Dry, for Metal: MPI #76.

C. Primer, Galvanized, Water-based: MPI #134.

D. Primer, Galvanized: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.

E. Primer, Quick Dry, for Aluminum: MPI #95.

2.6 WOOD PRIMERS

A. Primer, Latex for Exterior Wood: MPI #6.

B. Primer, Alkyd for Exterior Wood: MPI #5.

C. Primer, Oil for Exterior Wood: MPI #7.

2.7 WATER-BASED PAINTS

A. Latex, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #10.

B. Latex, Exterior Low Sheen (Gloss Level 3-4): MPI #15.

C. Latex, Exterior Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #11.

D. Latex, Exterior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6: MPI #119.

E. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water-Based (Gloss Level 3): MPI #161.

F. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water-Based, Semi-Gloss (Gloss

Level 5): MPI #163.




099113 - 6

G. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water-Based, Gloss (Gloss

Level 6): MPI #164.

2.8 SOLVENT-BASED PAINTS

A. Alkyd, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #8.

B. Alkyd, Exterior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #94.

C. Alkyd, Exterior Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #9.

D. Alkyd, Quick Dry, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #81.

E. Alkyd, Quick Dry, Gloss (Gloss Level 7): MPI #96.

2.9 TEXTURED AND HIGH-BUILD COATINGS

A. Primer for Textured Coating, Latex, Flat: As recommended in writing by topcoat

manufacturer.

B. Intermediate Coat for Textured Coating, Latex, Flat: As recommended in writing

by topcoat manufacturer.

C. Textured Coating, Latex, Flat: MPI #42.

D. Primer for Latex, Exterior, High Build: As recommended in writing by topcoat

manufacturer.

E. Intermediate Coat for Latex, Exterior, High Build: As recommended in writing

by topcoat manufacturer.

F. Latex, Exterior, High Build: MPI #40.

2.10 ALUMINUM PAINT

A. Aluminum Paint: MPI #1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with

requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.




099113 - 7

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic

moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.

2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.

3. Wood: 15 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility

with existing finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI

Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are

removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible

because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before

surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades

involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied

protection.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust,

dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible

primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence,

and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be

painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if

moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted

in manufacturer's written instructions.




099113 - 8

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean

using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than

the following:

1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

2. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."

G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and

abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as

used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed

surfaces.

H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized

sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that

promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.

J. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer

recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint

system indicated.

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.

3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.

4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty

or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

K. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material

that might impair bond of paints to substrates.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and

recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items

with prime coat only.




099113 - 9

3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of

exterior door frames.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment

name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are

factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to

facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be

applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each

separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats

until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps,

brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.

Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and

Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed to view:

a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear.

b. Uninsulated metal piping.

c. Uninsulated plastic piping.

d. Pipe hangers and supports.

e. Metal conduit.

f. Plastic conduit.

g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified

testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not

comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor

shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry




099113 - 10

film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written

recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded

materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered

paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent

finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct

damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing,

as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore

damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive for metal, MPI #79.

b. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is

specified.

c. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water-based,

matching topcoat.

d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water-based, semi-

gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #163.

2. Alkyd System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anticorrosive for metal, MPI #79.


specified.

c. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.

d. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #94.

3. Quick-Drying Enamel System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76.

b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, quick dry, matching topcoat.




099113 - 11

c. Topcoat: Alkyd, quick dry, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #81.

4. Aluminum Paint System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive for metal, MPI #79.


specified.

c. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint, MPI #1.

d. Topcoat: Aluminum paint, MPI #1.

B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing

by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal

substrates with topcoat indicated.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11.





b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water-based,

matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water-based, semi-


3. Alkyd System:




b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #94.

C. Aluminum Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum, MPI #95.







099113 - 12


b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water-based,

matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water-based, semi-


3. Alkyd System:




D. Wood Substrates: Including wood trim doors wood fences wood-based panel

products exposed joists exposed beams.

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex for exterior wood, MPI #6.


c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #10.

d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11.

2. Latex over Alkyd Primer System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, oil for exterior wood, MPI #7.



3. Alkyd System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, oil for exterior wood, MPI #7.



END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Painting



099123 - 1

SECTION 099123

INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the

following interior substrates:

1. Concrete.

2. Concrete masonry units (CMU).

3. Steel.

4. Gypsum board.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees,


B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85


C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,


D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85


E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.




099123 - 2


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and

application instructions.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and

gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.

2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.

3. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use

same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product

category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.

3. VOC content.




1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color

applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and

finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and


execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for

application of each paint system specified in Part 3.




099123 - 3

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100

sq. ft..

b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional

mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added

cost to Owner.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the

Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically

approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become

part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial

Completion.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas

with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and

residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air

temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures

less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following :

1. Benjamin Moore & Co.




099123 - 4

2. Duron, Inc.

3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.

4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and

that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible

with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and

application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field

experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing

by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate

indicated.

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having

jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the

following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.

2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.

3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.

4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.

5. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.

6. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.

7. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the

testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'

"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various

Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."




099123 - 5

E. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range .

1. 20 percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.

F. Wall paints must provide a washable surface, equal to Sherwin Williams duration

product.

2.3 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: MPI #4.

1. Benjamin Moore Int/Ext. Block Filler #285.

2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50.

1. Benjamin Moore Regal Interior Latex Primer.

B. Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: MPI #3.

1. Benjamin moore All purpose Latex Primer.

C. Primer Sealer, Alkyd, Interior: MPI #45.

2.5 METAL PRIMERS

A. Primer, Alkyd, Quick Dry, for Metal: MPI #76.

B. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134.

1. Benjamin Moore #363.

C. Primer, Quick Dry, for Aluminum: MPI #95.

2.6 WATER-BASED PAINTS

A. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 4): MPI #44.

1. Benjamin Moore – Latex Satin #172.

B. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #144.

1. Benjamin Moore Interior Latex Egg-Shell #524.




099123 - 6

C. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):

MPI #147.

1. Benjamin Moore – Interior Latex Semi-gloss #376.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following

procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample

paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present

when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to

Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be

identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product

requirements.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show

materials being used do not comply with product requirements.

Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site,

pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials.

Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously

painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints

are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with

requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting


B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic

moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.

2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.

3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.




099123 - 7

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility

with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI

Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are

removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible

because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before

surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades

involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied

protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust,

dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible

primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence,

and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be

painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if

moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in


F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean

using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than

the following:

1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."




099123 - 8

G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and

abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as

used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed

surfaces.

H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized

sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean,

lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to

recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar

exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind

permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers,

and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment

name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are

factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if

multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color

of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish

each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats

until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps,

brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.

Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and

Electronic Safety and Security Work:




099123 - 9

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:

a. Uninsulated metal piping.

b. Uninsulated plastic piping.

c. Pipe hangers and supports.

d. Metal conduit.

e. Plastic conduit.

f. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.

g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas

insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Equipment, including panelboards.

b. Uninsulated metal piping.

c. Uninsulated plastic piping.

d. Pipe hangers and supports.

e. Metal conduit.

f. Other items as directed by Architect.

3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air

inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified

testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not

comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor

shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry

film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written

recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded

materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered

paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent

finished surfaces.




099123 - 10

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct

damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing,

as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore

damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low

odor/VOC, MPI #149.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC,

matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss

Level 2), MPI #144.

B. CMU Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:

a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC,

matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss

Level 3), MPI #144.

C. Steel Substrates:

1. Quick-Drying Enamel System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76.

b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, quick dry, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Alkyd, quick dry, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #81.

D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating Over Waterborne Primer System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.

b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based,

matching topcoat.




099123 - 11

c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss

(Gloss Level 5), MPI #153.

E. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:

1. Alkyd System:


b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #47.

F. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 1 ceilings, Level 5

generally), MPI #44.


WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Panel Signage



10142 - 1

SECTION 10142

PANEL SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Room-identification signs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard.



B. Shop Drawings: For signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.

2. Show sign mounting heights and accessories.

3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and

Braille, and layout for each sign at least half size.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and

exposed finish.

1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and

with the required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated

and as follows:




10142 - 2

1. Room-Identification Signs: Full-size Sample. Show message list, typestyles,

graphic elements[, including raised characters and Braille.

E. Field-Applied, Vinyl Signs: Full-size Sample of sign on painted gypsum wallboard

F. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign

schedule.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products.


A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices and electrical service

embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before

installation of signage at exterior wall locations.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering.

b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image.

c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.




10142 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SIGNS, GENERAL

A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for

Buildings and Facilities for signs.

2.2 ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

1. Ace Sign Systems, Inc.

2. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division.

3. APCO Graphics, Inc.

4. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.

5. Best Sign Systems Inc.

6. Nelson-Harkins Industries.

B. Solid-Sheet Sign, Returns, and Back: Acrylic sheet with finish specified in "Surface

Finish and Applied Graphics" Subparagraph below and as follows:

1. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.

a. Edge Condition: Square cut

b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Eased / rounded radius

2. Sign Type: Applied tactile.

3. Mounting: Surface mounted to wall with adhesive.

4. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.18 mm) minimum.

5. Surface Finish and Graphics:

a.

b. Integral Acrylic Sheet Color: As selected by Architect from full range of

industry colors.

c. Tactile characters / symbols: Raised 1/32 inch from sign face plate.




10142 - 4

d. Braille: Grade 2 Braille placed directly below last line of letters or

numbers.

e. Text and typeface: Typeface as indicated on drawings. Finish raised

characters to contrast with backgroung color, and finish Braille to match

background color.

2.3 SIGN MATERIALS

A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign,

Type UVF (UV filtering).

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of

signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with

the following:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.

2. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless-steel devices.

3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:

a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless

otherwise indicated.

b. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use oval countersunk

screws and bolts.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies.

1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible.

B. Subsurface-Engraved Graphics: Reverse engrave back face of clear face-sheet material.

Fill resulting copy with manufacturer's standard enamel. Apply opaque manufacturer's

standard background color coating over enamel-filled copy.

C. Shop- and Subsurface-Applied Vinyl: Align vinyl film in final position and apply to

surface. Firmly press film from the middle outward to obtain good bond without

blisters or fishmouths.




10142 - 5

D. Signs with Changeable Message Capability: Fabricate signs to allow insertion of

changeable messages as follows:

1. For slide-in changeable inserts, fabricate slot without burrs or constrictions that

inhibit function. Furnish initial changeable insert. Subsequent changeable inserts

are by Owner

2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the

range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of

signage work.

B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without

gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise

indicated.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to


1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with

sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility

standard.

3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or

debris that would impair installation.




10142 - 6

4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact

with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of

bituminous paint.

B. Room-Identification Signs and Other Accessible Signage: Install in locations on walls

as indicated and according to accessibility standard.

C. Mounting Methods:

1. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove

loose debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of

sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage.

Keep adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied

and to prevent visibility of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position,

and push to engage adhesive. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive

fully sets.


A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with

specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or

components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor

repair procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to

manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish.

Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until

acceptance by Owner.


WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Toilet and Bath Accessories



102800 - 1

SECTION 102800

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Washroom accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

1. Construction details and dimensions.

2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts

in other work and substrate preparation.

3. Material and finish descriptions.

4. Features that will be included for Project.

5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by

room of each accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated.

2. Identify products using designations indicated.

C. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance

manuals.

D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.




102800 - 2


A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain

products from single source from single manufacturer.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with

clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper

installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to

prevent delaying the Work.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail

in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness

unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit

and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where

concealed.

C. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0

mm thick.

2.2 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available



1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.

2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

3. Bradley Corporation.




102800 - 3

4. Georgia-Pacific.

B. Toilet Tissue (Jumbo-Roll) Dispenser

1. One required for each water closet.

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia Pacific, Model #58150.

3. Jumbo-roll toilet tissue dispenser door and cabinet shall be type-304

translucent body:. Cabinet shall be equipped with a tumbler lock keyed.

Door shall have a wide viewing slot to reveal toilet tissue supply inside

cabinet. Dispensing mechanism shall be constructed of high-impact ABS

shall accommodate one full toilet tissue roll and one stub roll. Spindles

shall be convertible in the field to dispense 2-1/4" (55mm) diameter core

rolls by removing outer spindles furnished in-place. Manufacturer’s

service and parts manual shall be provided to the building owner/manager.

C. Liquid-Soap Dispenser

1. One required for each lavatory or recessed sink.

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, Model B-822 Series, hard-wired

automatic sensor type.

3. Surface mounted; type-304 stainless steel with satin-finish.

4. Unbreakable, clear acrylic refill-indicator window; a locked, hinged

stainless steel lid for top filling. Capacity of 40-fl oz (1.2-L).

5. Concealed, vandal resistant mounting.

D. Grab Bars

1. Required for each ADA toilet stall and single toilet rooms.

2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners and snap-on cover.

3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick, 18 gauge.

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip-resistant

texture in grip area.

4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches.

5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit




102800 - 4

1. Required for each women’s toilet stall and single toilet rooms.

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, Model B-270

3. Surface mounted all welded construction with type-304 stainless steel,

satin finish.

4. Cover shall be drawn, one-piece, seamless construction secured to

container with a full-length stainless steel piano hinge

F. Seat-Cover Dispenser

1. One required in each toilet room.

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, Model B-4221

3. Type-304, 20-gauge (0.9mm) stainless steel, satin finish with drawn, one-

piece, seamless construction.

a. Radius on corners and edges.

b. 250 paper toilet seat covers capacity.

G. Mirror Unit

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, Model B-2908 Series.

2. Frame: type-304, heavy-gauge stainless steel, 3/4" x 3/4" (19 x 19mm)

angle with vertical-grain satin finish. One piece, roll-formed construction

stiffener on all sides.

a. Welded corners, ground, and polished smooth.

b. Galvanized steel back fastened to frame with concealed fasteners

and equipped with integral horizontal hanging brackets.

c. Size: As indicated on drawings.

3. Mirror: No. 1 quality, 1/4" (6mm) tempered select float glass: selected for

silvering and electrolytically copper-plated by the galvanic process.

4. Size: 24 inches wide x 42 inches high.

H. Hat & Coat Hooks

1. One required at each private office and each single toilet room.

a. Mounting on interior of door; unless door is fully glazed then

mounting shall be field coordinated.

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, Model B-6827, Surface Mounted

3. Type-304 stainless steel with satin finish.




102800 - 5

4. Flange and support arm shall be 22 gauge (0.8mm) and equipped with a

concealed, 16 gauge (1.6mm) mounting bracket

a. 12 gauge hook (2.8mm) welded to the support arm.

I. Waste Paper Towel Dispenser & Waste Receptacle (Recessed):

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-4369.

2. One required in each single occupancy toilet room.

3. Stainless steel.

4. Capacity: 3-gallon.

5. Accessories: Vinyl Liner.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled.

Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for

concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and

resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using

fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit

manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at

heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested

according to ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or

defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.




102800 - 6

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written

recommendations.


WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Projection Screens



115213 - 1

SECTION 115213

PROJECTION SCREENS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Manually operated projection screens.


1. Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork”.

2. Reference “Equipment Schedule” on Architectural Drawing A-201 for

interactive projection screens and accessories not included in this section.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For projection screens. Show layouts and types of projection

screens. Include the following:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUALLY OPERATED PROJECTION SCREENS

A. General: Manufacturer's standard spring-roller-operated units, consisting of case,

screen, mounting accessories, and other components necessary for a complete

installation.

B. Surface-Mounted, Metal-Encased, Manually Operated Screens: Units designed

and fabricated for surface mounting on wall or ceiling, fabricated from formed-

steel sheet or from aluminum extrusions; with flat back design and vinyl covering

or baked-enamel finish.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

from one of the following:

a. Da-Lite Screen Company; Designer Manual.

b. Draper Inc.; Artisan/Series M.

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Projection Screens



115213 - 2

c. Draper Inc.; Bredford, Inc.

2.2 FRONT-PROJECTION SCREEN MATERIAL

A. Matte-White Viewing Surface: Peak gain not less than 0.9, and gain not less than

0.8 at an angle of 50 degrees from the axis of the screen surface.

B. Multipurpose Reflective Viewing Surface: Peak gain not less than 1.8, and half-

gain angle of at least 25 degrees from the axis of the screen surface.

C. Seamless Construction: Provide screens, in sizes indicated, without seams.

D. Edge Treatment: Without masking borders.

E. Size of Viewing Surface: Manual: 96 by 72 inches .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROJECTION SCREEN INSTALLATION

A. Install projection screens at locations indicated to comply with screen


B. Install projection screens with screen cases in position and in relation to adjoining

construction indicated. Securely anchor to supporting substrate in a manner that

produces a smoothly operating screen with vertical edges plumb and viewing

surface flat when screen is lowered.


WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Horizontal Louver Blinds



122113 - 1

SECTION 122113

HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for horizontal louver

blinds.

C. Samples: For each exposed finish.

D. Maintenance data.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide horizontal louver blinds with the fire-

test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per

test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate

markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701.

B. Product Standard: Provide horizontal louver blinds complying with WCSC A 100.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Hunter Douglas; Celebrity Aluminum Blinds.

2. Levolor, a Newell Rubbermaid Company; Aluminum Mini-Blinds

3. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.; Graber Performance Supreme 1”

Aluminum Blinds.

B. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and

finish indicated; with crowned profile and radiused corners.

1. Width: 1 inch.

2. Finish: One color.




122113 - 2

a. Ionized Coating: Antistatic, dust-repellent, baked polyester finish.

b. Reflective Coating: Manufacturer's special coating enhancing the

reflection of solar energy on the outside-facing slat surface.

C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully

enclosing operating mechanisms on three sides and end plugs.

D. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube, with plastic or metal capped

ends.

E. Ladders: Evenly spaced to prevent long-term slat sag.

1. For Blinds with Nominal Slat Width 1 Inch or Less: Braided string.

F. Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard.

G. Tilt Control: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism, slip clutch or detachable wand

preventing overrotation, and linkage rod.

H. Lift Operation: Manual.

I. Mounting: Ceiling mounting.

J. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard.

K. Side Channels and Perimeter Light Gap Seals: Manufacturer's standard.

L. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's

full range.

2.02 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION

A. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.

1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts.

B. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as

follows:

1. Blind Units Installed between (inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch per

side or 1/2 inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than jamb-to-jamb

dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. Length equal to 1/4

inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than head-to-sill dimension of opening in

which each blind is installed.

C. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for

supporting headrail and operating hardware, and for hardware position and blind

mounting method indicated.




122113 - 3

D. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal

noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for

securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under

conditions of normal use.

E. Color-Coated Finish:

1. Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked

finish.

F. Component Color: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and exposed-to-view metal and

plastic matching or coordinating with slat color, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions

affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units

according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so exterior slat edges in

any position are not closer than 1 inch to interior face of glass. Install intermediate

support as required to prevent deflection in headrail. Allow clearances between

adjacent blinds and for operating glazed opening's operation hardware if any.

B. Head Mounted: Install headrail on face of opening head.

C. Recessed: Install headrail concealed within blind pocket.

D. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free of

binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.

E. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's

written instructions.

END OF SECTION




122113 - 4


WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems



211313 - 1

SECTION 211313

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies standpipe and sprinkler system for buildings and structures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Pipe sizes used in this Section are nominal pipe size (NPS) specified in inches. Tube

sizes are standard tube size specified in inches.

B. Working plans and sprinkler system shop drawings as used in this Section refer to

documents (including drawings and calculations) prepared pursuant to requirements in

latest NFPA 13, “Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems,” for obtaining

approval of authority having jurisdiction.

C. Other definitions for fire protection systems are included in referenced NFPA standards.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Layout sprinkler system piping and heads and all fire protection piping in accordance

with requirements of the National Fire Protection Association and state and local fire

marshal. Areas requiring sprinklers shall be designed for occupancy as required by

applicable codes. Conceal fire protection piping in finished spaces unless indicated

otherwise. System drains and inspector's test shall not be located in finished spaces.

B. Sprinkler equipment and work shall conform to requirements of the latest NFPA 13,

“Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems,” In addition, all work shall conform

to requirements of all codes and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction over this

work, including, but not limited to International Fire Code. Layout and size all piping

based on hydraulic calculations.




211313 - 2

C. Detailed, dimensional layout and Working Plans, together with descriptive

specifications, hydraulic calculations and engineering data sheets for all manufactured

material and equipment, shall be furnished for review. Prior to submission of these

Working Plans to Engineer, submit drawings and data to the local authorities for review

and approval. No material will be reviewed by Engineer until these prior approvals

have been obtained. Provide hydraulic calculations. All costs related to changes on the

drawings by the Fire Department, Underwriters or other reviewing authorities shall be

the Contractor's responsibility.

D. Final design of the system shall be coordinated with field conditions and available water

supply. All fire protection piping and equipment shown on the Contract Drawings are

for suggestive purposes only. Field verify all conditions. All items of equipment shall

be installed by on the job measurements and coordinated with all other trades. Under no

circumstances shall the Contract Drawings be scaled.

E. Provide all necessary parts and accessories to build a complete and operable system,

even though such parts and accessories may not be shown or mentioned herein.

F. Obtain accurate water flow test data before completing design of sprinkler / standpipe

system. If necessary, perform a fire flow test at the nearest fire hydrants.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings

1. Product data for all fire protection system components, including but not limited

to the following:

a. Sprinkler Piping

b. Backflow preventors

c. Valves

d. Specialty valves, accessories, and devices

e. Alarm devices, include electrical data

f. Fire department connections, include type of fire department connection;

number, size, type, and arrangement of inlets; size and direction of outlet;

and finish

g. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards, include sprinkler flow characteristics,

mounting, finish, and other data

h. Hangers, clamps, and rods

i. Standpipe system

2. Sprinkler system drawings identified as “working plans”, prepared according to

NFPA 13. Submit required number of sets to authority having jurisdiction for

review, comment, and approval. Include system hydraulic calculations where

applicable. After obtaining approval, submit to the Engineer for review.

3. Licensed engineer’s sprinkler system drawings specified in “Quality Assurance”

Article to authority having jurisdiction.




211313 - 3

4. Hydraulic calculations shall be performed based on the Performance

Requirements for each zone.

5. All shop drawing submittals including plans and hydraulic calculations must be

signed and sealed by a State Licensed Fire Protection Professional Engineer.

B. Test reports and certificates as described in NFPA 13. Include “Contractor’s Material &

Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping” and “Contractor’s Material & Test Certificate

for Underground Piping” (if applicable).

C. Maintenance data for each type of fire protection specialty specified, for inclusion in

“Operating and Maintenance Manual” (refer to other part of the contract for exact

number of copies needed as part of operation and maintenance manual, below are only

recommendations).

1. 3 Copies of NFPA 13A, “Recommended Practice for the Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance of Sprinkler Systems.” Deliver to Owner’s maintenance personnel.

2. 3 Copies of NFPA 14A, “Recommended Practice for the Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance of Standpipe and Hose Systems.” Deliver to Owner’s maintenance

personnel.

3. 3 Copies of NFPA 25, “Standard for Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of

Water Based Fire Protection Systems,” Deliver to Owner’s maintenance

personnel.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications

1. Firms whose equipment, specialties, and accessories are listed by product name

and manufacturer in UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory and FM Approval

Guide and that conform to other requirements indicated.

B. Listing/Approval Stamp, Label, or Other Marking

1. On equipment, specialties, and accessories made to specified standards.

C. Listing and Labeling

1. Equipment, specialties, and accessories that are listed and labeled. The Terms

“Listed” and “Labeled”: as defined in “National Electrical Code”, Article 100.

D. Comply with requirements of authority having jurisdiction for submittals, approvals,

materials, hose threads, installation, inspections, and testing.

E. Comply with requirements of Owner’s insurance underwriter for submittals, approvals,

materials, installation, inspections, and testing (if applicable).




211313 - 4

F. Installer’s Qualifications:

1. Firms qualified to install and alter fire protection piping, equipment, specialties,

and accessories, and repair and service equipment. A qualified firm is one that is

experienced (minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this

Project) in such work, familiar with precautions required, and in compliance with

the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Submit evidence of

qualifications to the Engineer upon request.

2. Installer shall be certified sprinkler contractor with the State of Maryland.


A. Standard Piping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for at least 175 psi.

B. Fire suppression sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having

jurisdiction.

1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 psi minimum or 10%

of the total demand, whichever is greater, including losses through water-service

piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

2. Velocity shall not exceed 20 feet per second.

3. Minimum Density for Automatic Sprinkler Piping Design:

a. Light Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500 sq. ft. area.

b. Ordinary Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500 sq. ft. area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING

A. Pipe and Fittings

1. Above ground up to 175 psi working pressure. Black steel pipe, ASTM A53,

“Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless,” March, 2002. Unless otherwise indicated on the contract

drawings, provide black cast iron screwed fittings, 175 lb. for water, ANSI B16.4,

“Gray Iron Threaded Fittings,” latest edition.

2. All main and branch piping shall be schedule 40 or schedule 10 steel pipe.

Schedule 10 piping shall only be allowed for piping larger than two inches. No

piping less than schedule 10 shall be acceptable.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Shut off valves shall be UL listed and FM approved OS&Y double disc gate valves with

tamper switches.




211313 - 5

B. Check valves shall be swing check type UL listed and FM approved for the application.

C. Fire Department (Siamese) connection shall be Croker Model 6022, or approved equal,

flush type with two-way clapper valves, plugs and chains on each connection. Exposed

parts shall be polished chrome plated. Threads shall match local Fire Department

specifications. Escutcheon shall be lettered “COMBINATION STANDPIPE AND

AUTO SPRINKLER,” as required.

D. Water-flow Indicators: UL 346, electrical-supervision type, vane-type water-flow

detector, rated to 250 psig, and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include 2

SPDT (single-pole, double-throw) circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and

auxiliary contacts, 7 ampere, 125 volts a.c. (7 A, 125 V a.c.) And 0.25 ampere, 24 volts

d.c. (0.25 A, 24 V d.c.); complete with factory-set, field adjustable retard element to

prevent false signals and tamper-proof cover that sends a signal when cover is removed.

E. Pressure Switches: UL 753, water-flow switch with retard, electrical-supervision type,

SPDT (single-pole, double-throw), normally closed contacts, designed to operate on

rising pressure and signal water flow.

F. Supervisory Switches: UL 753, for valves, electrical-supervision type, SPDT (single-

pole, double-throw), normally closed contacts, designed to signal controlled valve in

other than full open position.

G. Supervisory Switches: UL 753, for indicator posts, electrical-supervision type, SPDT

(single-pole, double-throw), normally closed contacts, designed to signal controlled

valve in other than full open position.

H. Pressure Gages: UL 393, 32 to 42 inches diameter dial with dial range of 0-250 psig.

2.3 WATER ALARM BELL

A. An approved outside electric alarm bell with guard shall be UL 753 (Viking Model F-1

or equal product). It shall be located at a sprinkler Siamese and as near as practicable to

the alarm valves. The alarm bell shall be provided with a standard sign stating,

"SPRINKLER FIRE ALARM - CALL FIRE DEPARTMENT" (Viking Model F-1 or

equal product). The bell shall be provided and installed by the sprinkler contractor and

wired/programmed by the fire alarm contractor.

2.4 SPRINKLER HEADS

A. Sprinklers shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure

rating. Sprinklers shall have 250-psig minimum pressure rating if sprinklers are

components of high-pressure piping system.

B. Manufacturers:




211313 - 6

1. Central Sprinkler Corp.

2. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc.

3. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.

4. Grinnell Fire Protection.

5. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

6. Star Sprinkler Inc.

7. Venus Fire Protection, Ltd.

8. Victaulic Co. of America.

9. Viking Corp.

C. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:

1. UL 199, for nonresidential applications.

2. UL 1767, for early-suppression, fast-response applications.

D. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice for "Ordinary" temperature

classification rating, unless otherwise indicated or required by application.

E. Sprinkler types, features, and options as follows:

1. Extended-coverage Sprinklers.

2. Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including cover plate.

3. Sidewall sprinklers.

4. Upright sprinklers.

F. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated, bronze, and painted.

G. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler

mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers

are specified with sprinklers.

1. Ceiling Mounting: Plastic white finish, one piece, flat.

2. Sidewall Mounting: Plastic white finish, one piece, flat.

H. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

I. Dry Type Head: Central Sprinkler, Model A-1 dry type where provided to serve areas

of potential freezing.

2.5 SIGNS

A. 12" x 15" signs suspended from the various valves shall indicate the purpose of the

valve and its normal position (open or closed). Letters shall be 1" minimum in size.

B. Signs shall be fabricated of an approved material, painted red with white lettering.




211313 - 7

2.6 DRAINS

A. The sprinkler systems shall be arranged to be completely drainable. Means of drainage

shall be provided with adequate protection from freezing.

2.7 DETECTOR CHECK VALVES

A. UL 213, galvanized cast-iron body, bolted cover with air bleed device for access to

internal parts, and flanged ends; designed for 175 psig working pressure. Included 1-

piece bronze disc with bronze bushings, pivot, and replaceable seat. Include threaded

bypass taps in the inlet and outlet for bypass meter connection. Set valve to allow

minimal water flow through bypass meter when major water flow is required.

2.8 SLEEVES

A. Cast iron wall pipe sleeves, galvanized steel pipe sleeves, or black steel pipes sleeves

shall be provided with approved sleeve seal and fire stopping.

2.9 STANDPIPE

1. Provide a fire protection combined standpipe system to the extent shown on the

plans and as required by local authorities. System shall be in complete accordance

with NFPA 13 and 14 and shall include OS&Y supervised gate valve, hose valves

and all required accessories to form a complete installation.

2. Combination Automatic Wet-Type Standpipe System class I: Includes NPS 2-1/2

hose connections. Has open water-supply valve with pressure maintained and is

capable of supplying water demand.

3. Delegated Design by contractor: Design fire-suppression standpipes, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using

performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

4. Adjustable-Valve Hose Connections:

a. Standard: UL 668 hose valve, with integral UL 1468 reducing or restricting

pressure-control device, for connecting fire hose.

b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig minimum.

c. Material: Brass or bronze.

d. Size: NPS 2-1/2, as indicated.

e. Inlet: Female pipe threads.

f. Outlet: Male hose threads with lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include hose

valve threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department

threads.

g. Pattern: gate.

h. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.




211313 - 8

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LAYOUT

A. Coordinate layout and installation of fire protection system with all other buildings,

structural, mechanical and electrical work. Locate sprinkler heads symmetrically with

respect to ceiling tiles, lighting fixtures, registers, grilles, diffusers, etc. Installer is

cautioned that sprinkler mains must be located to prevent conflicts with other work and

in any case, sprinkler Installer shall be responsible for coordination of his work with

work of other trades.

B. System shall include, but not be limited to, hydraulic calculations, resizing and

providing all equipment and piping as necessary to meet all requirements of NFPA 13

and all codes and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction over this work.

C. Installer shall be certified sprinkler contractor with the State of Maryland.

D. Installer shall obtain all flow tests required for system calculations and design.

E. Provide cabinet for spare sprinkler heads of all types and special sprinkler wrenches as

required by NFPA.

F. The fire flow test data were given for the contractor’s information only. The contractor

shall perform additional flow tests for use in design calculations. The fire flow test shall

be witnessed and certified by a State Licensed Fire Protection Professional Engineer.

3.2 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

A. Provide a wet pipe sprinkler system as required by local authorities. System

components shall include riser check valve, water gang, siamese connection, shut-off

valves, zone valves, main piping, branch piping, inspector's test, drains, sprinkler heads

and all other incidental appurtenances as required.

B. All areas of the entire building shall be protected by the sprinkler system. Dry type

heads shall be provided where system may be exposed to potential freezing.

C. The sprinkler piping shall be installed concealed above the ceiling and be coordinated

not to interfere with the duct work, air devices, lighting fixtures, HVAC piping,

plumbing piping, and other items.

D. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

E. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.

Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFAP 13.




211313 - 9

F. Raven escutcheons shall be installed tight with no movement or gap to the mounting

surface. All other installation guidelines from the Manufacturer must be followed.

3.3 STANDPIPE

A. Piping and fittings shall be in accordance with NFPA requirements. Gate valves shall be

UL approved and OS&Y double disc gate valves. Check valves shall be swing check

type UL approved. Hose valves shall be angle or straight pattern, as required. Hose

valves shall be Potter-Roemer, or approved equal, cast brass, satin trim, with red enamel

handwheel, hose thread to suit local fire department requirements. Furnish approved 2

1/2" x 1 1/2" hose adapter.

3.4 TESTS

A. The sprinkler systems installation shall be hydrostatically tested, inspected and

approved, in accordance with NFPA 13. Test certificate shall be forwarded to Architect

as proof of compliance.

B. Tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of local authorities and

shall prove the systems to be adequate and satisfactory in every respect. All tests shall

be performed in the presence of the local authorities or his representative. Provide

written notice to the local authorities 5 working days prior to all testing.

C. Any deficiencies revealed by these tests shall be corrected and the systems shall be

retested until acceptable results are obtained.

D. Use the NFPA 13, “Standard Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate for

Aboveground Piping” and/or the “Standard Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate

for Belowground Piping”, which ever is appropriate to this project.

3.5 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. Provide separate as-built drawings and record documents of all fire protection systems

as required by Section “Basic Mechanical Materials & Methods.” The As-Built

drawings and documents must be signed and sealed by a State licensed Fire Protection

Engineer.

B. A copy of the As-Built drawings shall be provided and stored in the sprinkler room in a

weatherproof container secured to the wall.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Provide mechanical identification in accordance with Section “Basic

Mechanical Materials & Methods.”




211313 - 10

B. Provide fire protection signs indicating the served areas on piping in accordance with

NFPA 13 and 14 requirements.

C. Apply 2 coats of red color paint for all of exposed piping and accessories. Provide black

color stencil on piping identifying dry/wet sprinkler.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 13 for installation of fire protection piping and

valve materials. Install piping products where indicated, in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices

to ensure that piping systems comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.


A. Sprinkler Piping Flushing: Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water

feed mains, lead in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire

sprinkler piping installation has been complete and before piping is placed in service,

flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure

as specified in NFPA 13 and 14. Continue flushing until water is clear and check to

ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers.

3.9 DOCUMENTATION

A. The following materials shall be furnished by the contractor at the conclusion of the

final acceptance test:

1. Operating and maintenance instructions of controllers, alarm valves, etc. as

required by NFPA 13.

2. The spare sprinkler heads hereinbefore specified and wrench(s).

3. A copy of NFPA 25, “Water-Based Fire Protection Systems.”

3.10 COMMISSIONING - SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

A. Starting Procedures: Follow manufacturer’s written procedures. If no procedures are

prescribe manufacturer, proceed as follows:

1. Verify that specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories have been

installed correctly operate correctly.

2. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.




211313 - 11

3. Check that damaged sprinklers and sprinklers with paint or coating not specified

have been replaced with new, correct type of sprinklers.

4. Check that sprinklers are correct type, have correct finish and temperature ratings,

and have guards where required for applications.

5. Check that potable water supplies have correct type of backflow preventer.

6. Check that fire department connections have threads compatible with local fire

department equipment and have correct pressure rating.

7. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler systems with water.

8. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. `

9. Adjust operating controls and pressure settings.

B. Coordinate with fire alarm system tests. Operate systems as required.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping



220517 - 1

SECTION 220517

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves.

2. Stack-sleeve fittings.

3. Sleeve-seal systems.

4. Sleeve-seal fittings.

5. Grout.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and

welded steel collar; zinc coated.

B. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40,

zinc coated, with plain ends.

2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by


1. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.

2. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.




220517 - 2

C. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include

clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS


the following:



1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

2. CALPICO, Inc.

3. Metraflex Company (The).

4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

5. Proco Products, Inc.

C. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling

annular space between piping and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.

Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of

length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.4 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS


the following:



1. Presealed Systems.

C. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for

imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with

center opening to match piping OD.




220517 - 3

2.5 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting,

dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and

walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large

enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and

walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs

and walls are constructed.

1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP

sleeves.

2. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment

areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

3. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-

seal system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint

sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with

requirements for sealants specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."




220517 - 4

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,

and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply

with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration

Firestopping."

3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.

1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with

membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in

Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished

floor level.

4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping

ring if ring is specified.

5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.

B. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations.

Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for

firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at

service piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size

and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in

penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space

between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing

elements to expand and make a watertight seal.

3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs

and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.




220517 - 5

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a. Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with mechanical link seals.

b.

2. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves or Galvanized-

steel-pipe sleeves.

b. Piping NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves.

3. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal

system or Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between

piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal

system.



4. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal

system or Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.



b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal

system.



5. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.




220517 - 6

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping



220518 - 1

SECTION 220518

ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.

2. Floor plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew

fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated

finish and spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and with concealed

hinge and setscrew.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.




220518 - 2

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated

piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-

pattern type.

b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type

with polished, chrome-plated finish.

c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-

steel type with concealed hinge.

d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

cast-brass or split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.

f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass or split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.

h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass or split-

casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel

type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.

j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting

brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-

plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and

with OD that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.




220518 - 3


A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping



220519 - 1

SECTION 220519

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers.

2. Filled-system thermometers.

3. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.

4. Light-activated thermometers.

5. Thermowells.

6. Dial-type pressure gages.

7. Gage attachments.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS


the following:



1. Ashcroft Inc.

2. Marsh Bellofram.

3. Miljoco Corporation.

4. Trerice, H. O. Co.

5. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

C. Standard: ASME B40.200.

D. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel with 5-inch nominal diameter.




220519 - 2

E. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in

deg F (deg C).

F. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle, with unified-inch screw threads.

G. Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

H. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch in diameter; stainless steel.

I. Window: Plain glass or plastic.

J. Ring: Stainless steel.

K. Element: Bimetal coil.

L. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

M. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.

2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Compact-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by


2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

product by one of the following:

a. Trerice, H. O. Co.

3. Standard: ASME B40.200.

4. Case: Cast aluminum; 6-inch nominal size.

5. Case Form: Back angle unless otherwise indicated.

6. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue organic liquid.

7. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale

markings graduated in deg F (deg C).

8. Window: Glass or plastic.

9. Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

10. Connector: 3/4 inch (19 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

11. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a

maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range.

B. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:




220519 - 3





a. Flo Fab Inc.

b. Miljoco Corporation.

c. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.

d. Trerice, H. O. Co.

e. Weiss Instruments, Inc.


4. Case: Cast aluminum; 7-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated.

5. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.

6. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue organic liquid.

7. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale

markings graduated in deg F (deg C).


9. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

10. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

11. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a

maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range.

2.3 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:


2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee

fitting.

3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.

4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES CSA.

5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.

6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.

11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.




220519 - 4

2.4 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:





a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.

b. Ashcroft Inc.

c. Ernst Flow Industries.

d. Flo Fab Inc.

e. Marsh Bellofram.

f. Miljoco Corporation.

g. Noshok.

h. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.

i. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.

j. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.

k. Trerice, H. O. Co.

l. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

m. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

n. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.

o. Winters Instruments - U.S.


4. Case: Liquid-filled Sealed type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 6-inch nominal

diameter.

5. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.

6. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe

threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.

7. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.

8. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated

in psi (kPa).

9. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.


11. Ring: Metal.

12. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical

position in piping tees.




220519 - 5

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include

bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted

positions.

F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels;

connect cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing

length.

G. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe

at the most readable position.

H. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel.

I. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

J. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater.

2. Inlet and outlet of domestic hot water thermostatic mixing valves.

K. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Building water service entrance into building.

2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve.

3. Suction and discharge of each domestic circulating water pumps.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install thermometers and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service

and maintenance of thermometers, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of thermometers and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping



220523-1

SECTION 220523

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze angle valves.

2. Bronze ball valves.

3. Bronze lift check valves.

4. Bronze swing check valves.

5. Iron swing check valves.

6. Bronze globe valves.

7. Iron globe valves.

8. Chainwheels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for

system pressures and temperatures.

B. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

C. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and larger.

2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.

3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller except plug valves.

4. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for

every 5 plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head.




220523-2

5. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator;

of size and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation"

Article.

D. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material,

and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor

seal or disturbing insulation.

E. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.

2. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

3. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

F. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves with Bronze Disc:



a. Hammond Valve.

b. Milwaukee Valve Company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.

b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.

c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded.

e. Stem and Disc: Bronze.

f. Packing: Asbestos free.

g. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:



a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.

b. Hammond Valve.




220523-3

c. Milwaukee Valve Company.

d. NIBCO INC.

e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.

b. SWP Rating: 150 psig.

c. CWP Rating: 600 psig.

d. Body Design: Two piece.

e. Body Material: Bronze.

f. Ends: Threaded.

g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.

h. Stem: Bronze.

i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

j. Port: Full.

2.4 BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Lift Check Valves with Bronze Disc:




b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.

c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

2. Description:



c. Body Design: Vertical flow.

d. Body Material: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62, bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Disc: Bronze.

2.5 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:



a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

b. Kitz Corporation.




220523-4


d. NIBCO INC.


2. Description:



c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.

d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Disc: Bronze.

2.6 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:






d. NIBCO INC.


2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I.


c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.

d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.

e. Ends: Flanged.

f. Trim: Bronze.

g. Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.7 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES WITH CLOSURE CONTROL

A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Lever- and Spring-Closure Control:




b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.

c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.




220523-5

d. Hammond Valve.

e. Milwaukee Valve Company.

f. NIBCO INC.

g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:



c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.

d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.

e. Ends: Flanged.

f. Trim: Bronze.

g. Gasket: Asbestos free.

h. Closure Control: Factory-installed, exterior lever and spring.

2.8 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Bronze Disc:






d. NIBCO INC.


2. Description:



c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint.

e. Stem and Disc: Bronze.

f. Packing: Asbestos free.

g. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

2.9 IRON GLOBE VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Globe Valves:






220523-6


b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

c. Hammond Valve.

d. Milwaukee Valve Company.

e. NIBCO INC.

f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:



c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.

d. Ends: Flanged.

e. Trim: Bronze.

f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

B. Class 250, Iron Globe Valves:




b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

c. Hammond Valve.

d. Milwaukee Valve Company.

e. NIBCO INC.

f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:



c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.

d. Ends: Flanged.

e. Trim: Bronze.

f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion.

Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement

during shipping and handling.




220523-7

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully close. Examine guides and seats

made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for

proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material

composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow

service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install chainwheels on operators for valves NPS 4 and larger and more than 96 inches

above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor.

F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Center-Guided and Plate-Type Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position,

between flanges.

3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into

service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking

occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball valves.

2. Throttling Service: Globe or ball valves.

3. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:




220523-8

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc.

b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron swing check valves with

lever and weight, or with spring or iron, center-guided, metal or resilient-

seat check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types

of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint

valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded

valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

3.5 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.

2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.

3. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim.

4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.

5. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of

flanged ends.

2. Iron Ball Valves: Class 150.

3. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 250, metal seats.

4. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control: Class 250, lever and spring or

weight.

5. Iron Globe Valves: Class 250.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment



220529 - 1

SECTION 220529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.

3. Fastener systems.

4. Pipe stands.

5. Equipment supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion

to support bearing surface of piping.

5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-

fabricated components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated

steel.




220529 - 2

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly

made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods,

nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and

building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, [zinc-coated] [stainless-] steel

anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear

capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2.4 PIPE STANDS

A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of

manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.

B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-

shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece [plastic] [stainless-steel] base unit with

plastic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe

support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Base: [Plastic] [Stainless steel].

3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel,

continuous-thread rods.

4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or

stainless-steel, roller-type pipe support.

E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe

supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Bases: One or more; plastic.

3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.

4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.

5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.




220529 - 3

F. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports made from

structural-steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on permanent

stationary roof curb.

2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural

carbon-steel shapes.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink

and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install

hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from

the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89.

Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on

field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size

or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for

individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads

being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and

support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated

piping.




220529 - 4

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs

less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.

Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install

fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and

completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

F. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount

on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.

2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand

and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Section 077200 "Roof

Accessories" for curbs.

G. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and

waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture.

H. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods,

nuts, washers, and other accessories.

I. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

J. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of

piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate

action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

K. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

L. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install

additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers,

NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts

before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through

openings at top of inserts.

M. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and

stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

N. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not

exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services

piping.

O. Insulated Piping:




220529 - 5

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project

through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger

shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building

services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier

is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.

Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping

insulation.

3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to

support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and

equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that

cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.




220529 - 6

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc

welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding

work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and

corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to

achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 2 inches.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas

immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop

painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0

mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and

abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in other sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and

equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment

that will not have field-applied finish.




220529 - 7

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments

are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal framing systems and attachments

for general service applications.

F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant attachments

for hostile environment applications.

G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper

piping and tubing.

H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as

specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated

or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F,

pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension

of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of

insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2

to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow

off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension

of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of

noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For

suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For

suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.

12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction.




220529 - 8

14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36,

with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel

plate.

15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36,

with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel

plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for

pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base

stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30,

from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction

might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to

NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and

contraction might occur.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if

longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but

vertical adjustment is not necessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24

if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur

and vertical adjustment is not necessary.

21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2

to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required

in addition to expansion and contraction.

K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers

NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers

NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy

loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various

types of building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping

installations.




220529 - 9

M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping


1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to

suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-

joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of

beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of

beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if

loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required

tangent to flange edge.

8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of

steel I-beams for heavy loads.

10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of

steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from

above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is

required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to

linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping


1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids

with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by

manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.




220529 - 10

O. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping

movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not

exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll

hanger with springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems.

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping

system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping

system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and

limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping

system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of

stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected

equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-

adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.

c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze

member.

P. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are

not specified in piping system Sections.

Q. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are

not specified in piping system Sections.

R. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction.

S. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply

and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment



220553 - 1

SECTION 220553

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Warning signs and labels.

3. Pipe labels.

4. Stencils.

5. Valve tags.

6. Warning tags.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having

predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not

less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than

24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately

larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-

thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with

substrate.




220553 - 2

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the

Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-

inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing

numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the

Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment

schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical

engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.

C. Background Color: Yellow.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less

than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger

lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-

fourths the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification

instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with

lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover

circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive

backing.




220553 - 3

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations

or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to

accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate

flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

2.4 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimum

letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar

operational instructions.

1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal.

2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel black unless otherwise indicated.

Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.

3. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1


2.5 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system

abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum

thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper.

Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag),

location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or

modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and

similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.6 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of

plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.




220553 - 4

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or

"DO NOT OPERATE."

4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of

identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible

primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured

pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color-coded

bands or rectangles, complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.

2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished

spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and

plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal

units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 35 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 20

feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced

labels.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:




220553 - 5

1. Domestic Water Piping:

a. Background Color: green.

b. Letter Color: White.

2. Sanitary Vent, Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:

a. Background Color: green.

b. Letter Color: black.

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves

within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and

lawn-watering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use

fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color

scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches round.

b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches round.

2. Valve-Tag Color:

a. Cold Water: Green.

b. Hot Water: Natural.

3. Letter Color:

a. Cold Water: White.

b. Hot Water: White.

3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items

where required.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Plumbing Piping Insulation



220719 - 1

SECTION 220719

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic cold-water piping.

2. Domestic hot-water piping. Hot water piping includes hot water re-circulating

pipe system.

3. Roof drains and horizontal storm-water piping.

4. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-

vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied, if any).

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other

work.

1. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for

each type of insulation.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of

insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements

indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.




220719 - 2


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an

apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of

Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by

testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and

adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of

applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-

developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-


C. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for

miscellaneous components:

1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with

appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use

temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in

Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation

application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance

requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for

space required for maintenance.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after

installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that

have satisfactory test results.




220719 - 3

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each

area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping

Insulation Schedule," articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the

manufacturing process.

D. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials.

Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel.

b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.

c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS.

E. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting

resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ.

Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"

Article.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for

bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II,

Class I.

1. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile

Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental

Chambers."




220719 - 4

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.






Chambers."

D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,

Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.






Chambers."

E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.






Chambers."

2.3 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible

with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L

or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere

fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.

3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.

4. Color: White.

2.4 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:




220719 - 5

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.

4. Color: White or gray.

5. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less


6. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California



Chambers."

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following

[provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into

the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B.

Fuller Company; CP-76.


3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.

4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F Color: White.

5. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less


6. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California



Chambers."

2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications.

When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive

covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper

backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.




220719 - 6

2.6 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic

adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.

2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.

3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

4. Elongation: 2 percent.

5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic

adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.


3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch. in width.



6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic

adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Width: 2 inches.

2. Thickness: 6 mils.




2.7 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304; 0.015 inch

thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or

Monel.

C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, galvanized steel.

2.8 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:




220719 - 7

1. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and

cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with

Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.

B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures:

1. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot-

and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA

requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials

that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in

contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even

surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and

specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses

required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service.

Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in

either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.




220719 - 8

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and

specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints

with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate

and wet and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as

insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along

both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-

sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's

written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and

joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its

nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and

cracking due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged

areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal

patches similar to butt joints.

O. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.




220719 - 9

4. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire

Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

B. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for

firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

C. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where

more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation

articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other

specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise

indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made

from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be

butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints,

seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth,

hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation

of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe

insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie

wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of

same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap

adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe

insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to

and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints,

seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.




220719 - 10

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of



insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and

irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket

flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the

insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-

ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe

insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the

thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with

a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather

mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing

mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible

elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers,

valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC

covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union."

Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature

taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated

pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection

with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to

the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of

same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as

adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend

insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness

over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover

in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible

with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges,

except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of

mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its

attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches

over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or

union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly




220719 - 11

with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and

trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed

surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus

twice the thickness of pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet

insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface

being insulated.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended


being insulated.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation

when available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and

sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and

to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of

air to surface being insulated.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:




220719 - 12

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and

tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and

protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps

with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not

staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as

recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier

mastic and flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.




circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket

insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams

at least 1 inch and seal joints with flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation

when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered

sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation.

Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.



when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe

insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation

without disturbing insulation.


3.8 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system

identified below and as specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."




220719 - 13

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket

material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew

proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two

coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual

inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.

3.9 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are

identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed

for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the

following:

1. Underground piping.

2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.10 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold Water:

1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch thick.

b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick.

2. NPS 1-1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.

b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:

1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:


b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

2. NPS 1-1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1-1/2 inch thick.

b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1-1/2 inch thick.




220719 - 14

C. Storm-water & Roof Drain Bodies:

1. Apply insulation to existing and new roof drain and horizontal piping above the

ceiling. Insulation shall be one of the following:


b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch

D. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for

Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities- insulation is not required if the exposed

piping for ADA lavatories is covered by protected board by the general contractor:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:


3.11 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Piping, Concealed & Exposed:

1. None for elastomeric pipe insulation

2. All Service Jacket for fiberglass pipe insulation.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Domestic Water Piping



221116 - 1

SECTION 221116

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings.


A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.


A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then

only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements

indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of

water service.




221116 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube,

fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe

sizes.

B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) water tube, drawn

temper.

B. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

C. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure

fittings.

D. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

E. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123.

2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.

3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.

4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.

2.3 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and

plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

1. Standard-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron.

B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain

spigot end unless flanged ends are indicated.

1. Standard-Pattern, Push-on-Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron.

a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

2. Compact-Pattern, Push-on-Joint Fittings: AWWA C153, ductile iron.




221116 - 3

a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

C. Plain-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151.

1. Grooved-Joint, Ductile-Iron-Pipe Appurtenances:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

by one of the following:

1) Anvil International.

2) Shurjoint Piping Products.

3) Star Pipe Products.

4) Victaulic Company.

b. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Fittings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron

castings or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching

pipe.

c. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron-Pipe Couplings: AWWA C606 for ductile-iron-

pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gaskets

suitable for hot and cold water, and bolts and nuts.

2.4 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.

2.5 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined.

2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.

3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping

system fitting.

2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be

joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:




221116 - 4



a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group.

b. Hart Industries International, Inc.

c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

e. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079.

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of

domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and

calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as

indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

D. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and

plumb.

E. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building

occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel

removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

G. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

H. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or

higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise

indicated.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.




221116 - 5

K. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine,

and specialty.

L. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

M. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for

Plumbing Piping."

N. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings

before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs

and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded

or damaged.

D. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of

tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube

Handbook."

3.3 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

3.4 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or unions.

C. Dielectric fittings for NPS 2 ½” and larger: Use dielectric flange connections.




221116 - 6


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in

Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44,

pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8

inch.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and

minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and

maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to

join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and

connect to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated,

but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than that required by plumbing code.




221116 - 7

3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than

equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection.

Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and

installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been

inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day

before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence

of authorities having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before

concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to

ensure compliance with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not

pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for

reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities


2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are

not air bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that

have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in

segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of

portion of piping tested.




221116 - 8

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered

and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that

was covered or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating

pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials.

Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in

test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion

thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and

inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.

3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.

4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate

flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return

piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping

during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.

7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified

for application where used and are clean and ready for use.

8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and

operation.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using.




221116 - 9

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having

jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either

AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not

appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least

50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24

hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least

200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming

from system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work

progresses.

3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may

be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on

aboveground copper tubing.

D. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building service piping, NPS 3 and smaller, shall

be one of the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and

brazed joints.

E. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 4 and larger, shall

be one of the following:

1. Mechanical-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard-pattern mechanical-joint fittings;

and mechanical joints.

2. Push-on-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard-pattern push-on-joint fittings; and

gasketed joints.




221116 - 10

F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); wrought

copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.

G. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and

brazed joints.

H. Aboveground fire-service-main piping up to double check backflow preventer assembly

shall be the following:

1. Plain-end, ductile-iron pipe; grooved-joint, ductile-iron-pipe appurtenances; and

grooved joints.

3.12 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated,

the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use ball, or cast

iron valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use ball

or globe valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from

equipment.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Domestic Water Piping Specialties



221119 - 1

SECTION 221119

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.

2. Water-hammer arresters.

3. Trap-seal primer valves.



B. Shop Drawings: For domestic water piping specialties.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61 and NSF 14. Mark

"NSF-pw" on plastic piping components.




221119 - 2


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless


2.3 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices (anti-scald design and construction):

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available



a. Armstrong International, Inc.

b. Legend Valve.

c. Leonard Valve Company.

d. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

e. Symmons Industries, Inc.


3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

4. Type: Thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve.

5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.

6. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet.

7. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable,

temperature-control handle.

8. Valve Finish: Rough bronze.

B. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves:


product indicated on Drawings or product by one of the following:

a. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.

b. Leonard Valve Company.

c. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled, water tempering valve.

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

4. Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.

5. Temperature Control: Adjustable.

6. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded.

7. Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze.

8. Tempered-Water Setting: 109 deg F.

9. Tempered-Water Design Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm.




221119 - 3

2.4 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water-Hammer Arresters:




a. Josam Company.

b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.

c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

d. Watts Drainage Products.

e. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage

Products.

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.

3. Type: Metal bellows.

4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through

F.

2.5 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE

A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device:




a. MIFAB, Inc.

b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.

d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

e. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator

Company.


3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.

4. Body: Bronze.

5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.

6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.

7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is

not chrome finished.




221119 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install temperature-actuated, water mixing valves with shutoff valves on inlets and

outlet.

B. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201. In each

classroom restroom, provide water hammer arresters at the end of each domestic cold

and hot water piping per PDI-WH 201. In each gang bathroom, provide water hammer

arrester at the end of cold water pipe serving the water closets and urinals.

C. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward

drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.

Adjust valve for proper flow. Trap-seal primer valve to be installed at the cold water

inlet of lavatory nearest floor drain.

D. Provide access door at trap primer valves and water hammer arrestors where concealed.

3.2 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment

nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:

1. Thermostatic, water mixing-valve.

2. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.


A. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests

and inspections.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing

valves.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Domestic Water Pumps



221123 - 1

SECTION 221123

DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than

50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include materials of construction,

rated capacities, certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves,

operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water pumps to include in operation and

maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.


A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.




221123 - 2

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED, IN-LINE, CLOSE-COUPLED CENTRIFUGAL

PUMPS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide basis-of-design or

comparable products by one of the following:

1. Armsrtong Pumps, Inc.

2. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand.

3. TACO Incorporated.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, single-stage, close-coupled,

overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps designed for installation with pump and motor

shaft mounted horizontal.

C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Radially split with threaded companion-flange connections for pumps

with NPS 2 (DN 50) pipe connections and flanged connections for pumps with

NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) pipe connections.

2. Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft.

3. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft with deflector, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.

Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal.

4. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic

seat, and rubber bellows and gasket.

5. Bearings: Oil-lubricated; bronze-journal or ball type.

6. Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft

misalignment.

D. Motor: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings; and resiliently or rigidly

mounted to pump casing.

E. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. As scheduled on the plans.




221123 - 3

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 220513 "Common Motor

Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven

load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2.3 CONTROLS

A. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump.

1. Type: Water-immersion temperature sensor, for installation in piping.

2. Range: 65 to 200 deg F (18 to 93 deg C).

3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X.

4. Operation of Pump: On or off.

5. Transformer: Provide if required.

6. Power Requirement: 120 V, ac.

7. Settings: Start pump at 105 deg F (41 deg C).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of

connections before pump installation.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Install horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps with shaft

horizontal.

C. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers of size required to support

pump weight.

1. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 220529

"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

D. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.

E. Install time-delay relays in piping between water heaters and hot-water storage tanks.




221123 - 4

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water

Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to

or greater than size of pump nozzles.

D. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and

throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected

piping. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Section 220523 and comply

with requirements for strainers specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping

Specialties."

1. Install pressure gage and snubber at suction of each pump and pressure gage and

snubber at discharge of each pump. Install at integral pressure-gage tappings

where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and discharge

piping around pumps. Comply with requirements for pressure gages and snubbers

specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

E. Connect thermostats to pumps that they control.

F. Interlock pump between water heater and hot-water storage tank with water heater

burner and time-delay relay.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide laminated engraved label attached to the pump body. Minimum letter size shall

be ½” white on black background.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

2. Check piping connections for tightness.

3. Clean strainers on suction piping.

4. Set thermostats for automatic starting and stopping operation of pumps.

5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.




221123 - 5

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot

liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags,

do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for

operation.

7. Start motor.

8. Open discharge valve slowly.

9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust domestic water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by

manufacturer.

B. Adjust initial temperature set points.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping



221316 - 1

SECTION 221316

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Specialty pipe fittings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube,

fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe

sizes.

2.2 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra Heavy class (es).

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

2.3 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. Sovent Stack Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast-iron aerator and

deaerator drainage fittings.

C. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:




221316 - 2



a. ANACO-Husky.

b. Fernco Inc.

c. Matco-Norca, Inc.

d. MIFAB, Inc.

e. Tyler Pipe.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.

3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and

tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe

stop.

D. Heavy-Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings:



a. ANACO-Husky.

b. Clamp-All Corp.

c. MIFAB, Inc.

d. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

e. Tyler Pipe.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540.

3. Description: Stainless-steel shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening

devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

E. Cast-Iron, Hubless-Piping Couplings:



a. MG Piping Products Company.

2. Standard: ASTM C 1277.

3. Description: Two-piece ASTM A 48/A 48M, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel

bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

2.4 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent

patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.




221316 - 3

C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated


2. Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the

California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of

Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale

Environmental Chambers."

D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated


2. Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the

California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of

Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale

Environmental Chambers."

2.5 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences

in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and

compatible with pipes to be joined.

2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified

piping system fitting.

3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:



1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.

2) Fernco Inc.

3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1173.

c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern.

Include shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening

mechanism on each end.

d. Sleeve Materials:

1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.

2) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, or other material compatible

with pipe materials being joined.




221316 - 4

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with

separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections

compatible with pipes to be joined.

2. Dielectric Unions:



1) Capitol Manufacturing Company.

2) Hart Industries International, Inc.

3) McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

4) Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

5) Wilkins; a Zurn company.

b. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079.

2) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

3. Dielectric Flanges:



1) Capitol Manufacturing Company.

2) Central Plastics Company.

3) Matco-Norca, Inc.

4) Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

5) Wilkins; a Zurn company.

b. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079.

2) Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

3) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

4) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous;

threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.




221316 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION



piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and

calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install

piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment

rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas

at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless

specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel

removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate

branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may

be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical.

Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back

to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may

be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use

proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected.

Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

K. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true

to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends

of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written

instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

L. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless

otherwise indicated:




221316 - 6

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping

NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and

larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

M. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

N. Install steel piping according to applicable plumbing code.

O. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to

building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with

requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping

Specialties."

2. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements

for drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

P. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by

authorities having jurisdiction.

Q. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for

Plumbing Piping."

R. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for

Plumbing Piping."

S. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing

Piping."

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast

Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

B. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil

Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs

and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:




221316 - 7

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry

seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded

or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and

thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt

threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern.

3.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and

tubing.

2. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

3. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.

4. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation

specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and

Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive

environments.

2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive

environments.

3. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

4. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

5. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44,

pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.




221316 - 8

6. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and

coupling.

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum

rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing

and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.

4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod.

5. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is

limited to 60 inches.

G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and

minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod.

4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

5. NPS 3: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod.

7. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 12 feet with 3/4-inch rod.

I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.

J. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's

written instructions.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition

fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:




221316 - 9

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes

indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but

not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with

cover flush with floor.

5. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if

indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for

connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance

of equipment.

E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final

connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at

final connection to each piece of equipment.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and

Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities


1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or

inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction.




221316 - 10

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having

jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have

been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit

separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage

and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was

covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except

outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system

and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water

(30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection,

water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and

traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and

watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they

leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg.

Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure.

Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout

period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water

leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof,

until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.


A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and

debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.9 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings and sovent stack fittings; heavy-duty

hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints.




221316 - 11

3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

C. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty hubless-piping couplings; and

coupled joints.

D. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be the following:

1. PVC Sch 40 pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

E. Forced sanitary drainage piping: Use copper type L piping and solder joints.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties



221319 - 1

SECTION 221319

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cleanouts.

2. Floor drains.

3. Roof flashing assemblies.

4. Through-penetration firestop assemblies.

5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

6. Flashing materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts :

1. ASME A112.36.2M, Cast-Iron Cleanouts:


by the following:

1) Josam Company.

2) MIFAB, Inc.

3) Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.

4) Tyler Pipe.

5) Watts Drainage Products.

6) Zurn Plumbing Products Group.




221319 - 2

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.

3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping

4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match

connected piping.

5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:

a. Josam Company; Josam Div.

b. MIFAB, Inc.

c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.

d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

e. Watts Drainage Products.

f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.

2. Pattern: Area, Floor, Funnel floor, and Sanitary drain.

3. Body Material: Gray iron.

4. Seepage Flange: Required.

5. Anchor Flange: Required.

6. Clamping Device: Required.

7. Outlet: Bottom.

2.3 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES

A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:



a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div.

b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.

2. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 6.0-lb/sq. ft. , 0.0938-inch- thick,

lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches from pipe, with

galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.

a. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.

b. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.

c. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.




221319 - 3

2.4 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:



a. ProSet Systems Inc.

2. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug.

3. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.

4. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral

nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with

neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include

PVC protective cap for plug.

6. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Open Drains:

1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-

spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section;

and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping with increaser fitting of size indicated.

B. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-

seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.

C. Air-Gap Fittings:

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap

between installed inlet and outlet piping.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.

3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.

4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.

5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated

indirect waste piping.

D. Sleeve Flashing Device:




221319 - 4

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device that forms

sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel

pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 1 inch above finished floor and

galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor

slab.

2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.

E. Stack Flashing Fittings:

1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for

terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

F. Vent Caps:

1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design.

Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

G. Expansion Joints: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland.

1. End Connections: Matching connected piping.

2. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.

2.6 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum

weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:

1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft. 0.0469-inch thickness.

3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness.

B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and

thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:

1. General Applications: 12 oz. /sq. ft.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz. /sq. ft.

C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and

0.04-inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip

galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil

minimum thickness.

E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.




221319 - 5

F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar

accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being

installed.

G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the

following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping

unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet

for larger piping.

4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush

with finished floor.

C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types

indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

D. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains

flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor

drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area

radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than

1/4-inch total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.

c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater

than 1-inch total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain

and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where

penetrated.




221319 - 6

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless


E. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend

through roof.

F. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

G. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor

penetrations.

H. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch above floor.

I. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains.

J. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains and provide ½” water

piping from trap-seal primer valves to floor drains. Contractor is responsible to provide

in-line type trap seal primer valve at the ½” domestic cold water pipe serving lavatory

nearest from the floor drain.

K. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste

piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.

L. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with

waterproof membrane.

M. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.

N. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for

easy access and maintenance.

O. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless

trap is indicated.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for

piping installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,

fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.




221319 - 7

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes

are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or

thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch (thickness or

thinner.

2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in

floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10

inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around

sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8

inches around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially

made flashing fittings, according to Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure

flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.

G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and

retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or

debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.




221319 - 8

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters



223300 - 1

SECTION 223300

ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Flow-control, electric, tankless, domestic-water heaters.

2. Domestic-water heater accessories.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated. Include rated

capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties

and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of tankless, electric, domestic-water heater, from

manufacturer.

B. Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric, domestic-water heaters to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.




223300 - 2




application.

B. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact

with potable water to comply with NSF 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System

Components - Health Effects."

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair

or replace components of electric, domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.

b. Faulty operation of controls.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Electric, Tankless, Domestic-Water Heaters: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRIC, TANKLESS, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

A. Flow-Control, Electric, Tankless, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1. Manufactured by of the following;

a. A.O. Smith Corporation

b. Rheem Manufacturing Company.

c. Lochinvar, LLC.

2. Standard: UL 499 for electric, tankless, (domestic-water heater) heating

appliance.

3. Construction: Copper piping or tubing complying with NSF 61 Annex G barrier

materials for potable water, without storage capacity.

a. Connections: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.




223300 - 3

c. Heating Element: Resistance heating system.

d. Temperature Control: Flow-control fitting.

e. Safety Control: High-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.

f. Jacket: Aluminum or steel with enameled finish or plastic.

4. Support: Bracket for wall mounting.

5. Capacity and Characteristics, refer to the drawing.

2.2 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Heat-Trap Fittings: ASHRAE 90.2.

B. Domestic-Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel

bracket for wall mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Electric, Tankless, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install electric, tankless,

domestic-water heaters on wall bracket under the sink.

1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported

equipment.

5. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.

B. Install electric, domestic-water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings,

original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended

clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters

and on domestic-hot-water outlet piping.

C. Fill electric, domestic-water heaters with water.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water

Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.




223300 - 4

B. Where installing piping adjacent to electric, domestic-water heaters, allow space for

service and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-

water heaters.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in

Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain tankless, electric,

domestic-water heaters.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Commercial Plumbing Fixtures



224213 - 1

SECTION 224213

COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related

components:

1. Faucets for lavatories, and sinks.

2. Flushometers.

3. Toilet seats.

4. Fixture supports.

5. Water closets.

6. Lavatories.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for floor drains, and

specialty fixtures not included in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture.

Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, , and

traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated.

B. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-,

impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and

trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate

materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.




224213 - 2

C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each

category through one source from a single manufacturer.

1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a

single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified

for that category.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy

Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health

Effects", for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

D. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are

compatible.

E. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for

plumbing fixtures:

1. Stainless-Steel Commercial, Handwash Sinks: NSF 2 construction.

2. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.

3. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.

F. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for

lavatory and sink faucets:

1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet:

ASME A112.18.3M.

2. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.

3. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.

4. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.

5. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.

6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.

7. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.

8. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for

miscellaneous fittings:

1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.

2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.

3. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.

4. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.




224213 - 3

H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for

miscellaneous components:

1. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.

2. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3.

3. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.

4. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.

5. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.

6. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.

7. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace components of plumbing fixtures that fail in materials or workmanship

within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures of unit shell.

b. Faulty operation.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

use.

2. Warranty Period: two year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LAVATORY FAUCETS (refer to the drawing P-001)

2.2 SINK FAUCETS (refer to the drawing P-001)

2.3 FLUSHOMETERS (refer to the drawing P-001)

2.4 TOILET SEATS (refer to the drawing P-001)

2.5 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:






224213 - 4

a. Engineered Brass Co.

b. Insul-Tect Products Co.; a Subsidiary of MVG Molded Products.

c. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc.

d. Plumberex Specialty Products Inc.

e. TRUEBRO, Inc.

f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products

Operation.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and

cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with

Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.

2.6 FIXTURE SUPPORTS


the following:

1. Josam Company.

2. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc.


4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

5. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc.

6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

B. Lavatory Supports:

1. Description: Type II, lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod for wall-

mounting, lavatory-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.

2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.




224213 - 5

2.7 WATER CLOSETS (refer to the drawing)

2.8 LAVATORIES (refer to the drawing)

2.9 KITCHEN SINKS (refer to the drawing)

2.10 HAND SINK (refer to the drawing)

2.11 SERVICE SINKS (refer to the drawing)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to

verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.

B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will

be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to

manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or

building substrate.

C. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

D. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

E. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

F. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to

water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces

behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for

operation.




224213 - 6

G. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly

connected to sanitary drainage system.

H. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to

drainage system.

I. Install toilet seats on water closets.

J. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if

faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

K. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at

stop valves.

L. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet

spouts.

M. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.

N. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and

within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal

protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division Section 220518.

O. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-

part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants

are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and

vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.


A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations

where installed.

B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other

specified components.




224213 - 7

C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and

components.

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace

malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units

operate properly.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,

fittings, and controls.

B. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning

methods and materials. Do the following:

1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall

strainers and spouts.

2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings,

inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in

writing by Owner.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Pressure Water Coolers



224716 - 1

SECTION 224716

PRESSURE WATER COOLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes pressure water coolers and related components.


A. Product Data: For each type of pressure water cooler.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and

furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Maintenance Data: For pressure water coolers to include in maintenance manuals.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Water Coolers:


water cooler, as indicated on drawing or product by one of the following:




224716 - 2

a. Elkay Manufacturing Co.

b. Halsey Taylor.

c. Haws Corporation.

d. Larco, Inc.

e. Oasis Corporation.

f. Sunroc Corp.

2. Description: Accessible, wall-mounting water cooler as shown on architectural

drawings.

a. Cabinet: Bilevel with two attached cabinets, vinyl-covered steel with

stainless-steel top.

b. Bubbler: One, with adjustable stream regulator, located on each cabinet

deck.

c. Control: Push bar.

d. Supply: NPS 3/8 with ball, gate, or globe valve.

e. Filter: One or more water filters complying with NSF 42 and NSF 53 for

cyst and lead reduction to below EPA standards; with capacity sized for unit

peak flow rate.

f. Drain(s): Grid with NPS 1-1/4 minimum horizontal waste and trap

complying with ASME A112.18.1.

g. Cooling System: Electric, with hermetically sealed compressor, cooling

coil, air-cooled condensing unit, corrosion-resistant tubing, refrigerant,

corrosion-resistant-metal storage tank, and adjustable thermostat.

1) Capacity: 8 gph of 50 deg F cooled water from 80 deg F inlet water

and 90 deg F ambient air temperature.

2) Electrical Characteristics: 1/3 hp; 120-V ac; single phase; 60 Hz.

2.2 FIXTURE SUPPORTS


the following:

1. Josam Co.

2. MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc.


4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

5. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc.

6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

B. Description: ASME A112.6.1M, water cooler carriers. Include vertical, steel uprights

with feet and tie rods and bearing plates with mounting studs matching fixture to be

supported.

1. Type I: Hanger-type carrier with two vertical uprights.




224716 - 3

2. Supports for Accessible Fixtures: Include rectangular, vertical, steel uprights

instead of steel pipe uprights.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to

verify actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. Refer to

architectural drawing for the mounting height.

B. Install off-the-floor carrier supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted

fixtures.

C. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected

to domestic-water distribution piping. Use ball valve. Install valves in locations where

they can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Section 220523

"General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

D. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary

drainage system.

E. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished

locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding fittings.

Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."

F. Seal joints between fixtures and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant,

silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant

requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and

vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.




224716 - 4

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water

Piping."

C. Install ball valve on water supply to each fixture. Install valve upstream from filter for

water cooler. Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 220523 "General-

Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

D. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary

Waste and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

B. Adjust pressure water-cooler temperature settings.

3.5 CLEANING

A. After installing fixture, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and

debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures.

D. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by

Owner.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Common Motor Requirements For Hvac Equipment



230513 - 1

SECTION 230513

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power

systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped

separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible

with the following:

1. Motor controllers.

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet

(1000 m) above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate

connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with

indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering

service factor.




230513 - 2

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.

2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust

loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

I. Insulation: Class F.

J. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for

motor frame sizes smaller than 324T

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring

connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in

motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and

features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish,

designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise

pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.




230513 - 3

4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally

protected motors.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and

requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Split phase.

3. Capacitor start, inductor run.

4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial

and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to

motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating

of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor

temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Vibration Controls for HVAC



230548 - 1

SECTION 230548

VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Open-spring isolators.

2. Pipe-riser resilient supports.

3. Resilient pipe guides.

4. Spring hangers.

5. Vibration isolation equipment bases.



1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration

isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for

each type and size of vibration isolation device type required.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of equipment bases. Detail fabrication including

anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include

adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor

bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation device.

1. Include design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and for designing

vibration isolation bases.




230548 - 2


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation for

HVAC piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity,

including other supports and restraints, if any.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Welding certificates.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators:



a. Isolation Technology, Inc.

b. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

c. Mason Industries, Inc.

d. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

e. Vibration Isolation.

f. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of

the spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

6. Baseplates: Factory-drilled steel plate for bolting to structure with an elastomeric

isolator pad attached to the underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500

psig (3447 kPa).

7. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap

screw to fasten and level equipment.




230548 - 3

2.2 PIPE-RISER RESILIENT SUPPORT

A. Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two steel tubes

separated by a minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene.

1. Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent

vertical travel in both directions.

2. Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psig (3.45 MPa)on isolation material providing

equal isolation in all directions.

2.3 RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES

A. Description: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement

separated by a minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene.

1. Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and

reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of

motion to meet location requirements.

2.4 SPRING HANGERS

A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in

Compression:



a. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

b. Mason Industries, Inc.

c. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

d. Vibration Isolation.

e. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a

maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or

reducing isolation efficiency.

3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of

the spring at rated load.

4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

7. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-

reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.




230548 - 4

8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and

support spring coil.

2.5 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES


the following:

1. Kinetics Noise Control.

2. Mason Industries, Inc.

3. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

4. Vibration Isolation.

5. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Concrete Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready

for placement of cast-in-place concrete.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch

(25-mm) clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary

motor slide bases or rails.

a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with

ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported

equipment.

3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation

mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and

anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates

from supported equipment manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation control devices for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting


B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual

locations before installation.





230548 - 5

3.2 VIBRATION CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment

attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and

formwork.

B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment,

piping, or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.

3.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment

attachment and mounting points.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment



230553 - 1

SECTION 230553

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Warning signs and labels.

3. Pipe labels.

4. Valve tags.

5. Warning tags.



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each

identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the

proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting

of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.




230553 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and

having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.


less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is

less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72

inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing

distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of

principal lettering.



substrate.

B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical

engraving, 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment

hardware.

2. Letter Color: Black.

3. Background Color: White.

4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71

deg C).


less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).

6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is

less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72

inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing

distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of

principal lettering.



substrate.

C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the

Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-

inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing

numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the




230553 - 3

Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment

schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical

engraving, 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment

hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.

C. Background Color: Red

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less

than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less

than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830

mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include

secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification

instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with

lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover or

cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive

backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations

or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.




230553 - 4

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to

accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate

flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.

2.4 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum

letter height of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch

(19 mm) for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational

instructions.

1. Stencil Material: Aluminum.

2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel or acrylic enamel black unless

otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.

3. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel or acrylic enamel in colors according

to ASME A13.1 unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system

abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having

predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper.

Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag),

location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or

modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and

similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.6 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of

plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches (75 by 133 mm) minimum.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or

"DO NOT OPERATE."

4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.




230553 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of

identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible

primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured

pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color-coded

bands or rectangles, complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.

2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished

spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and

plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal

units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of

concealed piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals

to 25 feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced

labels.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Condensate drain Piping:

a. Background Color: White

b. Letter Color: Black




230553 - 6

2. Variable Refrigerant Piping:

a. Pretensioned Pipe Labels or Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves

within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and; and

HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and

units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items

where required.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC



230593 - 1

SECTION 230593

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

2. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Equipment:

a. Concealed fan coil unit

b. Motors.

c. Condensing units.

d. Pumps.

e. Exhaust fans

f. Energy recovery ventilators.

3. Duct leakage tests.

4. Control system verification.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. BAS: Building automation systems.

C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.




230593 - 2

F. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.

G. TDH: Total dynamic head.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. TAB Conference: If requested by the Owner, conduct a TAB conference at Project site

after approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual

understanding of the details. Provide a minimum of 14 days' advance notice of

scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Minimum Agenda Items:

a. The Contract Documents examination report.

b. The TAB plan.

c. Needs for coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.

d. Proposed procedures for documentation and communication flow.


A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit

documentation that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the

qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,

submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

C. System Readiness Checklists: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit

system readiness checklists as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. Examination Report: Submit a summary report of the examination review required in

"Examination" Article.

E. Certified TAB reports.

F. Sample report forms.

G. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make.

2. Serial number.

3. Application.

4. Dates of use.

5. Dates of calibration.




230593 - 3


A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB.

1. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC, NEBB

or TABB as a TAB technician.

B. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements

in ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation."

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air

Balancing."

D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."


A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire

TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with

Owner's operations.

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before

Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize

conflicts with Owner's operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TAB SPECIALISTS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, engage one of the following available TAB

specialists that may be engaged include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. AABC

2. NEBB

3. TABB.




230593 - 4

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to

discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and

equipment.

B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks,

thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual

volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for

intended purpose and are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design

assumptions for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of

philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine ceiling plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are

properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are

sealed and fire-stopped if required.

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system

effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced

capacities in all or part of a system.

G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,

cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and

tight, filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens have been replaced by permanent screens

with indicated perforations.

K. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of throttling,

diverting, or mixing fluid flows.

L. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight

fins.

M. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

N. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.




230593 - 5

O. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures.

Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points

if different from indicated values.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following:

1. Equipment and systems to be tested.

2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems.

3. Instrumentation to be used.

4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment.

B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system

readiness for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following:

1. Airside:

a. Verify that leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been

satisfactorily completed.

b. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed.

c. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional.

d. Clean filters are installed.

e. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction.

f. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified.

g. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

h. Ceilings are installed.

i. Windows and doors are installed.

j. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures

contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance", NEBB's

"Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental

Systems" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the

minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and

thickness as used to construct ducts.

2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply

with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."




230593 - 6

3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore

insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct

Insulation," Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," and Section 230719

"HVAC Piping Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve

position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with

paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and

recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet

volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow

measurements.

D. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and

exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

H. Check for airflow blockages.

I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

K. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed

listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.




230593 - 7

a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that

simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions.

b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If

necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow.

c. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse

measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable.

d. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure

airflow at terminals and calculate the total airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows:

a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible

connection.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible

connection.

c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-

handling system.

d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.

3. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures

versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend

adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.

4. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than

indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling

units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-

handling-unit performance.

5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult

equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and

measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure

amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode

to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to

indicated airflows.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow.

3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.

C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows.

1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow.

3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow.

4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted.

D. Verify final system conditions.




230593 - 8

1. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are

within design. Readjust to design if necessary.

2. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design.

3. Re-measure all final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile.

4. Mark all final settings.

5. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary.

6. Measure and record all operating data.

7. Record final fan-performance data.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following

data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.

4. Phase and hertz.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter size and thermal-protection-element rating.

8. Service factor and frame size.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test manual bypass of controller to

prove proper operation.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans.

B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

C. Record fan and motor operating data.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil:

1. Nameplate data.

2. Airflow.

3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load.

4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load.

5. Calculated kilowatt at full load.

6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.




230593 - 9

B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

3. Airflow.

3.10 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS

A. Witness the duct pressure testing performed by Installer.

B. Verify that proper test methods are used and that leakage rates are within specified

tolerances.

C. Report deficiencies observed.

3.11 CONTROLS VERIFICATION

A. In conjunction with system balancing, perform the following:

1. Verify temperature control system is operating within the design limitations.

2. Confirm that the sequences of operation are in compliance with Contract

Documents.

3. Verify that controllers are calibrated and function as intended.

4. Verify that controller set points are as indicated.

5. Verify the operation of lockout or interlock systems.

6. Verify the operation of valve and damper actuators.

7. Verify that controlled devices are properly installed and connected to correct

controller.

8. Verify that controlled devices travel freely and are in position indicated by

controller: open, closed, or modulating.

9. Verify location and installation of sensors to ensure that they sense only intended

temperature, humidity, or pressure.

B. Reporting: Include a summary of verifications performed, remaining deficiencies, and

variations from indicated conditions.

3.12 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10

percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.




230593 - 10

B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances

specified above.

3.13 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate

sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed

by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.

2. Fan curves.

3. Manufacturers' test data.

4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop

Drawings and Product Data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of the TAB specialist.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Architect's name and address.

6. Engineer's name and address.

7. Contractor's name and address.

8. Report date.

9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the

report. Number each page in the report.

11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.

14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated

values.




230593 - 11

15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.

c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.

d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.

e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch

diameter.

f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.

g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.

h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air distribution systems. Present each

system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

3. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.

4. Terminal units.

5. Balancing stations.

6. Position of balancing devices.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the

following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and unit size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Unit arrangement and class.

g. Discharge arrangement.

h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.

i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches

(mm).

j. Number, make, and size of belts.

k. Number, type, and size of filters.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.




230593 - 12

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches

(mm).

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).

f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).

g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).

h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).

i. Outdoor airflow in cfm (L/s).

j. Return airflow in cfm (L/s).

k. Outdoor-air damper position.

l. Return-air damper position.

m. Vortex damper position.

F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Coil type.

d. Number of rows.

e. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm) o.c.

f. Make and model number.

g. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m).

h. Tube size in NPS (DN).

i. Tube and fin materials.

j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Average face velocity in fpm (m/s).

c. Air pressure drop in inches wg (Pa).

d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).

e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).

f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).

g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).

h. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.

i. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig (kPa).

j. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F (deg C).




230593 - 13

G. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Arrangement and class.

g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.

h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches

(mm).

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches

(mm).

g. Number, make, and size of belts.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

H. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a

grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number.

b. Location and zone.

c. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C).

d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

e. Duct size in inches (mm).

f. Duct area in sq. ft. (sq. m).

g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

h. Indicated velocity in fpm (m/s).

i. Actual airflow rate in cfm (L/s).




230593 - 14

j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s).

k. Barometric pressure in psig (Pa).

I. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.

b. Location and zone.

c. Apparatus used for test.

d. Area served.

e. Make.

f. Number from system diagram.

g. Type and model number.

h. Size.

i. Effective area in sq. ft. (sq. m).


a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Air velocity in fpm (m/s).

c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm (L/s).

d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm (m/s).

e. Final airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

f. Final velocity in fpm (m/s).

g. Space temperature in deg F (deg C).

J. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.

c. Application.

d. Dates of use.

e. Dates of calibration.

3.14 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT

A. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the

final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as

"FAILED."

B. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total

measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be

considered incomplete and shall be rejected.




230593 - 15

C. If TAB work fails, proceed as follows:

1. TAB specialists shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the

final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final

report and request a second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of

another TAB specialist to complete TAB work according to the Contract

Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB specialist's

final payment.

3. If the second verification also fails, Owner may contact AABC Headquarters

regarding the AABC National Performance Guaranty.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.15 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced

conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak

summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and

winter conditions.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications HVAC Piping and Duct Insulation



230719 - 1

SECTION 230719

HVAC PIPING AND DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes mechanical insulation for duct and pipe, including the following:

1. Insulation Materials:

a. Flexible elastomeric.

b. Mineral fiber.

2. Fire-rated insulation systems.

3. Insulating cements.

4. Adhesives.

5. Mastics.

6. Lagging adhesives.

7. Sealants.

8. Factory-applied jackets.

9. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh.

10. Field-applied jackets.

11. Tapes.

12. Securements.

13. Corner angles.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ASJ: All-service jacket.

B. FSK: Foil, scrim, kraft paper.

C. FSP: Foil, scrim, polyethylene.




230719 - 2

D. PVDC: Polyvinylidene chloride.

E. SSL: Self-sealing lap.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, identify thermal conductivity, thickness,

and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Shop Drawings: Show details for the following:

1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of

insulation and hanger.

2. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.

3. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation.

4. Removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access

panels.

5. Application of field-applied jackets.

6. Application at linkages of control devices.

C. Installer Certificates: Signed by Contractor certifying that installers comply with

requirements.

D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation

materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include

dates of tests and test methods employed.

E. Field quality-control inspection reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an

apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of

Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-

response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per

ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, and

cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting

agency.




230719 - 3

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-


2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-



A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with

appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in

Section "Hangers and Supports."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application,

and duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork

Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation

and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may

begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each

area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply

to product selection:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products

specified.


one of the manufacturers specified.




230719 - 4

2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall be

applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the

manufacturing process.

D. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with

ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

1. Products:

a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.

b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.

c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.

E. Calcium Silicate:

1. Curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous

calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with

ASTM C 533, Type I.

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting

resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied

jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.

b. Johns Manville; Microlite.

c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.

e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.

G. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications,

provide insulation without factory-applied jacket. For equipment applications, provide

insulation without factory-applied jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are

specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.

b. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.




230719 - 5

c. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.

e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.

H. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a

thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type III, without factory-applied jacket.

1. Products:

a. Johns Manville; 1000 Series Spin-Glas.

b. Owens Corning; High Temperature Industrial Board Insulations.

c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta Board.

d. Roxul Inc.; Roxul RW.

e. Thermafiber; Thermafiber Industrial Felt.

I. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Products:

a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.

b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.

c. Knauf Insulation; 1000(Pipe Insulation.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.

e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a

thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, without

factory-applied jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2

"Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

3. Type II, 1200 deg F (649 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a

thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A, without

factory-applied jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2

"Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

J. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a

thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with

ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to

ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity

(k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket

requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap.

b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex.

c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex.




230719 - 6

e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.

2.3 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS

A. Fire-Rated Board: Structural-grade, press-molded, xonolite calcium silicate, fireproofing

board suitable for operating temperatures up to 1700 deg F.Comply with ASTM C 656,

Type II, Grade 6. UL tested and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating.

1. Products:

a. Johns Manville; Super Firetemp M.

B. Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is

UL tested and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating.

1. Products:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; FlameChek.

b. Johns Manville; Firetemp Wrap.

c. Thermal Ceramics; FireMaster Duct Wrap.

d. 3M; Fire Barrier Wrap Products.

e. Unifrax Corporation; FyreWrap.

2.4 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

1. Products:

a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I.

b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik.

B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.

1. Products:

a. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Thermal-V-Kote.

C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with

ASTM C 449/C 449M.

1. Products:

a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote.

b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote.




230719 - 7

c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.

2.5 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for

bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II,

Class I.

1. Products:

a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.

b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.

c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.

d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. Products:

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.

b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.

c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.

d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.

e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C,

Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

1. Products:



c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.



2.6 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply

with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient

services.




230719 - 8

1. Products:



c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50.



f. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry

film thickness.


4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.

5. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient

services.

1. Products:



c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15.



f. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film

thickness.


4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.

5. Color: White.

2.7 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with

insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. Products:



c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130.

d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30.

e. Vimasco Corporation; 136.




230719 - 9

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 82

deg C).

3. Color: White.

2.8 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:


2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.


4. Color: White or gray.

B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Products:

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8.


c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.

d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.

e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.




5. Color: Aluminum.

C. ASJ Flashing Sealants:

1. Products:





5. Color: White.

2.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.




230719 - 10

1. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

2. Color: White.

3. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field

fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves,

flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints,

and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

4. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.

C. Metal Jacket:

1. Products:

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems.

b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit.

c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.

2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003,

3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H-14.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.

b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

c. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded

polyethylene and kraft paper.

d. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.

2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius

elbows.

3) Tee covers.

4) Flange and union covers.

5) End caps.

6) Beveled collars.

7) Valve covers.

8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers

are not available.

2.10 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic

adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.

1. Products:




230719 - 11

a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.

b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.

c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.

d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.





7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic

adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.

1. Products:


b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111.

c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK.

d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.


4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch.in width.



7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive and UL listed.

1. Products:


b. Compac Corp.; 120.

c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF.

d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.

2. Width: 2 inches.

3. Thickness: 3.7 mils .

4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch.in width.






230719 - 12

2.11 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Products:

a. Childers Products; Bands.

b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.

c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.

2. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005;

Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal.

3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted

to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed

for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth

of insulation indicated.

a. Products:

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.

2) GEMCO; CD.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD.

4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin,

fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length

to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-

steel washer.

a. Products:

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.

2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head.

4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.

3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate

welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness

indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place.

Comply with the following requirements:

a. Products:




230719 - 13

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T.

2) GEMCO; Perforated Base.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.

b. Base plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2

inches square.

c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-

inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with

demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates

indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

4. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-

thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold

insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

a. Products:

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.

2) GEMCO; R-150.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.

4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel

insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or

Monel.

D. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy.

1. Manufacturers:

a. ACS Industries, Inc.

b. C & F Wire.

c. Childers Products.

d. PABCO Metals Corporation.

e. RPR Products, Inc.

2.12 CORNER ANGLES

A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to

ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.




230719 - 14

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and

other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of

defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that

will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply

a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32

and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for

appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature

range.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water.

3.3 COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even

surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping

including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thickness

required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in

insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet

or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.




230719 - 15

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at

hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on

anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to

structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier

mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal

insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended

by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install

shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger,

support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and

wet and dry film thickness.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as

insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along

both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-

sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material

manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and

joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.




230719 - 16

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its

nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and

cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches

similar to butt joints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:


2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall

surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor

insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor

insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall

flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire

Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

C. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation

at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate

damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Section "Through-

Penetration Firestop Systems."

D. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:




230719 - 17

1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire

rated. For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire

damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match

adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2

inches (50 mm).

2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.

3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies according to Section "Through-

Penetration Firestop Systems."

3.5 DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation

pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per

unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and

transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,

capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides

of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along

longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation

end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches

o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install

additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

3.6 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.


unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.

2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment,

including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints.

Stagger end joints.

3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.

4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers

on sides of tanks and vessels as follows:

a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.




230719 - 18

b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service

temperature and with substrate.

c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from

insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions.

d. Do not over compress insulation during installation.

e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of

tanks and vessels.

f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.

g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel

with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape

matching insulation facing.

5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select

band material compatible with insulation materials.

6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical

and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for

securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of

vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one

circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches from each end.

Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a

wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and

stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest

circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of

equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for

securing insulation with tie wire or bands.

7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches.

8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,

handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and

inspection.

9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and

nameplates.

10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open

ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.

B. Insulation Installation on Pumps:

1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide

box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted

flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch (150-mm) centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-

inch- (10-mm-) diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box

sections together using a latching mechanism.

2. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel/aluminum, at least 0.060 inch (1.6 mm)

thick.




230719 - 19

C. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Expansion Tanks, Air separators,

and Chemical Shot Feeder Vessels: Install insulation over entire surface of tanks and

vessels.

1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.

3.7 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more

specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other

specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise

indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made

from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be

butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints,

seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth,

hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation

of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe

insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie

wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of



insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to

and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints,

seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of



insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and

irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket

flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the

insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below

ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe

insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the

thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.




230719 - 20

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with

a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather

mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing

mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word

"UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature

taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes,

vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around

the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and

flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the

following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of

same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as

adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend

insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness

over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover

in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible

with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except

divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of

mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its

attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches

over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or

union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly

with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and

trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.8 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturers recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.






230719 - 21


circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet

insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended


being insulated.


1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended


being insulated.


1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation

when available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and

sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and

to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.


4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of

air to surface being insulated.

3.9 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and

tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and

protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps

with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not

staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended

by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and

flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.




230719 - 22




circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket

insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams

at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.



when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered

sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation.

Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.



when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe

insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation

without disturbing insulation.


E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation

pins.




transitions.







b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches



c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and

plenums.





230719 - 23

e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.

f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel



4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a

continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams

and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of

insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch

outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory-

or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints,

seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain

vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at

18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied

in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and

over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width

equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap un-faced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end

joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation

section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows

with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation

surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on

alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

F. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation

pins.




transitions.










230719 - 24

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches



c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and

plenums.


e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel



4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a

continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams

and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of

insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch

outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory-

or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints,

seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain

vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at

18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied

in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and

over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width

equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation

section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible

to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval

duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation

surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on

alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.10 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and

end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with

weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with

stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.




230719 - 25

3.11 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers

and supports to maintain a continuous UL-listed fire rating.

B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.

C. Install fire stopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are

specified in Section "Through-Penetration Fire stop Systems."

3.12 FINISHES

A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket

Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in painting

Sections.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket

material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew

proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats

of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual

inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied

jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of

inspection shall be limited to one location for each duct system defined in the

"Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

2. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing

field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation.

Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location for each type of equipment

defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment,

remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.

3. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by

removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their




230719 - 26

installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight

pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two

locations of threaded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three

locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation

Schedule, General" Article.

B. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work.

C. Install new insulation and jackets to replace insulation and jackets removed for inspection.

Repeat inspection procedures after new materials are installed.

3.14 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Duct and plenum insulation shall be in accordance with 2012 International Energy

Conservation Code.

B. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply air.

2. Indoor, exposed supply air.

3. Indoor, concealed return air.

4. Indoor, exposed return air.

5. Indoor, concealed outdoor air.

6. Indoor, exposed outdoor air.

7. Indoor, concealed conditioned outdoor supply and return air (DOAS and ERV

systems).

8. Indoor, exposed conditioned outdoor supply and return air (DOAS and ERV

systems).

C. Items Not Insulated:

1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.

3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.

4. Flexible connectors.


6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

7. Restrooms/Mechanical rooms exhaust air ducts.

8. Relief air duct for ERV system.

9. Fabric ducts.

10. Expansion Joints for engine exhaust piping system.




230719 - 27

3.15 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed, rectangular, round and flat-oval, supply, return and outdoor-air supply and

return duct insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick, minimum R-6 and 0.75-lb/cu. ft.

(12-kg/cu. m) nominal density.

B. Concealed outdoor-air plenum insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick, minimum R-6, nominal density.

C. Exposed, rectangular, round and flat-oval, supply, return and outdoor-air supply and return

duct insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Board with ASJ: 2 inches thick, minimum R-6 and 1-lb/cu. ft.

nominal density.

D. Exposed outdoor-air plenum insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Board with ASJ: 2 inches thick, minimum R-6 and 1-lb/cu. ft.

nominal density.

3.16 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulation materials and thickness are identified below. If more than one material is listed

for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.

3.17 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thickness are identified for

each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping

system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Fire-suppression piping.

2. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.

3. Below-grade piping.

4. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.18 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Indoor piping insulation shall be in accordance with 2012 International Energy

Conservation Code.




230719 - 28

B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping:



C. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing:



D. Condensate and equipment drain piping:



b. Mineral fiber type I: 3/4 inch thick with ASJ.

3.19 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install

the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed:

1. None.

D. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed:

1. All Service Jacket for Fiberglass insulation.

E. Equipment, Concealed:

1. None.

3.20 OUTDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Outdoor piping insulation shall be in accordance with 2012 International Energy

Conservation Code.


1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick




230719 - 29

2. Jacketing: Provide appropriate jacketing on all elastomeric piping to prevent

bird-pecking.

3.21 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install

the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.


1. Aluminum, corrugated, with Z-Shaped Locking Seam: 0.024 inch thick.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC



230923-1

SECTION 230923

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PROJECT INCLUDES

A. Electric temperature control systems (DIRECT DIGITAL CONTOL-DDC) used for

building HVAC systems.

B. Control System Operation: sequence of operation, zones, highlights for set points,

BACnet compatible control system, and design temperature.

1.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. Sequence of Operations is described on drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device.

Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics,

finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product

indicated.

1. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device,

manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of

sequence of operation including schematic diagram.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each

field connection.

1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model

number.

2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, coils, dampers, and control devices.

3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling.

5. Written description of sequence of operation.

C. Qualification Data:

1. Systems Provider Qualification Data:

a. Resume of project manager assigned to Project.




230923-2

b. Resumes of application engineering staff, installing, programming tchnicians

assigned to Project.

c. Brief description of past project including physical address, floor area,

number of floors, building system cooling and heating capacity and building's

primary function.

d. Description of similar past Projects, indicating similarities and complexities.

Include project Architect/Engineer contact information such as name, phone

number, and e-mail address.

2. Manufacturer's qualification data.

3. Testing agency's qualifications data.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to

include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items

specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device.

2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components

and devices.

3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator

function.

4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and

calibration tolerances.

5. Calibration records.


A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized

representative who is trained and approved for installation of system components required

for this Project.

1. The controls contractor shall have minimum 5 years experience working on similar

type of projects.

2. The controls contractor shall submit names of at least 5 projects on their resume,

and at least two projects with variable refrigerant flow type air conditioning

systems, involving multiple indoor units on single refrigerant loops.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of the control systems and controls

components shall:

1. Be a nationally recognized manufacturer of the products to be used onthis project.

2. Have systems with similar requirements to those indicated operating for a

continuous period of five (5) years at the time of bid.

3. Have complete published catalog literature, installation, operation and maintenance

manuals for all products intended for use.




230923-3

4. Have full-time in-house employees for the following:

a. Product and application engineering.

b. Product manufacturing, testing and quality control.

c. Technical support for DDC system installation training, commissioning and

troubleshooting of installations.

d. Owner operator training.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,

and marked for intended use.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. All control components and devices, and parts supplied by the control contractor shall be

guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for two years from acceptance

date. Labor to repair, reprogram, or replace components shall be furnished by the control

contractor at no charge during the warranty period. All corrective control modifications

made during warranty periods shall be updated on all user documentation and on user and

manufacturer archived software disks. The Contractor shall respond to the Owners

request for warranty service within 24 hours during normal business hours.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with plans and

room details before installation.

B. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section "Panelboards" to achieve compatibility

with starter coils and annunciation devices.

C. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section "Enclosed Switches” and “Enclosed

Controllers" to achieve compatibility with motor starters and annunciation devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Electric Control System Components:

A. Dampers: Automatic control dampers, frames, and damper and valve motors.

B. Thermostats: Room thermostats, remote-bulb thermostats.

C. Sensors: Electronic temperature and relative humidity sensors.

D. Controllers: Central Controller and local simple controllers.

E. Local DDC control panel with built-in touch screen LCD user interface display.




230923-4

2.2 VRF Control System:

A. The Controls Network shall consist of remote controllers, centralized controllers, and

web based interface accessed through a personal computer: desktop type or laptop type.

B. The Control Network shall be be compliant with BACnet® Protocol (ANSI/ASHRAE

135-2004) and shall support operation, monitoring, scheduling, occupancy, error email

distribution, via personal web browser and online maintenance support.

C. Provide control panel enclosure with built-in LCD touch screen for user interface, one

for VRF cooling and heating systems and the other for all other HVAC systems

throughout the building.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that power supply is available to control units.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Connect and configure equipment to achieve sequence of operation specified.

B. Verify location of thermostats with Drawings and room details before installation. Install

devices 48 inches above floor for adjustable set-point room thermostats.

C. Install guards on thermostats and room sensors in the following locations, whether

indicated or not:

1. Entrances.

2. Public areas.

D. Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories".

E. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to

outdoor temperatures.

F. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15

Section "Mechanical Identification".

G. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifying air

ducts.

H. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when

switch is in hand position.




230923-5

3.3 ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL WIRING SYSTEM

A. Electrical Work required for system interlock and installation of temperature control

system shall be provided by Automatic Temperature Control Contractor (ATC) in

accordance with Division 26, Electrical and all National and Local Codes.

B. All wiring shall be run in EMT conduit, and installed concealed. Wiring run outdoors,

where subject to physical damage or where exposed in equipment rooms, shall be run in

conduit.

C. Electrical controls shall be fed from separate circuit or circuits in distribution panels and

shall not be taken from receptacles or lighting circuits. Circuit or circuits within

distribution panels shall be so marked. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2-inch.

D. Temperature Control Contractor shall coordinate all electrical Work associated with his

installation with Electrical Contractor. All wiring for automatic temperature controls,

including interlock wiring, starter control wiring, and control wiring for flow switches,

pilot lights, thermostats, damper motors, etc., shall be the responsibility of ATC

Contractor and installed in conformance with requirements of Division 26. Power wiring,

transformers, etc., for automatic temperature control shall be the responsibility of ATC

Contractor.

E. All Control wiring (line voltage or low voltage), required to complete temperature control

system, including field mounting and wiring of control devices specified elsewhere in

Mechanical Specifications to be supplied as field installed devices by equipment

manufacturer, shall be installed by Temperature Control Contractor in accordance with

General Electrical specification and current National Electrical Code.

F. Refer to Division 26 for electrical voltage characteristics.



1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to

confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and

retest.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

3. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating

control set points are as required.

4. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with

sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions.

5. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.

B. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing

procedures.




230923-6

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Calibrating and Adjusting:

1. Calibrate instruments.

2. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written

recommendations and instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at

least double that of instrument being calibrated.

3. Stroke and adjust control dampers without positioners, following the

manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that damper is 100 percent open and

closed.

4. Stroke and adjust control dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's

recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent

closed.

5. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system.

6. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type

of instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup

procedures.

B. Adjust initial temperature set points.

3.5 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTATION

A. The following items shall be provided for Owner’s use:

1. Three hard copies of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

2. Manual shall include revised as-built documents and approved materials required

under the paragraph 1.3 "SUBMITTALS".

3. Electronic copy of As-Built Documentation and O&M Manuals on a CD.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Refrigerant Piping



232300 - 1

SECTION 232300

REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.


A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig.

2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig.

3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated.

Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:

1. Thermostatic expansion valves.

2. Filter dryers.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to

include in maintenance manuals.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."

C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."




232300 - 2

1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping

interior and exterior are clean when installed.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

These items are specified in Division 077200 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K or L (ASTM B 88M, Type A or B)/ASTM B 280,

Type ACR.

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.

2.2 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Service Valves:

1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.

2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring.

3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

4. End Connections: Copper spring.

5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.

B. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell.

2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.

3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina/charcoal.

4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).

5. End Connections: Socket.

6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure

differential measurement.

7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.

8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.




232300 - 3

9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

2.3 REFRIGERANTS

A. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Aboveground, within Building: Type ACR drawn-copper tubing or Type L (Type B)

drawn-copper tubing.

3.2 SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install permanent filter-dryers in liquid lines.


A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

B. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows,

and fittings.

C. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or

between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings,

sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation.

D. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will

be exposed to mechanical injury.

E. Provide pipe supporting curb for all piping penetrating roofs.

F. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away

from compressor.

2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.

3. Liquid lines may be installed level.

G. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and

Supports."

H. Install the following pipe attachments:




232300 - 4

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet

long.

2. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

I. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum

rod sizes:

1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

4. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

5. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

6. NPS 2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

J. Support vertical runs at each floor.

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter

"Pipe and Tube."

1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with

copper pipe.

2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

B. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to

prevent scale formation.


A. Test and inspect refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.

1. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,

evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure.

2. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system at not less than the lower

of the design pressure or the setting of pressure relief device protecting high and

low side of system.

a. System shall maintain test pressure at manifold gage throughout duration of

test.

b. Test joints and fittings by brushing small amount of soap and glycerine

solution over joint.

c. Fill system with nitrogen to raise a test pressure of 150 psig or higher as

required by authorities having jurisdiction.

d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory

results are achieved.




232300 - 5

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat

requirements.

B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to

fluctuating suction pressure.

C. Adjust set-point temperature of the conditioned air controllers to the system design

temperature.

3.7 CLEANING

A. This Article is required if tubing other than Type ACR is allowed.

B. Before installing copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with

trichloroethylene.

3.8 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to a vacuum of 500

micrometers. If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.

2. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.

3. Charge system with new filter-dryer in charging line. Provide full-operating

charge.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Metal Ducts



233113-1

SECTION 233113

METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.

3. Sheet metal materials.

4. Duct liner.

5. Sealants and gaskets.

6. Hangers and supports.


1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing,

adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-

mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.


A. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of

gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible".

B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

C. Duct pressure and air leakage tests: Provide air tight sealing in accordance with

SMACNA seal as indicated and perform air leakage test for all of supply air duct.




233113-2


A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives.

2. Sealants and gaskets.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,

components, and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.

3. Reinforcement and spacing.

4. Seam and joint construction.

5. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.

6. Dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels.

7. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and

vibration isolation.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class


B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular

Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,

materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular

Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,




233113-3



D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select

types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure

class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and

other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible."

2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible

Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

a. Lindab Inc.

b. McGill AirFlow LLC.

c. SEMCO Incorporated.

d. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct

Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials

involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse Outdoor supply and return air ducts exposed to ambient air

temperature: Flanged.

2. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct

Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,



1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded

longitudinal seams.

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and




233113-4

Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing

requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct

construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of

pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as

indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface

finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule"

Article.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less;

3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

E. Aluminum Sheets (used for shower exhaust duct): Comply with ASTM B 209

(ASTM B 209M) Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and

standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.

2.4 DUCT LINER

A. Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Preformed, cellular, closed-cell, sheet materials

complying with ASTM C 534, Type II, Grade 1; and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.


comparable product by one of the following:

a. Aeroflex USA Inc.

b. Armacell LLC.

c. Rubatex International, LLC

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and

maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723;

certified by an NRTL.

3. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying

with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.




233113-5

a. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or

less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

b. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the

California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the

Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-

Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin,

fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch diameter shank, length

to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-

steel washer.

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch

thick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation

securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

C. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent

adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with

multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive

metal nosing.

3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.

4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure

butted-edge overlapping.

5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners

of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal

joints necessary.

6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500

fpm.

7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not

exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at

intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings

that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall.

Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:

a. Fan discharges.

b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.

c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher

than 2500 fpm or where indicated.




233113-6

9. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers,

turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat

sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct

walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.

2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants

and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-

developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).

7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare),

stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.

C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.

2. Type: S.

3. Grade: NS.

4. Class: 25.

5. Use: O.

6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California



Chambers."

D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene

plasticizer.

E. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and

shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.




233113-7

3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated

couplings and fitting spigots.

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and

Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;

compatible with duct materials.

D. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION


duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to

size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other

design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are

approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and

for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and

perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and

permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.




233113-8

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions, install fire dampers. Comply

with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke

dampers.

K. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign

materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under

Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

3.2 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct

Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible."

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible."

1. Outdoor Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.

2. Outdoor Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.

3. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.

4. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.

5. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.

6. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel

fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely

cured.

2. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes

or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and

Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing;

install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of

each branch intersection.




233113-9

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with

welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum

intervals of 16 feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out,

tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials

where used.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with

Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"

for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not

have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-

steel primer.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test

report for each test.

2. Test the following systems:

a. Entire supply air ducts upstream of VAV terminal units for RTU-1 & -3

(Second Floor Units).

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage

testing and for compliance with test requirements.

4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.

5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or

section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at

maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum

design operating pressure.

6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.




233113-10

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.

2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness

according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and

Restoration of HVAC Systems."

a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter

media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct systems before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class

if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined

duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer.

Comply with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.

3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with

99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed

from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and

other points of entry into building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums, scrolls, blades

or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

3. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

4. Supply-air ducts and turning vanes.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract

contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.




233113-11

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning.

Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned

are under negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces

without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean elastomeric duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct

liner to get wet. Replace elastomeric duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or

delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan

operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning

materials; comb and straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.

7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if

fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written

instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.

F. Cleanliness Verification:

1. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants.

2. Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and re-inspect ducts.


A. Gravimetric Analysis: Sections of metal-duct system, chosen randomly by

Owner/Architect, should be tested for cleanliness according to NADCA Vacuum test

gravimetric analysis.

1. If analysis determines that levels of debris are equal to or lower than suitable

levels, system shall have passed cleanliness verification.

2. If analysis determines that levels of debris exceed suitable levels, system

cleanliness verification will have failed and metal-duct system shall be recleaned

and reverified.

B. Report results of tests in writing.

3.9 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and

Balancing for HVAC."

3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Supply Ducts:

1. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg.




233113-12

2. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.

3. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 3.

4. Transverse Joints: Flange with gasket and elastomeric liner.

B. Outdoor air duct:

1. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg.

2. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.

3. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 3.

4. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 3.

C. Exhaust Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:

a. Pressure Class: Negative 1-inch wg.

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A if negative pressure, and A if positive

pressure.

c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6.

D. Liner:

1. Provide duct liner as indicated on the drawings. Apply 2 inches or more thick

flexible elastomeric liner to meet 2012 International Energy Conservation Code of

R-8.

3.11 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or

galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum

Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with

ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel,

and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping

device.




233113-13

G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;

compatible with duct materials.

H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.

3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc

chromate.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Air Duct Accessories



233300 - 1

SECTION 233300

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.

2. Manual volume dampers.

3. Control dampers.

4. Fire dampers.

5. Constant Airflow Regulators

6. Flange connectors.

7. Turning vanes.

8. Duct-mounted access doors.

9. Flexible connectors.

10. Flexible ducts.

11. Duct accessory hardware.


A. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and

attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.

Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field

assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Special fittings.

b. Manual volume damper installations.

c. Control-damper installations.

d. Fire-damper and duct-mounted access doors.




233300 - 2


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-

mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are

shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items

involved.

B. Source quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and





1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems,"

and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning

Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"

for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless

otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller

marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.

2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

B. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less;

3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.




233300 - 3

2.3 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS

A. Description: Gravity balanced.

B. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm (10 m/s).

C. Maximum System Pressure: 1-inch wg (0.25 kPa).

D. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel/0.063-inch-

(1.6-mm-) thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners or mechanically attached and

mounting flange.

E. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, maximum 6-inch (150-mm) width, 0.050-inch-

(1.2-mm-) thick aluminum sheet, noncombustible, tear-resistant, neoprene-coated

fiberglass with sealed edges.

F. Blade Action: Parallel.

G. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl, mechanically locked/Neoprene, mechanically locked.

H. Blade Axles:

1. Material: Plated steel/Aluminum.

2. Diameter: 0.20 inch (5 mm).

I. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum/Galvanized steel.

J. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

K. Bearings: synthetic pivot bushings.

L. Accessories:

1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.

2.4 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.

b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.

c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

d. Nailor Industries Inc.




233300 - 4

e. Ruskin Company.

2. Standard leakage rating.

3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

4. Frames:

a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel.

b. Mitered and welded corners.

c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.

b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.

c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.

d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

7. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze.

b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles

full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

B. Jackshaft:

1. Size: 0.5-inch diameter.

2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted

on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.

3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper

in multiple-damper assembly.

C. Damper Hardware:

1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch thick zinc-plated

steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.

2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.

3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.5 CONTROL DAMPERS


the following:

1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.




233300 - 5

2. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

3. Nailor Industries Inc.

4. Ruskin Company.

B. Frames:

1. Hat shaped.

2. 0.094-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel.

3. Mitered and welded corners.

C. Blades:

1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 6 inches.

2. Parallel- and opposed-blade design.

3. Galvanized-steel.

4. 0.064 inch thick single skin.

5. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene.

6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.

D. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch- diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-

plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.

1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

E. Bearings:

1. Oil-impregnated bronze.

2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full

length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2.6 FIRE DAMPERS


the following:

1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.



4. Ruskin Company.

B. Type: Static and dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.

C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm

velocity.

D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours.




233300 - 6

E. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-

inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.05 thick, as indicated, and of length to suit application.

2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of

perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper

frame must comply with sleeve requirements.

G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.024-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of

interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade

connectors.

I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

J. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 212 deg F rated, fusible links.

2.7 CONSTANT AIRFLOW REGULATORS


the following:

1. American Aldes CAR-II or approved equal.

B. Description: Constant airflow regulator to automatically regulate airflows in supply air

duct systems.

C. Material: ABS Polymer, UL2043

D. Size: Match connecting ductwork. Airflow rates to be matched with the outdoor airflow

rates shown on the AHU schedules or indicated on the drawings.

2.8 FLANGE CONNECTORS


the following:

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.

3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Description: Add-on, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets,

and components.




233300 - 7

C. Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.9 TURNING VANES


the following:


2. METALAIRE, Inc.

3. SEMCO Incorporated.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel;

support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct

mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with

perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards

- Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support

in Elbows."

D. Vane Construction: Single/double wall.

E. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 20 inches wide and double wall for

larger dimensions.

2.10 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS


the following:

1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.



4. McGill AirFlow LLC.



B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2 (7-2M), "Duct

Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

1. Door:




233300 - 8

a. Double wall, rectangular.

b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for

duct pressure class.

c. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.

d. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.

3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.

b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.

2.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


the following:


2. Duro Dyne Inc.

3. Elgen Manufacturing.

4. Ventfabrics, Inc.


B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide

attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch, 0.028-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-

inch thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.

2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.

3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

2.12 FLEXIBLE DUCTS


the following:

1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

2. McGill AirFlow LLC.





233300 - 9

B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically

wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.

2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.

4. Insulation R-value: Min R-6.

C. Flexible Duct Connectors:

1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with

a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.

2.13 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including

screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments

and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to

gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116,

"Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel

accessories in galvanized-steel.

C. Install control dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to

exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches

extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install

dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat

channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.

E. Install airflow regulators at the inlet of each AHU indicated on the drawings per the

manufacturer’s installation instructions with the proper air flow directions.




233300 - 10

F. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

G. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

H. Install fire dampers according to UL listing.

I. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and

maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. At discharge air duct of VAV terminal reheat coils.

2. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers,

and equipment.

3. Adjacent to and close enough to fire dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.

Access doors for access to fire dampers having fusible links shall be pressure

relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed

upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed

downstream from dampers.

4. Upstream and downstream from turning vanes.

5. Control devices requiring inspection.

6. Elsewhere as indicated.

J. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

K. Access Door Sizes:

1. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.

2. Head and Shoulders Access- for larger supply air ducts within the vertical shafts:

21 by 14 inches. Provide fire rated access doors at the shaft wall opening and

access doors at the ducts.

L. Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and

Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

M. Flexible duct shall be supported from the building structure with 1” wide sheet metal

strap with sheet metal saddle that covers one-half the circumstance of the outside

diameter of flexible duct.

N. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to roof top units, exhaust fans, fan powered

VAV terminal units, etc.

O. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

P. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment.

Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch

movement during start and stop of fans.




233300 - 11


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed.

3. Operate fire dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-

response device is installed.

4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications HVAC Power Ventilators



233423 - 1

SECTION 233423

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Ceiling-mounting ventilators.

2. In-line centrifugal fans.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.

3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.

4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.

5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

6. Fan speed controllers.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other

work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each

field connection.




233423 - 2



A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on

which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from

Installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

3. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,

sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.




application.

B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall

bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use

for restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.




233423 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CEILING-MOUNTING VENTILATORS


the following:

1. Carnes Company HVAC.

2. Cook, Loren Company.

3. Dayton Electric Manufacturing Co.

4. Greenheck Fan Corp.

5. Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc.

B. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall or for concealed

in-line applications.

C. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.

D. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor,

and fan wheel shall be removable for service.

E. Grille: For ceiling mounted fans. Plastic, louvered grille with flange on intake and

thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.

F. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and

receptacle for motor plug-in.

G. Accessories:

1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent

to less than 50 percent.

2. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.

3. Manufacturer's standard wall brick louver, and transition fittings.

2.2 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS

A. Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet

flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.

B. Direct-Drive Units: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch

located on outside of fan housing, with wheel, inlet cone, and motor on swing-out

service door.

C. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves,

enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings

extended to outside of fan housing.




233423 - 4

D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.

E. Accessories:

1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less

than 50 percent.

2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.

3. Fan Guards: 1/2- by 1-inch (13- by 25-mm) mesh of galvanized steel in

removable frame. Provide guard for inlet or outlet for units not connected to

ductwork.

4. Motor and Drive Cover (Belt Guard): Epoxy-coated steel.

5. MERV 13, 1” thick pleated air filter section as indicated.

F. Capacities and Characteristics: Refer to schedules on drawings.

2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor

Requirements for HVAC Equipment."



B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.


A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating

Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to

AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with

the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed

of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory

Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the

AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.




233423 - 5

B. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers.

C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical

Identification."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23

Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make

final duct connections with flexible connectors.

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment.

D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those

specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Equipment Startup Checks:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-

overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and

verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive

system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

6. Disable automatic temperature-control operators.

B. Starting Procedures:

1. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm.

2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with

new units, and retest.




233423 - 6

D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls

and equipment.

E. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.

F. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing Adjusting and Balancing" for testing, adjusting,

and balancing procedures.

G. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

H. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or

replacements are made.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Lubricate bearings.

3.5 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel and

cabinet.

B. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect

exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged

finishes.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain power

ventilators.

1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting

and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and

schedules.

2. Review data in maintenance manuals.

3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days'

advance notice.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Air Devices



233713 - 1

SECTION 233713

AIR DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and

performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise

ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room

location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the

following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from

installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,

sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

5. Duct access panels.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied

color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's

standard sizes to verify color selected.




233713 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements

apply to product selection:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements.


one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 GRILLES AND REGISTERS

A. Adjustable Bar Register:

1. Products:

a. Carnes.

b. Krueger.

c. METALAIRE, Inc., Metal Industries Inc.

d. Titus.

e. Price.

f. Tuttle & Bailey.

2. Material: Steel.

3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.

4. Face Blade Arrangement: Adjustable vertical spaced 3/4 inch apart.

5. Rear Blade Arrangement: Adjustable horizontal spaced 3/4 inch apart.

6. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide.

7. Mounting Frame: surface mounted.

8. Mounting: Countersunk screw.

9. Damper Type: adjustable opposed-blade assembly.

B. Fixed Face Grille :

1. Products:

a. Krueger.

b. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc.

c. Titus.

d. Price.

e. Tuttle & Bailey.

2. Material: Steel.


4. Face Arrangement: 38 deg, fixed deflection, horizontal blades.





233713 - 3

6. Mounting Frame: Surface mounted.


C. Eggcrate Face Grille :

1. Products:

a. A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc.

b. Anemostat, a Mestek Company.

c. Carnes.

d. Krueger.

e. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc.

f. Titus.

g. Price.

h. Tuttle & Bailey.

2. Material: Aluminum.


4. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch grid core.




D. Perforated Face Grille :

1. Products:

a. Krueger.

b. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc.

c. Titus.

d. Price.

e. Tuttle & Bailey.

2. Material: Aluminum.


4. Face Arrangement: Perforated core.




2.3 CEILING DIFFUSER OUTLETS

A. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers :




233713 - 4

1. Products:

a. Krueger.

b. METALAIRE, Inc., Metal Industries Inc.

c. Titus.

d. Price.

e. Tuttle & Bailey.

2. Material: Steel.


4. Face Size: As indicated on drawings.

5. Face Style: Three cone.

6. Mounting: Surface.

7. Pattern: Adjustable.

8. Dampers: Radial opposed blade.


A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to

ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance

with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance

of equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts,

fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve

design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure

drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed

in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features

or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final

location.




233713 - 5

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow

service and maintenance of dampers, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as

directed, before starting air balancing.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Equipment



237200 - 1

SECTION 237200

AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Packaged energy recovery units.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment. Include plans, elevations,

sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each

field connection.



A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, and other details, drawn to scale, on which

the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from

Installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members to which equipment or suspension systems will be attached.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment to include

in maintenance manuals.




237200 - 2




1. Filters: One set(s) of each type of filter specified.

2. Fan Belts: One set(s) of belts for each belt-driven fan in energy recovery units.




application.

B. ARI Compliance:

1. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with

ARI 1060, "Performance Rating of Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy

Recovery Ventilation Equipment."

C. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment"

and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

2. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with

ASHRAE 84, "Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers."

D. UL Compliance:

1. Packaged heat recovery ventilators shall comply with requirements in UL 1812,

"Ducted Heat Recovery Ventilators".

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of air-to-air energy recovery equipment and

suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by

them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition

assemblies.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of equipment supports with actual equipment provided.




237200 - 3

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair

or replace components of air-to-air energy recovery equipment that fails in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Packaged Energy Recovery Units: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PACKAGED ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS

A. Manufacturers

Subject to compliance with the project requirements, products comparable to Basis-of-

Design equipment from one of the following manufacturers shall be acceptable:

1. Des Champs Technologies

2. Engineered Air

3. Greenheck

4. Venmar CES Inc.

B. Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

C. Housing: Manufacturer's standard construction with corrosion-protection coating and

exterior finish, hinged access doors or removable panels with neoprene gaskets for

inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick thermal

insulation, knockouts for electrical connections, exterior drain connection, and lifting

lugs.

D. Supply and Exhaust Fans: Centrifugal fan with spring isolators or spring hangers with

vertical-limit stops and flexible duct connections.

1. Motor and Drive: Direct driven.

2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure

type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513

"Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."



4. Spring isolators on each fan having 1-inch (25-mm) static deflection.

E. Disposable Panel Filters:

1. Comply with NFPA 90A.




237200 - 4

2. Filter Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors

on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lift out from

access plenum.

3. Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type.

4. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).

5. MERV: 8, according to ASHRAE 52.2.

6. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive and

antimicrobial agent.

7. Frame: Galvanized steel with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet side,

hinged, and with pull and retaining handles.

F. Wiring: Fabricate units with space within housing for electrical conduits. Wire motors

and controls so only external connections are required during installation.

1. Indoor Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure contains relays, starters, and

terminal strip.

G. Accessories:

1. Duct flanges, if applicable.

2. Hinged access doors with quarter-turn latches.

2.2 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. As scheduled on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements

for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-to-air energy recovery

equipment installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet,

moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for electrical services to verify actual locations of connections

before installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.




237200 - 5

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Units: Suspend units from structural-steel support frame using threaded steel rods and

spring hangers. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in

Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for ductwork specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

B. Install electrical devices furnished with units but not factory mounted.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including

connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative

to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including

connections, and to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:


confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

2. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

D. Air-to-air energy recovery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass

tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-to-air energy

recovery units.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Variable Refrigerant Flow Heat Pump



238126 - 1

SECTION 238126

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMP

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. The variable capacity, heat pump heat recovery air conditioning system shall be the

simultaneous cooling and heating split system heat pump.

B. The Variable Refrigerant Flow Heat Pump system shall consist of outdoor units, BC

(Branch Circuit) Controller, multiple indoor units with Direct Digital Control

Automatic Temperature Control system. Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall

be capable of operating in any mode independently of other indoor units or groups.

System shall be capable of changing mode (cooling to heating, heating to cooling) with

no interruption to system operation. Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be

independently controlled. The sum of connected capacity of all indoor air handlers

shall not exceed 125% of outdoor rated capacity.


A. The units shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label.

B. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.).

C. The units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001 and ISO14001

which is a set of standards applying to environmental protection set by the International

Standard Organization (ISO).

D. A full charge of R-410A for the condensing unit only shall be provided in the

condensing unit.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size

of each field connection.




238126 - 2


A. Coordination Drawings: Heat pump and indoor Air handling Unit mounting details,

drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each

other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Size and location of unit-mounted rails and anchor points and methods for

anchoring units to roof support structural.

2. Required equipment clearances.

3. Control and Power wiring diagrams

4. Refrigerant piping layout drawings with pipe sizing data based on the exact length

of pipe distances.

B. Startup service reports by certified personnel/manufacturer’s certified technician.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For units to include in emergency, operation, and



A. Unit shall be stored and handled according to the manufacturer’s recommendation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace components of units that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty shall include the

materials and labor.

1. Warranty Period for entire system: two year from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period for Compressors: Seven years from date of Substantial

Completion.

3. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Five years from date of Substantial

Completion.

B. The Contractor shall attach an engraved weatherproof Guarantee or Warranty tag to the

exterior of each condensing unit. Tag is to be screwed or riveted to unit. Identification

tag shall be black with engraved 3" white letters with the following information:

1. Unit Number per the construction drawings

2. Contracting Company’s Name

3. Warranty Expires Date

4. Compressor Warranty Expires Date




238126 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the comparable

approved following:

1. Daikin AC

2. LG

3. Mitsubishi

4. Panasonic

2.2 OUTDOOR HEAT PUMP UNIT

A. Unit Cabinet:

1. The casing(s) shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished.

Units cabinets shall be able to withstand 960 hours per ASTM B117 criteria for

seacoast protected models (–BS models)

B. Fan:

1. Each outdoor unit module shall be furnished with one direct drive, variable speed

propeller type fan. The fan shall be factory set for operation under 0 in. WG

external static pressure, but capable of normal operation under a maximum of 0.24

in. WG external static pressure via dipswitch.

2. All fan motors shall have inherent protection, have permanently lubricated

bearings, and be completely variable speed.

3. All fan motors shall be mounted for quiet operation.

4. All fans shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving

parts.

5. The outdoor unit shall have vertical discharge airflow.

C. Refrigerant

1. R410A refrigerant.

D. Coil:

1. The outdoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated

plate fins on copper tubing.

2. The coil fins shall have a factory applied corrosion resistant blue-fin finish.

3. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard.




238126 - 4

4. Refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit shall be controlled by means of an inverter

driven compressor.

5. The outdoor coil shall include 4 circuits with two position valves for each circuit,

except for the last stage.

E. Compressor:

1. Each outdoor unit module shall be equipped with one inverter driven scroll

hermetic compressor. Non inverter-driven compressors shall not be allowed.

2. A crankcase heater(s) shall be factory mounted on the compressor(s).

3. The outdoor unit compressor shall have an inverter to modulate capacity. The

capacity shall be completely variable with a turndown of 19%-5% of rated

capacity, depending upon unit size.

4. The compressor will be equipped with an internal thermal overload.

5. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.

6. Field-installed oil equalization lines between modules are not allowed. Prior to

bidding, manufacturers requiring equalization must submit oil line sizing

calculations specific to each system and module placement for this project.

F. Electrical:

1. The outdoor unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors.

2. The control circuit between the indoor units, BC Controller and the outdoor unit

shall be 24VDC completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to

provide total integration of the system.

2.3 BRANCH CIRCUIT (BC) CONTROLLERS

A. General:

1. The BC (Branch Circuit) Controllers shall be specifically used with R410A

simultaneous cooling and heating split systems. These units shall be equipped

with a circuit board that interfaces to the M-NET controls system and shall

perform all functions necessary for operation. The unit shall have a galvanized

steel finish. The BC Controller shall be completely factory assembled, piped and

wired. Each unit shall be run tested at the factory. This unit shall be mounted

indoors, with access and service clearance provided for each controller. The sum

of connected capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range from 50% to 150% of

rated capacity.

B. BC Unit Cabinet:

1. The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel.

2. Each cabinet shall house a liquid-gas separator and multiple refrigeration control

valves.




238126 - 5

3. The unit shall house two tube-in-tube heat exchangers.

C. Refrigerant

1. R410A.

D. Refrigerant valves:

1. The unit shall be furnished with multiple branch circuits which can individually

accommodate up to 54,000 BTUH and up to three indoor units. Branches may be

twinned to allow more than 54,000 BTUH.

2. Each branch shall have multiple two-position valves to control refrigerant flow.

3. Service shut-off valves shall be field-provided/installed for each branch to allow

service to any indoor unit without field interruption to overall system operation.

4. Linear electronic expansion valves shall be used to control the variable refrigerant

flow.

E. Integral Drain Pan:

1. An integral condensate pan and drain shall be provided.

F. Controls:

1. The BC Controller shall be controlled by integral microprocessors.

2. The control circuit between the indoor units and the outdoor unit shall be 24VDC

completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to provide total

integration of the system.

2.4 4-WAY CEILING-RECESSED CASSETTE WITH GRILLE INDOOR UNIT

A. General:

1. Four-way cassette style indoor unit shall be recessed into the ceiling with a ceiling

grille. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested.

Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating

linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a

self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function,

an emergency operation function, a test run switch, and the ability to adjust

airflow patterns for different ceiling heights. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes

shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory.

B. Unit Cabinet:

1. The cabinet shall be space-saving ceiling-recessed cassette.

2. The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air

intake.

3. Branch ducting shall be allowed from cabinet.




238126 - 6

4. Four-way grille shall be fixed to bottom of cabinet allowing two, three or four-

way blow.

5. The grille vane angles shall be individually adjustable from the wired remote

controller to customize the airflow pattern for the conditioned space

C. Fan:

1. The indoor fan shall be an assembly with a turbo fan direct driven by a single

motor.

2. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with

permanently lubricated bearings.

3. The indoor fan shall consist of five (5) speed settings, Low, Mid1, Mid2, High and

Auto.

4. The fan shall have a selectable Auto fan setting that will adjust the fan speed

based on the difference between controller set-point and space temperature.

5. The indoor unit shall have an adjustable air outlet system offering 4-way airflow,

3-way airflow, or 2-way airflow.

6. The indoor unit shall have switches that can be set to provide optimum airflow

based on ceiling height and number of outlets used.

7. The indoor unit vanes shall have 5 fixed positions and a swing feature that shall be

capable of automatically swinging the vanes up and down for uniform air

distribution.

8. The vanes shall have an Auto-Wave selectable option in the heating mode that

shall randomly cycle the vanes up and down to evenly heat the space.

9. If specified, the grille shall have an optional i-see sensor that will measure room

temperature variations and adjust the airflow accordingly to evenly condition the

space.

D. Filter:

1. Return air shall be filtered by means of a long-life washable filter

E. Coil:

1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on

copper tubing.

2. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange.

3. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy.

4. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory.

5. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil.

6. The unit shall be provided with an integral condensate lift mechanism that will be

able to raise drain water 33 inches above the condensate pan.

7. Both refrigerant lines to the indoor units shall be insulated.

F. Controls:

1. The unit shall be controlled by hardwired electronic LCD display wall thermostat.




238126 - 7

2.5 Controls

A. General:

1. The Automatic Controls Network (ACN) shall be capable of supporting remote

controllers, schedule timers, system controllers, centralized controllers, an

integrated web based interface, graphical user workstation, and system integration

to Building Automation Systems (BAS) via BACnet.

2.6 Electrical Characteristics

A. General:

1. The ACN shall operate at 24VDC. Controller power and communications shall be

via a common non-polar communications bus.

B. Wiring:

1. Control wiring shall be installed in a system daisy chain configuration from indoor

unit to remote controller to indoor unit, to the BC controller (main and subs, if

applicable) and to the outdoor unit. Control wiring to remote controllers shall be

run from the indoor unit terminal block to the controller associated with that unit.

2. Control wiring for schedule timers, system controllers, and centralized controllers

shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from outdoor unit to outdoor unit,

to system controllers, to the power supply.

C. Wiring type:

1. Wiring shall be 2-conductor (16 AWG), twisted shielded pair, stranded wire, as

defined by the Design Tool AutoCAD output shop drawings.

2. Network wiring shall be CAT-5e with RJ-45 connection.

2.7 Automatic Controls Network

A. The Automatic Controls Network (ACN) consists of remote controllers, schedule

timers, system controllers, centralized controllers, and/or integrated web based interface

communicating over a high-speed communication bus. The ACN shall support

operation monitoring, scheduling, error email distribution, personal browsers, tenant

billing, online maintenance support, and integration with BAS using BACnet interfaces.

2.8 Centralized Controller

A. Centralized Controller




238126 - 8

1. The Centralized Controller shall support operation superseding that of the space

thermostat controllers, system configuration, daily/weekly scheduling, monitoring

of operation status, and malfunction monitoring. The Centralized Controller shall

have five basic operation controls which can be applied to an individual indoor

unit, a group of indoor units, or all indoor units (collective batch operation). This

basic control set of operation controls for the Centralized Controller shall include

on/off, operation mode selection (cool, heat, auto, dry, and fan), temperature

setting, fan speed setting, and airflow direction setting. The Centralized Controller

shall allow the user to define both daily and weekly schedules with operations

consisting of ON/OFF, mode selection, temperature setting, vane direction, fan

speed, and permit/prohibit of remote controllers.

2. The Centralized Controllers shall be equipped with one RJ-45 Ethernet port to

support interconnection with a network PC via a closed/direct Local Area

Network (LAN). The Centralized Controller shall be capable of performing initial

settings via the 9” high-resolution, backlit, color touch panel on the controller.

3. The on-site BAS central monitoring station shall be provided in the basement

boiler room by control contractor. Graphical User Workstation software functions

shall be provided so that the building manager can securely log into VRF

Centralized Controllers via the PC’s web browser and the BAS central monitoring

station with touch screen located in boiler room to support operation monitoring,

scheduling, error email, personal web browsers, and online maintenance

diagnostics. Provide web-based user interface licenses and system graphical user

interface workstation software for at least 5 PCs and Central Monitoring station as

indicated.

2.9 Power Supply

A. The power supply shall be provided to supply 24VDC for the centralized controller and

24VDC voltage for the central control transmission. VRF heat pump installation

contractor is responsible for provision of power including circuit breakers, wiring and

conduit for the power supply transformer and wiring to Centralized Controllers. Also,

coordinate with the building automation control contractor and provide communication

control wiring and conduit to BAS central monitoring station.

2.10 ACCESSORIES

A. Refrigerant Piping: The system shall be capable of refrigerant piping from the outdoor

unit to the furthest indoor unit.

B. Electrical meter to read the energy usage in KWH.




238126 - 9

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install all piping, fittings, and insulation to meet manufacturers requirements. Install

units level and plumb. Evaporator-fan components shall be installed using

manufacturers standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure.

C. Installer shall supply isolation ball valves for zoned refrigerant isolation. Installer shall

supply Isolation ball valves with Schrader connection for isolating refrigerant charge

and evacuation at each connected air handling unit and condensing unit. Isolation ball

valves, with Schrader connection, are required for instances of air handling unit

isolation for troubleshooting, repair, or replacement without affecting the remainder of

the system. Isolation ball valves with Schrader connection are also required at

condensing unit connection to isolate unit for troubleshooting, repair or replacement and

as required to provide partial capacity Heating/Cooling in the instance of a failure of

one of the multiple outdoor unit (condensing unit) compressors.

D. During brazing an inert gas (such as nitrogen) shall be continuously passed through the

system at a rate sufficient to maintain an oxygen free environment to prevent the

formation of copper oxide scale. After piping has been completed, the refrigerant piping

system shall be pressure tested at a pressure of 300 psi on the high side and 150 psi on

the low side. The pressure shall be maintained on the system for a minimum of 12

hours. The system shall be evacuated when the surrounding ambient air is not less than

60 F. If the temperature is less, auxiliary heat must be provided to insure proper

evacuating conditions. A minimum vacuum of 500 Microns of Hg. shall be pulled on

the system and maintained for 12 hours. The vacuum pump displacement shall be not

less than 2 cfm for up to 15 tons. The system shall be charged as recommended by the

equipment manufacturer.

E. The indoor air handling and outside condensing units shall be installed in accordance

with the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the drawings. The first unit

installed will be considered the typical mock up and shall require notification,

inspection and approval by the designated owner representative and/or architect and

engineer before any additional installations will be allowed.

F. Install and connect refrigerant tubing and fittings Install evaporator-fan components

using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure.

G. Coordinate with general contractor to provide steel structural supports to install roof-

mounting compressor-condenser components. Anchor units to supports with

removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.




238126 - 10

H. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a

minimum static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm).

I. Provide refrigerant piping, valves, accessories and refrigerant pipe insulation in

accordance with the unit manufacturer’s installation instruction.

J. Provide vacuum and pressure testing for all refrigerant piping system and provide

testing results and the manufacturer’s representative approval letter to engineer.

K. Add refrigerant R-410A in accordance with the unit manufacturer’s installation

instruction.

L. Drawing shows the general arrangements of control wirings. Contractor shall be

responsible to complete all control wiring in accordance with the unit manufacturer’s

installation requirements.

M. Provide an electrical usage meter, power and network connections, accessories,

software, etc, as require integrating the real time energy consumption reading into

workstation to generate monthly energy usage data. Intermittent energy consumption

reading would not be allowed.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Coordinate piping installations and specialty arrangements with schematics on

Drawings and with requirements specified in piping systems. If Drawings are explicit

enough, these requirements may be reduced or omitted.

B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

C. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.

D. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section

"Metal Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect

supply and return ducts to split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct

connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct

Accessories."

E. Ground equipment according to Division 26.

F. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Sections for power

wiring, switches, and motor controls.






238126 - 11

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks in accordance with

the unit manufacturer’s written testing procedures. Repair leaks and retest until no

leaks exist.


confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Provide a typed list of all the different units, their filter sizes, and belt sizes to be

included in the O&M manuals. The list shall include the unit designation, filter size, and

the number of filters required for each unit.

3.4 START_UP

A. Engage manufacturer or factory-authorized service representative to perform startup

service. Manufacturer shall provide on-site startup and commissioning assistance

through job completion. Complete installation and startup checks according to

manufacturer’s written instructions. This shall include a factory startup for factory

provided control devices as well as configuring control points for other DO devices.

Service representative shall completely configure all control devices and establish

remote internet connectivity with the owner’s energy management department web

server.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage manufacturer or factory-authorized service representative to train Owners

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain individual units and complete

system. This shall include training of the owner’s energy management department

representatives as to establish control system programming, scheduling routines, alarm

reporting, system topography, communication protocols and password level

assignments. Allow a minimum 16 hrs train.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Electrical General Provisions



October 2016

260010 - 1

SECTION 260010

ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.02 SCOPE

A. General: The provisions of this section are general and are intended to apply to all

electrical sections, to govern the quality of design, fabrication, workmanship and

operation of materials, equipment and appurtenances to be furnished and/or installed

thereunder.

B. Equipment: All electrical equipment, including but not limited to, wiring devices,

wiring materials and electrical construction materials shall be new and of the highest

quality and latest improved design.

C. Workmanship: Workmanship shall be of the highest grade and all installation work

shall be performed by thoroughly qualified mechanics of the appropriate trade. All

equipment shall be installed and connected in accordance with the best engineering

practice. Manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations shall be followed and all

electric connections shall be provided.

D. Completeness: The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and

services necessary for the complete electrical system ready for continuous operation.

Provide all required mounting hardware and accessories to install all equipment and

devices. Make all equipment and devices fully operational.

E. Drawings: The drawings showing the layout of the electrical system indicate

approximate locations of outlets, apparatus and equipment. The runs of feeders and

branches as shown, the drawings are schematic only and are not intended to show the

exact routing and location of conduits and conduit terminations. The final

determination as to routing, location and termination shall be governed by structural

conditions, obstructions and job conditions. This shall not be construed to mean that

the design of the system may be changed without the written approval of the

Engineer; it merely refers to the exact run of raceways and the exact placement of

outlets, etc. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain all shop drawings

affecting conduit terminations to the equipment specified in this or other sections or

furnished by others, and to verify conduit locations before installation. The

Contractor shall consult all contract drawings and specifications which may affect the




October 2016

260010 - 2

location of any outlet, equipment or conduit run, to avoid improper locations of such

items and to avoid interference with other trades.

F. Accessibility: Electrical equipment such as junction and pull boxes, panelboards,

switches, controls and such other apparatus as may require maintenance or operation

from time to time, is made easily accessible. Although the equipment may be shown

on the drawings in certain locations, in the course of building construction, it may

develop that such locations do not afford proper accessibility, in which case the

Contractor shall direct the Engineer's attention to the condition before advancing the

construction.

G. Site examinations: All bidders, prior to submitting a bid, shall thoroughly acquaint

themselves with the conditions under which the work will be performed. No

allowance shall be made subsequently in connection with this, for any error or

negligence on the contractor’s part.

H. Unless noted as “existing” or “relocated”, all construction is new and shall be

furnished and installed by the contractor.


A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with electrical construction code

requirements of State, City and such other local political subdivision specifications as

may exceed the requirements of national codes, standards and approving bodies.

B. All electrical equipment installed under this contract shall bear UL label. Equipment

shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of UL and the manufacturer.

C. Comply with the National Electrical Code.

D. Certificates and Permits: Upon completion of work, and prior to final payment,

furnish to the Engineer formal certification of final inspections from authorities

having jurisdiction and secure required permits or certificates (if any) from such

authorities. Additionally, prepare detailed diagrams and drawings which may be

required by those authorities having jurisdiction. All the cost for obtaining

certificates and permits will be paid by the Contractor.

1.04 REFERENCES AND DEFINITIONS

A. Basic References: The following codes, standards, and approvals as referenced

throughout the Sections of Division 26, shall serve as the minimum standards and

quality requirements directly appropriate to the work and workmanship. References

to catalogs, standards, codes, specifications and recommendations, etc., means latest

edition of such publications in effect at the date of invitation to submit bid.

1. Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ANSI C2; National Electrical

Safety Code .




October 2016

260010 - 3

3. National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) Standards as apply to

specified Products.

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 70 ( National Electrical

Code), NFPA 72 (National Fire Alarm Code), NFPA 70E (Standard for

Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces), and other

applicable NFPA codes

5. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Listings, Labels, and Approvals shall

govern the quality and performance of specified Products.

6. Americans with Disabilites Act (ADA)

7. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc (IEEE)

8. National Electrical Contractor’s Association (NECA)

9. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA)

10. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

B. Definitions:

1. “Provide” - means “furnish and install”

2. “Indicated” - means “indicated in contract documents”

3. “Concealed” - means items referred to are hidden from normal sight, this

includes items partly excavated or crawl spaces and in service tunnels used

solely for repairs and maintenance

4. “Exposed” - means items are not “concealed”

5. “Feeder” - means “All circuit conductors between the service equipment,

the source of a separately derived system, or other power supply source and

the final branch-circuit overcurrent device”

6. “Feeder circuit breakers” - means circuit breakers protecting feeders.

7. NETA ATS - International Electrical Testing Association Acceptance

Testing Specifications 2007 Edition

8. “Building” – A structure that stands alone or that is cut off from adjoining

structures by fire walls with all openings therein protected by approved fire

doors

9. “degrees C” – means “degrees Celsius”

10. “degrees F” – means “degrees Fahrenheit”

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit Product Data applicable to items listed under Submittals in

each Section of Division 26; and such items as may be indicated on the Drawings.

B. Shop Drawings

1. General: The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, before

fabrication, detailed shop drawings for all electrical equipment and materials.

2. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate, using arrows and/or highlighting on all

copies, which items are being submitted and that each item being submitted is

in compliance with all requirements on the drawings and in these

specifications. All pertinent specification and drawing requirements shall be




October 2016

260010 - 4

indicated on the manufacturer’s drawings. Complete model number of

equipment shall be indicated.

3. Shop drawings of related equipment shall be submitted together.

C. "As-Built" Drawings:

1. Accurate project record drawings and specifications, showing in red ink on the

working drawings and electrical drawings all changes from the original plans

made during installation of the work. Upon completion of the work the

contractor shall deliver to the Owner one neat set of drawings with alterations

and notations made in red ink.

D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals

1. General: Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall furnish Operating

and Maintenance Manuals for use by the Owner. The manuals shall include

operating and maintenance information on all systems and items of

equipment. The data shall consist of catalogs, brochures, bulletins, charts,

schedules and drawings describing location, operation, maintenance,

lubrication, operating weight and other information necessary for the Owner

to establish an effective operating and maintenance program.

2. Shop Drawings: Copies of appropriate shop drawings shall be included in the

Operating and Maintenance Manuals. The requirements for manuals is a

separate contractual item and in no way supersedes the requirements for shop

drawings and vice-versa.

3. Approval: Completed manuals shall be submitted to the Engineer for review

and approval. Incomplete or inadequate manuals will be returned to the

Contractor for correction and resubmission.

4. Provide 3 copies of each operating and maintenance manual unless a greater

quantity is specified elsewhere in the specifications, in which case the higher

quantity will apply.

5. Equipment keys and passwords shall be provided to the Owner’s authorized

representative or representatives. A document shall be provided indicating

who received the keys and what are the passwords. Document shall be neat

and typewritten.

6. All factory and field test reports shall be included into the O&M Manuals.

7. Provide a separate section in the O&M Manuals for maintenance testing

schedules of all equipment. A factory authorized representative of the

equipment manufacturer shall certify the maintenance program. Include

calendar schedule in table format to indicate all maintenance actions included

during the warranty period with spaces for future testing.

8. Records of all factory and field tests by the contractor, manufacturer, or

independent testing company shall be included in the O&M Manuals.

9. Wiring diagrams for all factory and field wiring shall be included in the O&M

Manuals.

E. Spare Parts and Accessories List




October 2016

260010 - 5

1. A complete list of spare parts and Accessories for equipment shall be

provided.


A. Deliver materials and equipment to the Project site in a clean condition with openings

plugged or capped (or otherwise sealed by packaging) both during shipping and

during temporary storage.

B. Delivered electrical equipment crating and/or packaging shall clearly identify pick-

points or lift-points. In the absence of crating or packaging, pick-points or lift-points

must be identified on the equipment.

C. When unloading materials and equipment provide special lifting harness or apparatus

as may be required by manufacturers. Handle materials and equipment in accordance

with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. The Contractor shall determine the required equipment needed for unloading

operations and have such equipment on site to perform unloading work on the date of

equipment delivery.

E. Store materials and equipment, both on and off site, in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions. Keep equipment in a dry location.

1. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to materials and equipment,

according to manufacturer's written instructions, throughout periods when

environment is not controlled for temperature and humidity within

manufacturer's stipulated service conditions.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall guarantee that all work performed and all materials and

equipment installed by him are free from defects. He shall repair or replace any

defective equipment, materials or workmanship, free of cost to the Owner for a period

of two (2) years from date of acceptance. Where individual specification sections

indicate a Special Warranty period longer than two (2) years, the longer warranty

period shall apply.

B. During this warranty period the Contractor shall:

1. Correct and make good all electrical defects. Faulty equipment and materials

shall be repaired or replaced as required to produce satisfactory results as

directed by the engineer and without additional cost to the Owner. Contractor

shall provide service within 24 hours after the call has been made by the

Owner.

1.08 DAMAGE TO OTHER WORK




October 2016

260010 - 6

A. Damage: Cutting or damage to existing structures, surfaces or installations shall be

repaired at the expense of the Contractor. All such repairs or patching shall be done

by mechanics of the appropriate trade and shall be neatly done by mechanics of the

appropriate trade and shall be neatly done and in such a fashion as to leave no readily

apparent joint or change in appearance, and to leave no structural or other weakness.

1.09 TEMPORARY POWER

A. Contractor shall be entirely responsible for temporary power. All applications, fees,

temporary connections, etc. shall be made by the contractor.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. General: The Contractor shall coordinate the work performed and equipment

furnished by the Electrical Contractor with work performed and equipment furnished

by other trades to ensure a complete and satisfactory installation.

1.11 INTERRUPTION OF ELECTRIC SERVICE

A. Do not interrupt electric, telephone or cable tv service to facilities occupied by Owner

or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than 10 days in advance of proposed

interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction

Manager's written permission.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Common Work Results for Electrical



October 2016

260051 - 1

SECTION 260051

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.02 SUMMARY


1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.

2. Sleeves for raceways and cables.

3. Sleeve seals.

4. Grout.

5. Touch up paint

6. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide product data for all items indicated in this specification

section.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that

reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum

interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.

4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be

clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind

finished surfaces or otherwise concealed.




October 2016

260051 - 2

C. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of

firestopping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular

space between sleeve and raceway or cable.


manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Metraflex Co.

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or

conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or

cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.

4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of

length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for

each sealing element.

2.02 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged,

nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to

consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.03 ACCESS DOORS

A. Door and frame shall be constructed of steel, 16 gauge minimum. Access door shall

have a continuous piano hinge. Door shall have a flush mounted lock. Finish shall be

prime coat of rust inhibitive electrostatic powder, baked enamel. Access door shall be

field painted to match the surrounding wall or ceiling.

B. Provide fire rated access doors to maintain the fire rating of wall and ceiling

assemblies, to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.

2.04 TOUCH UP PAINT

A. Provide touch up paint from the manufacturer of the electrical equipment. Paint shall

match the finish of the equipment. At a minimum, provide touch up paint for the

following equipment:

1. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.




October 2016

260051 - 3

2. Disconnect switches.

3. Enclosed circuit breakers.

4. Motor starters.

5. Wireways

6. Surface raceway

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.

C. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to

bottom of unit for wall-mounting items, unless otherwise noted.

D. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not

indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum

possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

E. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in

such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other

items in the vicinity.

F. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

G. Provide touch up paint as required on equipment finishes that have been scratched,

and provide touch up paint as directed by the engineer. Touch up paint shall be

provided in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not allow paint

to come in contact with conductors, insulation or any live parts. All nameplates and

labels shall remain visible and legible.

H. Overcurrent devices shall be readily accessible and shall be installed so that the center

of the grip of the operating handle of the switch or circuit breaker, when in its highest

position, is not more than 6 feet 7 inches above the floor or working platform.

I. Provide access doors where required to keep concealed electrical devices and

equipment accessible in accordance with the National Electrical Code.

J. Unless otherwise noted, access doors shall be painted to match surrounding wall or

ceiling.




October 2016

260051 - 4

3.02 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or

busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and

wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or

formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved

opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall

assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated

during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway

or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain.

Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space

between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth,

and location of joint.

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,

ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal

raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials.

K. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using cast-iron pipe

sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular

clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.03 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway

or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble

mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and




October 2016

260051 - 5

sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand

and make watertight seal.

3.04 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated ceiling, floor and wall assemblies for

electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.

B. Install UL Listed Firestopping Material in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations, and UL’s requirements.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Conductors and Cables



October 2016

260519 - 1

SECTION 260519

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. AWG: American Wire Gauge

B. KCMIL: Thousand Circular Mil

1.04 SUBMITTALS




NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components

as they are constructed.




October 2016

260519 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited

to, the following:

1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.

2. General Cable Corporation.

3. Senator Wire & Cable Company.

4. Southwire Company.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C. Conductor Insulation:

1. Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN/THWN-2. Suitable for

operation at 600 volts or less in wet or dry locations

D. Branch Circuit Type Metal Clad Cable:

1. Conductor Insulation: THHN 90 degree C

2. Copper conductor.

3. Neutral wire shall be insulated and shall be the same size as the phase

conductors.

4. Voltage Rating: 600V

5. Conductor covering: Polypropylene assembly tape overall

6. Armor: Interlocked steel

7. Fire Wall Rated for 1, 2 and 3 hour rated penetrations

8. Grounding Means: One green insulated copper grounding conductor

9. Suitable for use in environmental air handling spaces

10. UL 1569 Listed

2.02 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES



to, the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.

4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.

5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating,

material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

C. 600V Vinyl Insulating Tape: The tape is based on polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and/or its

copolymers and has a rubber based, pressure-sensitive adhesive. The tape shall be 7




October 2016

260519 - 3

mils thick, and UL Listed and marked per UL Standard 510 as “Flame Retardant,

Cold and Weather Resistant.”

D. Screw-on Pressure Cable Connector: Connector shall be UL Listed. Voltage rating

shall be 600 volts for building wire and 1000 volts for signs and fixtures.

E. Mechanical Connector: Connector shall be UL Listed. Connector shall be wrapped

with electrical insulating tape in accordance with the NEC and the manufacturer’s

requirements. Connectors shall be dual rated (suitable for use with copper or

aluminum conductors), unless otherwise noted.

F. Compression Connector: Connector shall be UL Listed. Connector shall be wrapped

with electrical insulating tape in accordance with the NEC and the manufacturer’s

requirements. Use compression tool recommended by manufacturer. Connectors shall

be dual rated (suitable for use with copper or aluminum conductors), unless otherwise

noted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper (unless otherwise noted on the drawings). Stranded.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller (exception: conductors

for vibrating equipment, such as transformers, motors and generators, shall use

stranded conductors); stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

C. Class 1 and Class 2 Control Wiring: Copper. Stranded.

3.02 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS

AND WIRING METHODS

A. Aboveground Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions:

Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway, unless otherwise noted.

B. Aboveground Feeders Concealed in partly excavated or crawl spaces and in service

tunnels used solely for repairs and maintenance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway, unless otherwise noted.

C. Aboveground Exposed Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in

raceway, unless otherwise noted.

D. Aboveground Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions:

Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway, unless otherwise noted.




October 2016

260519 - 4

1. Branch Circuit Type Metal clad cable may be used in lieu of THHN/THWN-

2, single conductors in raceway where ALL of the following conditions are

met:

a. Metal clad cable is fed from circuit breakers or fuses rated at 20

amperes or less;

b. Metal clad cable is only used for branch circuit conductors;

c. Metal clad cable is used only in dry locations;

d. Metal clad cable is used only in aboveground applications;

e. Metal clad cable is not subject to physical damage;

f. Metal clad cable is used only in concealed ceilings, walls, and

partitions;

g. Metal clad cable is installed only where allowed by the National

Electrical Code, NFPA Codes, and Federal/State/Local Codes.

E. Aboveground Branch Circuits Concealed in partly excavated or crawl spaces and in

service tunnels used solely for repairs and maintenance: Type THHN/THWN-2,

single conductors in raceway, unless otherwise noted.

F. Aboveground Class 1 and Class 2 Control Wiring: Type THHN/THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway unless otherwise noted.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Comply with the NEC.

B. Comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements.

C. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary;

compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed

manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure

values.

E. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable

grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

F. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural

members, and follow surface contours where possible.

G. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Specification Section

"Electrical Identification."

H. Do not splice feeders and underground branch circuits unless specifically indicated in

the drawings. Cables shall be unspliced between termination points.

I. Provide insulated bushings at the end of each metal clad cable.




October 2016

260519 - 5

J. Use insulating bushings to protect ALL conductors, including conductors smaller

than No. 4 AWG. Provide insulated grounding bushings where required by NFPA 70

or the Contract Documents.

K. Spare wires shall be disconnected at both ends and shall be insulated at both ends

with wire nuts held in place by electrical insulating tape. For large wire sizes, the

spare wires shall be disconnected at both ends and shall be insulated at both ends with

double wrapped electrical insulating tape.

3.04 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published



B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess

equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced

conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Grounding and Bonding



October 2016

260526 - 1

SECTION 260526

GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.

1.03 SUBMITTALS






B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise

noted.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

2.02 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types,

sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Grounding and Bonding



October 2016

260526 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller (exception:

conductors for vibrating equipment, such as transformers, motors and generators,

shall use stranded conductors), and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger,


3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless

otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing

conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems



October 2016

260529 - 1

SECTION 260529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.02 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

B. MFMA: Metal Framing Manufacturer’s Association


A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of

supported systems and its contents.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.

C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum

loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor

of five times the applied force.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.




October 2016

260529 - 2

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated

components for field assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,



a. Allied Tube & Conduit.

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

c. ERICO International Corporation.

d. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

e. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

f. Hilti

2. Outdoors:

a. Steel Channel Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication

in accordance with ASTM 123 and applied according to MFMA-4.

b. Fittings and Accessories:

1) Conduit hangers, conduit clamps, beam clamps, and wall

brackets shall be steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in

accordance with ASTM 123.

2) Threaded hardware such as mechanical expansion anchors,

nuts, bolts, and threaded rods shall be steel, hot-dip galvanized

after fabrication in accordance with ASTM 123. Threaded

hardware not available as hot-dip galvanized after fabrication

shall be stainless steel type 304.

3. Indoors:

a. Steel Channel metallic Coatings: Pre-Galvanized Steel with mill

galvanized coating designation G90.

b. Fittings and Accessories:

1) Conduit hangers, conduit clamps, beam clamps, and wall

brackets shall be pre-galvanized (designation G90) or

electroplated zinc (ASTM B633).

2) Threaded hardware shall be electroplated zinc (ASTM B633).

4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Hangers, clamps, and associated fittings,

designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.




October 2016

260529 - 3

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting

of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical

conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of

conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables

supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical

items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, steel, for use in hardened

portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the

Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.

3) Hilti Inc.

4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar

to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type

suitable for attached structural element.

4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with

ASTM A 325.

5. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for

electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space

supports for EMT and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4

inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel

slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in

future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps

using spring friction action for retention in support channel.




October 2016

260529 - 4

3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as

specified in this Article.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so

strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified

loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be

weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor

and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the

following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and

expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.

5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with

MSS SP-69.

6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount

cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and

junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks

attached to substrate.

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid

reinforcing bars.

3.03 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas

immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop

painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted

surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0

mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Raceways and Boxes



October 2016

260533 - 1

SECTION 260533

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

B. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

C. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

D. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Source quality-control test reports.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING



to, the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.

3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.

4. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal.

5. Wheatland Tube Company.

6. Robroy Industries Electrical Products Division




October 2016

260533 - 2

B. Electrical conduit shall be red with red label as indicated on section “ELECTRICAL

IDENTIFICATION”.

C. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

D. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.

2. PVC coated, with 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior

coating

3. The PVC Coated steel conduit must be ETL Verified to the Intertek ETL

SEMKO High Temperature H20 PVC Coating Adhesion Test Procedure for

200 hours. The conduit must bear the ETL Verified PVC-001 label to signify

compliance to the adhesion performance standard.

E. FMC: Zinc-coated steel

F. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.

1. Fittings: Compression type.

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

H. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), and Cable:

NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application

and environment in which installed.

1. Insulating Bushings: Plastic, 105 degree C minimum temperature rating.

2. Insulated Grounding Bushings: Malleable Iron with plastic liner, 105 degree C

minimum temperature rating.

3. Conduit Bodies, Couplings and fittings for PVC-Coated Steel Conduit:

a. PVC coated, with 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane

interior coating

2.02 METAL WIREWAYS



to, the following:

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

2. Hoffman.

3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless


C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints,

adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with

wireways as required for complete system.




October 2016

260533 - 3

D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type, unless otherwise noted

E. Finish: ANSI 61 red polyester powder paint finish inside and out over phosphatized

surfaces.

2.03 BOXES



to, the following:

1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. EGS/Appleton Electric.

3. Hoffman.

4. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.

5. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.

6. RACO; a Hubbell Company.

7. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.

8. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.

9. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

10. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).

B. Box shall be red in color.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with

gasketed cover.

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

F. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with

gasketed cover.

2.04 ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS



to, the following:

1. Hoffman.

B. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with

flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer’s standard enamel.




October 2016

260533 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated on

the drawings.

1. Aboveground, Exposed: PVC coated Rigid Steel Conduit, unless otherwise

noted.

2. Aboveground, Concealed: Rigid Steel Conduit, unless otherwise noted.

3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers, Motors, Pumps,

Fans, and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven

Equipment): LFMC, unless otherwise noted.

4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R, unless otherwise

noted.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated on

the drawings.

1. Aboveground, Exposed: Rigid Steel Conduit, unless otherwise noted.

2. Aboveground, concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT,

unless otherwise noted.

3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,

Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, unless

otherwise noted and except as follows:

a. Damp or wet locations: LFMC

4. Damp or Wet Locations (boiler room, water room, pump room and etc):

Rigid Steel Conduit, unless otherwise noted.

5. Where subject to physical damage (mechanical room, control room, electrical

room, and where exposed): Rigid Steel Conduit, unless otherwise noted.

6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise noted.

C. Wireways: All wireways shall be metal, with ANSI 61 gray polyester powder paint

finish inside and out over phosphatized surfaces, unless otherwise noted.

D. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size, unless otherwise noted.

E. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified

in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-

water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.




October 2016

260533 - 5

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

E. Raceway Terminations: Use insulating bushings to protect ALL conductors,

including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. Provide insulated grounding bushings

where required by NFPA 70 or the Contract Documents.

F. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line

with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each

end of pull wire.

G. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill

them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a

flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent

plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of

refrigerated spaces.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

H. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 48 inches of flexible conduit for

equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for

transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC where required by the Contract Documents.

I. Raceway shall run parallel or perpendicular to wall and ceiling structures (columns,

joists, support beams, etc.) for a neat appearance.

J. All metallic raceways, boxes and enclosures shall be grounded.

K. Provide watertight hubs for all junction boxes and enclosures installed outdoors or in

wet locations. Hubs used with NEMA 3R junction boxes and enclosures shall be

NEMA 3R or NEMA 4X rated. Hubs used with NEMA 4 or 4X junction boxes and

enclosures shall be NEMA 4X rated.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and

cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended

by manufacturer.

PART 4 - END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Electrical Identification



October 2016

260553 - 1

SECTION 260553

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

1.04 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with

requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring

diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by

codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout

Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and

painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and

doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar

concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 RACEWAY AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum

length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Color for Printed Legend:




October 2016

260553 - 2

1. Power Circuits: Black letters on a red field, and directions of power flow

(incoming and outgoing).

2. Instrumentation and Control Circuits: Black letters on a yellow field, and

directions of circuit flow (incoming or outgoing).

3. Legend: Indicate system, service and voltage.

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches

wide; compounded for outdoor use.

2.02 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE

IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils

thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.

B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit

identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

C. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and

polyester or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by

tag manufacturer.

2.03 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive

adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to

equipment, unless otherwise indicated.

2.04 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Self-Adhesive Instruction Signs: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive

adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to

equipment, unless otherwise indicated.

2.05 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Phenolic Label: Adhesive backed,

with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8

inch.

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon

cable ties.




October 2016

260553 - 3

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.

2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb, minimum.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.

4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION

A. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than

three branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use marker tape. Identify each

ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number.

B. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting:

Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels. Identify

system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of

door, cover, or other access.

1. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless

otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush

panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

C. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique

designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation

and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection

equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets,

and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication,

signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own

identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label. Unless otherwise indicated,

provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch-

high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.

b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.

c. Disconnect switches.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient

viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.




October 2016

260553 - 4

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish

work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using

materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band

shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color

markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at panels/disconnects, and at the

units, at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 100-foot

maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested

areas.

F. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the

colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.

1. Color shall be factory applied or, for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG if

authorities having jurisdiction permit, field applied.

2. Colors for 208/120-V and 240/120V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Black.

b. Phase B: Red.

c. Phase C: Blue.

d. Neutral: White

3. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Brown.

b. Phase B: Orange.

c. Phase C: Yellow.

d. Neutral: Gray

4. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for

a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where

splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to

prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable

markings.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Fire Alarm System



October 2016

260721 - 1

SECTION 260721

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.02 SUMMARY


1. Fire alarm devices and equipment.

B. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, services and materials necessary to furnish and

install a complete, functional fire alarm system (System). The System shall comply

in respects with all pertinent codes, rules, regulations and laws of the Authority, and

local jurisdiction. The System shall comply in all respects with the requirements of

the specifications, manufacturer's recommendations and Underwriters Laboratories

Inc. (UL) listings.

C. The existing fire alarm system is EST. The existing fire alarm system shall remain

and shall be interlocked with new fire alarm system. The new fire alarm system shall

be 100% fully compatible with the existing system. Contractor shall provide

additional accessories, hardware, software and programming as required.

D. The existing elevator shall be replaced with new in the elevator replacement project.

Contractor shall provide all elevator recall devices and programming per the elevator

replacement project contract documents. Those elevator recall devices shall be

shown on the submittal shop drawings.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

C. UL: Underwriter’s Laboratories

D. LCD: Liquid Crystal Display

E. ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act

F. ADA Rooms: Rooms that are specifically reserved for people with disabilities




October 2016

260721 - 2

G. EST: Edwards Systems Technology

H. NAC: Notification Appliance Circuit

I. MC: Metal Clad


A. All work and materials shall conform to all applicable Federal, State and local codes

and regulations governing the installation. If there is a conflict between the

referenced standards, federal, state or local codes, and this specification, it is the

bidder's responsibility to immediately bring the conflict to the attention of the

Engineer for resolution. National standards shall prevail unless local codes are more

stringent.

B. System components proposed in this specification shall be UL listed to operate

together as a system. The supplier shall provide evidence, with his submittal, of

listings of all proposed equipment and combinations of equipment. The supplier shall

be responsible for filing of all documents, paying all fees (including, but not limited

to plan checking and permit) and securing all permits, inspections and approvals.

Upon receipt of approved drawings from the authority having jurisdiction, the

supplier shall immediately forward two sets of drawings to the Owner. These

drawings shall either be stamped approved or a copy of the letter stating approval

shall be included.

C. The equipment and installation shall comply with the current provisions of the

following codes and standards:

1. NFPA 70 National Electric Code®

2. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code®

3. NFPA 90A Air Conditioning Systems

4. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code®

5. UL 864 - Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

6. UL 268 - Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

7. UL 268A - Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications.

8. UL 521 - Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

9. UL 228 - Door Closers-Holders, With or Without Integral Smoke Detectors.

10. UL 464 - Audible Signaling Appliances.

11. UL 38 - Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes for Use with Fire-Protective

Signaling Systems.

12. UL 346 - Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

13. UL 1971 - Signaling Devices for the Hearing-Impaired.

14. UL 1481 - Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General Submittal Requirements:




October 2016

260721 - 3

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to

submitting them to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.

b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,

and attachments to other work.

1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the

"Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include voltage drop calculations for all fire alarm circuits, including, but not

limited to, notification appliance circuits. The voltage drop calculations shall

show the the maximum allowable distance to the last fire alarm device is not

exceeded.

3. Include battery-size calculations.

4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector,

verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity,

temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

5. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-

conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke

detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to

placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status

and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written

recommendations.

6. Include alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding

schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.

7. Include complete floor plans to indicate equipment and device locations. The

address of each addressable device shall be indicated on the floor plans. Show

type, size and route of cable and conduits. Floor plans shall be drawn in 1/8” =

1’-0” scale.

8. Include control wiring diagrams showing wire terminations and showing how

each device and equipment is to be connected.

9. Include drawings of the graphic annunciator panel.

10. All drawings shall be reviewed and signed off by an individual having a

minimum of a NICET certification in fire protection engineering technology,

subfield of fire alarm systems.

11. Point-to-point wiring diagrams.

12. System riser diagrams, including zoning, sequence of device, connections,

end-of-line devices, and conductor count.

13. Complete description of the sequence of operation.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

E. Field quality-control reports.




October 2016

260721 - 4

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include

in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in

Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," deliver copies to authorities

having jurisdiction and include the following:

1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article

"Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance" Chapter.

3. Record copy of site-specific software.

4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72

article of the same name and include the following:

a. Frequency of testing of installed components.

b. Frequency of inspection of installed components.

c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.

d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.

6. Complete information and drawings describing and depicting the entire system as

installed, including all information necessary for maintaining, troubleshooting, and/or

expanding the system at a future date.

7. Complete documentation of system testing.

8. Certification that the entire system has been inspected and tested, is installed entirely

in accordance with the applicable codes, standards, manufacturer's recommendations

and UL listings, and is in proper working order.

9. As-Built drawings consisting of: a scaled plan of each building showing the

placement of each individual item of the Fire Alarm System as well as raceway size

and routing, junction boxes, and conductor size, quantity, and color in each raceway.

All drawings must reflect point to point wiring, device address and programmed

characteristics as verified in the presence of the engineer and/or the end user unless

device addressing is electronically generated, and automatically graphically

documented by the system.

10. Provide all drawings in standard .DXF format. A bond paper plot of each sheet shall

also be provided.

11. Project specific operating manuals covering the installed Life Safety System. A

generic or typical owner's instruction and operation manual shall not be acceptable to

fulfill this requirement.

12. The application program listing for the system as installed at the time of acceptance

by the building owner and/or local AHJ (disk, hard copy printout, and all required

passwords).

13. Provide the name, address and telephone of the authorized factory representative.

G. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:




October 2016

260721 - 5

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data

files.

3. Device address list.

4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.

H. UL Certification of Fire Alarm System.

I. A copy of the Fire Alarm System submittal shall be provided to the Permits

Department and to the Fire Marshall. Resubmit as required to make clarifications or

revisions to obtain approval.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for

installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-

alarm Level II technician.

C. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm

system from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be

compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in


application.

1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until

new equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it

"NOT IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when

put into service and label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until

removed from the building.

B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system, remove existing

disconnected fire-alarm equipment and wiring.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Fire alarm system manufacturer shall coordinate wiring and conduit layout and

requirements with the Electrical Contractor.

B. Keys for the locks and switches shall be coordinated with the owner and the Fire

Department.




October 2016

260721 - 6

C. Comply with the requirements of the Fire Marshall, the Elevator Safety Inspector and

the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Program the fire alarm control panel as required.

1.09 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Comply with UL 864.

B. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support

for two years.

C. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and

program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of

Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system.

Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.

1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system

and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS



1. Smoke Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type

installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.

2. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed,

but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.

3. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed

components.

4. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.

5. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. The manufacturer of the system equipment shall be regularly involved in the design,

manufacture, and distribution of all products specified in this document. These

processes shall be monitored under a quality assurance program that meets the ISO

9000 requirements.

B. All System components shall be the cataloged products of a single supplier. All

products shall be listed by the manufacturer for their intended purpose.

C. Edwards Systems Technology, Inc. products constitute the minimum type and quality

of equipment to be installed, and to be 100% fully compatible with existing fire alarm

system (EST)




October 2016

260721 - 7

D. All control panel assemblies and connected field appliances shall be both designed

and manufactured by the same company, and shall be tested and cross-listed as to

ensure that a fully functioning is designed and installed. The system supplied under

this specification shall be a microprocessor-based, system. The system shall utilize

independently addressed, microprocessor-based smoke detectors, heat detectors, and

modules as described in this specification.

E. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Edwards Systems Technology (EST)

2.02 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and

systems:

1. Manual stations.

2. Heat detectors.

3. Smoke detectors.

4. Carbon monoxide detector.

5. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.

2. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators.

3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.

4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.

5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.

6. Activate voice/alarm communication system.

7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-

alarm mode.

8. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.

9. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors.

10. Record events in the system memory.

11. Record events by the system printer.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and

actions:

1. Valve supervisory switch.

2. Elevator shunt-trip supervision.

3. Duct smoke detectors

4. Carbon monoxide detection.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and

actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.




October 2016

260721 - 8

2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-

initiating devices.

3. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits.

4. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.

5. Break in standby battery circuitry.

6. Failure of battery charging.

7. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.

E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Annunciate at fire-alarm control

unit and remote annunciators. Transmit trouble or supervisory signal to the remote

alarm receiving station. Record the event on system printer.

2.03 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL PANEL AND FUNCTIONS

A. The control panel shall be a multi-processor-based system designed specifically for

fire and releasing system applications. The control panel shall be listed and approved

for the application standards as listed under the General section.

B. The control panel shall include all required hardware, software and system

programming to provide a complete and operational system. The control panel shall

assure that life safety takes precedence among all panel activities.

C. The control panel shall include the following capacities:

1. Support up to 380 analog/addressable points per panel (1,900 total with 5

networked panels).

2. Support up to 576 chronological events in history.

3. Support up to 5 fully supervised network remote annunciators.

4. Support a DACT (dialer) for off premise notification

5. The control panel shall include the following features:

a. Provide autoprogramming and electronic addressing and mapping of

analog/addressable devices.

b. Provide an operator interface display that shall include functions

required for annunciation, command and control system functions.

c. Provide a discreet system control switch provided for reset, alarm

silence, local silence, drill switch, up/down switches, status switch,

program switch, enable and disable switches, activate and restore

switches, reports switch and test switch.

d. Provide system reports that provide sensitivity and history details.

e. Provide an authorized operator with the ability to operate or modify

system functions like system time, date, passwords; and autoprogram,

enable mapping, restart the system and clear control panel event

history file.

f. Provide an authorized operator to perform test functions within the

installed system.

6. Supervision of system components, wiring, initiating devices and software

shall be provided by the control panel. Failure or fault of system component




October 2016

260721 - 9

or wiring shall be indicated by type and location on the LCD display.

Software and processor operation shall be independently monitored for

failure.

D. ANNUNCIATION

1. The system shall be designed and equipped to receive, monitor, and

annunciate signals from devices and circuits installed throughout the building.

Manufacturer's standard control switches shall be acceptable if they provide

the required operation, including performance, supervision and position

indication. If the manufacturers' standard switches do not comply with these

requirements, fabrication of custom manual controls acceptable to the owner

is required.

2. Receipt of alarm, trouble, and supervisory signals shall activate integral

audible devices at the control panel(s) and at each remote annunciation device.

3. The annunciator shall contain the following system status indicators:

a. 80 character Backlit Liquid Crystal Display.

b. System Power Indicator – green LED

c. System Common Alarm – red LED

d. System Common Trouble – yellow LED

e. System Common Supervisory – yellow LED

f. System Common Monitor – yellow LED

g. System Ground Fault – yellow LED

h. System CPU Fault – yellow LED.

i. System Disabled – yellow LED.

j. System Test Point(s) – yellow LED.

k. System Reset Switch with Integral yellow LED.

l. System Alarm Silence Switch with Integral yellow LED.

m. System Local Silence Switch with Integral yellow LED.

n. System Drill Switch with Integral yellow LED.

o. System Message Queue Scroll Switches.

p. Additional buttons as required to provide system control and operator

functions.

E. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human

operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including

annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status

messages and the programming and control menu.

1. The display module shall be of membrane style construction with a 4 line by

20 character Liquid Crystal Display. The LCD shall use super-twist

technology and backlighting for high contrast visual clarity. In the normal

mode display the time, the total number of active events and the total number

of disable points. In the alarm mode display the total number of events and

the type of event on display. Reserve 40 characters of display space for user

custom messages. The module shall have visual indicators for the following

common control functions; AC Power, alarm, supervisory, monitor, trouble,

disable, ground fault, CPU fail, and test. There shall be common control keys




October 2016

260721 - 10

and visual indicators for; reset, alarm silence, trouble silence, drill, and one

custom programmable key/indicator. Provide four pairs of display control

keys for selection of event display by type (alarm, supervisory, monitor and

trouble) and forward / backward scrolling through event listings. The

operation of these keys shall be integrated with the related common control

indicator that lights when an event of its type is active. Allow the first event

of the highest priority to capture the LCD for display so that arriving fire

fighters can view the first alarm event "hands free". Provide system function

keys; status, reports, enable, disable, activate, restore, program, and test. The

module shall have a numeric keypad, zero through nine with delete and enter

keys.

F. Circuits:

1. Initiating Device Circuits:

a. The Initiating device circuits (IDC) used to monitor manual fire alarm

stations, smoke and heat detectors, waterflow switches, valve

supervisory switches, fire pump functions, and air pressure supervisory

switches shall be Class B (Style "A" or "B").

2. 24 VDC Notification Appliance Circuits:

a. 24 VDC Notification appliance circuits (NAC) shall be Class B (Style

"Y"). All notification appliance circuits shall have a minimum circuit

output rating of 2 amp @ 24 vdc. The notification circuits shall be

power limited. Non-power limited circuits are not acceptable.

b. Provide a minimum of 20% spare capacity on each circuit. Size circuit

conductors accordingly.

3. Signaling Line Circuits:

a. The signaling line circuit shall communicate from a panel/node to

analog/addressable detectors, input modules, output modules, isolation

modules and notification appliance circuits.

b. Each signaling circuit connected to addressable/analog devices shall

provide a minimum of 20 spare addresses. When a signaling line

circuit covers more than one fire/smoke compartments, a wire-to-wire

short shall not effect the operation of the circuit from the other

fire/smoke compartments. The signaling line circuit (SLC) connecting

panels and annunciators shall be Class B (style 4).

c. The signaling line circuit connecting to addressable/analog devices

including, detectors, monitor modules, control modules, isolation

modules, and notification circuit modules shall be Class B (style 4).

d. The Signaling Line Circuits shall be power limited.

e. Provide a minimum of 20% spare capacity on each circuit. Size circuit

conductors accordingly.

4. Serial Interfaces: Two RS-232 ports for printers.

G. Elevator Recall:




October 2016

260721 - 11

1. Smoke detectors at the following locations shall initiate automatic elevator

recall. Alarm-initiating devices, except those listed, shall not start elevator

recall.

a. Elevator lobby detectors except the lobby detector on the designated

floor.

b. Smoke detector in elevator machine room.

c. Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway (top of elevator shaft and in the

elevator pit)

2. Elevator lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors shall be

programmed to move the cars to the alternate recall floor.

3. A heat detector alarm and/or a water-flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an

elevator shaft (top of elevator shaft and in the elevator pit) and elevator

machine room shall shut down elevators associated with the location without

time delay.

H. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at

doors in smoke barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.

I. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific

addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and

sensitivity settings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to program

repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector

groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes

in system memory, and print out the final adjusted values on system printer.

J. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm,

supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

K. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events.

Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or

trouble) and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other

printed indications. Also print system reset event, including same information for

device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing

alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.

L. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply

module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals,

supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc

source.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of

the power-supply module rating.

M. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger,

and automatic transfer switch.

1. Batteries shall be sealed and maintenance free.




October 2016

260721 - 12

N. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a

plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation

and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the

functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

O. Digital Alarm Communicator and Transmitter:

1. The panel shall have a dialer (alarm communicator transmitter (DACT))

module to transmit alarm, supervisory and trouble signals to a Central

Monitoring Station (CMS). The DACT shall support dual telephones lines, 20

PPS 4/2 communications, and configured for dual tone multi-frequency

(DTMF) or pulse modes. It shall be possible to delay AC power failure

reports, auto test call, and site program using a touch tone phone and

password.

P. System Printer:

1. The event and status printer shall be a 9-pin, impact, dot matrix printer with a

minimum print speed of 232 characters per second. The printer shall be

capable of serial communications protocol. The printer shall list the time, date,

type and user defined message for each event printed.

Q. Display

1. System Message Processing and Display Operations:

a. The system shall allow message routing to be configured to any or all

annunciators.

b. All system printer port shall be configurable to output any combination

of alarm, supervisory, trouble, or monitor, event messages.

c. Each LCD display on each annunciator shall be configurable to display

the status of any combination of alarm, supervisory, trouble, or

monitor, event messages.

d. Clear distinction shall be provided between alarm, supervisory,

trouble, and monitor status messages.

e. The system shall provide the ability to retrieve data from the

analog/addressable detectors to a PC while the system is on-line and

operational in the protected premises. The uploaded data may then be

analyzed in a diagnostic program supplied by the system manufacturer.

f. A standby power supply shall automatically supply electrical energy to

the system upon primary power supply failure.

R. Reports

1. The system shall provide the operator with system reports that give detailed

chronological description of the last 576 system events. The system shall

provide a report that gives a listing of the sensitivity and environmental

compensation usage of all of the detectors on the system, or specified

analog/addressable circuit.

2. The system report shall also include facility name, compiled date, compiler

revision, project revision and report date. The system shall output these




October 2016

260721 - 13

reports via the main LCD, and reports shall be capable of being printed on the

system printer.

S. Battery backup:

1. The entire fire alarm system shall have a battery backup system. Batteries

shall be sized for 24 hours of standby followed by 15 minutes of alarm.

Provide an additional 20% spare battery capacity on top of that. Where Local

Codes, the Fire Marshal, or the Authority Having Jurisdiction have a longer

battery backup requirement, the longer battery backup requirement shall

apply.

2.04 BOOSTER POWER SUPPLIES

A. The booster supply must incorporate four independent supervised Notification

Appliance Circuits. It shall be possible to configure the NACs to follow the main

panel’s NAC or activate from intelligent Signature Series modules. The booster

NACs must be configurable to operate independently at any one of the following

rates: continuous; 120 SPM; or, 3-3-3 temporal. Fault conditions on the booster shall

not impede alarm activation of host NAC circuits.

B. Fault conditions detected by the power supply shall open the main fire alarm control

panel’s NAC. This initiates a trouble condition and eliminates the need to wire a

separate trouble signal back to the control panel.

C. Power supply shall have an enclosure.

D. Battery backup shall be provided.

E. Booster Power Supplies shall be EST BPS Series with enclosure and battery backup.

2.05 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. Provide analog/addressable single action, single stage fire alarm stations at the

locations shown on the drawings. The fire alarm station shall be of metal

construction and incorporate an internal toggle switch. The station shall be finished in

red with silver "PULL IN CASE OF FIRE" lettering. The manual station shall be

suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½ (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 ½

(38mm) deep 4 square boxes with 1-gang covers.

B. The analog/addressable single action, single stage fire alarm stations shall be EST

model SIGA-270.

2.06 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. Analog Addressable Smoke General




October 2016

260721 - 14

1. Each analog addressable smoke detector's sensitivity shall be capable of being

programmed individually as: most sensitive, more sensitive, normal, less

sensitive or least sensitive.

2. An alternate alarm sensitivity level shall be provided for each detector, which

can be set to any of the five (5) sensitivity settings manually or automatically

using a time of day event.

3. The detector's sensing element reference point shall automatically adjust,

compensating for background environmental conditions such as dust,

temperature, and pressure. Periodically, the sensing element real-time analog

value shall be compared against its reference value. The detector shall

provide a maintenance alert signal that 80% to 99% compensation has been

used. The detector shall provide a dirty fault signal that 100% compensation

has been used.

4. The system shall allow for changing of detector types for service replacement

purposes without the need to reprogram the system. The replacement detector

type shall automatically continue to operate with the same programmed

sensitivity levels and functions as the detector it replaced. System shall

display an off-normal condition until the proper detector type has been

installed or change in the application program profile has been made.

B. Smoke Detector – Photoelectric

1. Smoke detector shall be analog/addressable photoelectric smoke detector type.

2. The system shall have the ability to set the sensitivity and alarm verification

of each of the individual detectors on the circuit. It shall be possible to

automatically change the sensitivity of individual analog/addressable detectors

for the day and night periods. Each smoke detector shall be capable of

transmitting alarm signals as well as normal, trouble and need cleaning

information. It shall be possible to program control panel activity to each

level. Each smoke detector may be individually programmed to operate at

any one of five (5) sensitivity settings. Each detector microprocessor shall

contain an environmental compensation algorithm that identifies and sets

ambient environmental thresholds approximately six times an hour. The

microprocessor shall monitor the environmental compensation value and alert

the system operator when the detector approaches 80% and 100% of the

allowable environmental compensation value.

3. The analog/addressable photoelectric smoke detector shall be an EST model

SIGA-PS.

C. Duct Detector Housing

1. Provide smoke detector duct housing assemblies to mount an

analog/addressable detector along with a standard, relay or isolator detector

mounting base. The housing shall also protect the measuring chamber from

damage and insects. The housing shall utilize an air exhaust tube and an air

sampling inlet tube that extends into the duct air stream up to ten feet.

Drilling templates and gaskets to facilitate locating and mounting the housing

shall also be provided. The housing shall be finished in baked red enamel.




October 2016

260721 - 15

2. A remote key-operated test station with built-in alarm LED indicator shall be

provided for each duct smoke detector.

3. The smoke detector duct housing shall be an EST model SIGA-DH.

2.07 SYSTEM HEAT DETECTORS

A. Heat detector shall be analog/addressable combination fixed temperature / rate-of-rise

detector type.

B. The heat detector shall have a nominal fixed temperature alarm point rating of 135°F

(57°C) and a rate of rise alarm point of 15°F(9°C) per minute. The heat detector shall

be rated for ceiling installation at a minimum of 70 ft (21.3m) centers and be suitable

for wall mount applications.

C. The analog/addressable combination fixed temperature / rate-of-rise detector shall be

EST model SIGA-HRS.

2.08 DETECTOR BASES

A. Provide standard detector mounting bases suitable for mounting on either North

American 1-gang, 3½ or 4 inch octagon box and 4 inch square box, or European

BESA or 1-gang box. The base shall, contain no electronics and support all series

detector types.

B. The standard detector base shall be an EST model SIGA-SB.

2.09 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General (signals)

1. All appliances which are supplied for the requirements of this specification

shall be UL Listed for Fire Protective Service, and shall be capable of

providing the "equivalent facilitation" which is allowed under the Americans

with Disabilities Act Accessabilities Guidelines (ADA(AG)), and shall be UL

1971 Listed.

2. All notification appliances shall be red unless noted otherwise on the

drawings.

3. The word “FIRE” shall be engraved on the devices.

4. Provide weatherproof devices where indicated on the drawings.

5. Weatherproof devices shall be suitable for use in -35 degree Fahrenheit

temperature.

B. Horns

1. The horn shall have a minimum of 3 switch selectable settings for dBA levels.

Horn shall be UL Listed under Standard 464.

C. Strobes




October 2016

260721 - 16

1. Strobes shall provide synchronized flash output, that shall be switch selectable

for output values of 15cd, 15/75cd, 30cd, 75cd and 110cd. Candela settings

shall be visible with the cover installed. When the cover is installed, no

mounting hardware shall be visible. In and out screw terminals shall be

provided for all wiring.

D. Horn-Strobe

1. The combination device shall consist of a horn and a strobe.

a. The horn shall have a minimum of 3 switch selectable settings for dBA

levels. Horn shall be UL Listed under Standard 464.

b. Strobes shall provide synchronized flash output, that shall be switch

selectable for output values of 15cd, 15/75cd, 30cd, 75cd and 110cd.

Candela settings shall be visible with the cover installed. When the

cover is installed, no mounting hardware shall be visible. In and out

screw terminals shall be provided for all wiring.

E. Protective Cover for horns, strobes, horn-strobes, and speakers

1. Protective cover shall be Safety Technology International, Inc Model # STI-

1210 series (for devices that are audible or audible/visual) or Model # STI-

1221 series (for devices that are visual only) with the following features:

a. Molded of clear, thick, UV-stabilized polycarbonate material

b. Backed by a 3 year guarantee against breakage in normal use

c. UL Listed

d. UL Listed for fire voice speakers (STI-1210 series only)

e. With slots to allow the audible devices to be heard (STI-1210 series

only)

f. ADA compliant

g. Provide backbox and other accessories as required

2. Compatibility

a. Provide horns, strobes, horn-strobes, and speakers that have been

tested with the protective cover. Light loss derating factor based on

actual test shall not exceed 61%.

2.10 INITIATION AND CONTROL MODULES

A. Intelligent Modules – General

1. It shall be possible to address each intelligent module without the use of DIP

or rotary switches. Devices using DIP switches for addressing shall not be

acceptable. The personality of multifunction modules shall be programmable

at site to suit conditions and may be changed at any time using a personality

code downloaded from the Analog Loop Controller. Modules requiring

EPROM, PROM, ROM changes or DIP switch and/or jumper changes shall

not be acceptable. The modules shall have a minimum of 2 diagnostic LEDs

mounted behind a finished cover plate. A green LED shall flash to confirm

communication with the loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display

alarm status. The module shall be capable of storing up to 24 diagnostic




October 2016

260721 - 17

codes which can be retrieved for troubleshooting assistance. Input and output

circuit wiring shall be supervised for open and ground faults. The module

shall be suitable for operation in the following environment:

a. Temperature: 32oF to 120oF (0oC to 49oC)

b. Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing

B. Control Relay Module

1. The Control Relay Module shall provide one form "C" dry relay contact rated

at 2 amps @ 24 Vdc (0.5 amps at 120VAC) to control external appliances or

equipment shutdown. The control relay shall be rated for pilot duty and

releasing systems. The position of the relay contact shall be confirmed by the

system firmware. The control relay module shall be suitable for mounting on

North American 2 ½" (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 ½" (38mm) deep 4"

square boxes with 1-gang covers.

2. The addressable control relay circuit module shall be an EST model SIGA-

CR.

C. Dual Input Module

1. The Dual Input Module shall provide two (2) supervised Class B input circuits

each capable of a minimum of 4 personalities, each with a distinct operation.

The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½" (64mm)

deep 1-gang boxes and 1 ½" (38mm) deep 4" square boxes with 1-gang

covers. The dual input module shall support the following circuit types:

a. Normally-Open Alarm Latching (Manual Stations, Heat Detectors,

etc.)

b. Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching (Waterflow Switches)

c. Normally-Open Active Non-Latching (Monitor, Fans, Dampers,

Doors, etc.)

d. Normally-Open Active Latching (Supervisory, Tamper Switches

2. The intelligent dual input module shall be an EST model SIGA-CT2.

D. Isolator Module

1. The Isolator Module shall be capable of isolating and removing a fault from a

class A data circuit while allowing the remaining data loop to continue

operating. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2

½" (64mm) deep 2-gang boxes and 1 ½" (38mm) deep 4" square boxes with

2-gang covers, or European 100mm square boxes.

2. The intelligent fault isolator module shall be an EST model SIGA-IM.

E. Single Input Module

1. The Single Input Module shall provide one (1) supervised Class B input

circuit capable of a minimum of 4 personalities, each with a distinct operation.

The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½" (64mm)

deep 1-gang boxes and 1 ½" (38mm) deep 4" square boxes with 1-gang

covers. The single input module shall support the following circuit types:




October 2016

260721 - 18

a. Normally-Open Alarm Latching (Manual Stations, Heat Detectors,

etc.)

b. Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching (Waterflow Switches)

c. Normally-Open Active Non-Latching (Monitor, Fans, Dampers,

Doors, etc.)

d. Normally-Open Active Latching (Supervisory, Tamper Switches)

2. The intelligent single input module shall be an EST model SIGA-CT1.

F. Single Input Signal Module

1. The Single Input (Single Riser Select) Signal Module shall provide one (1)

supervised Class B output circuit capable of a minimum of 2 personalities,

each with a distinct operation. When selected as a telephone power selector,

the module shall be capable of generating its own "ring tone". The module

shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½" (64mm) deep 2-gang

boxes and 1 ½" (38mm) deep 4" square boxes with 2-gang covers, or

European 100mm square boxes. The single input signal module shall support

the following operations:

a. Audible/Visible Signal Power Selector (Polarized 24 Vdc @ 2A,

25Vrms @50w or 70 Vrms @ 35 Watts of Audio)

b. Telephone Power Selector with Ring Tone (Fire Fighter's Telephone)

2. The intelligent single input signal module shall be an EST model SIGA-CC1.

G. Dual Input Signal Module

1. The Dual Input (Dual Riser Select) Signal Module shall provide two (2)

supervised Class B output circuits capable of a minimum of 2 personalities,

each with a distinct operation. When selected as a telephone power selector,

the module shall be capable of generating its own "ring tone". The module

shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½" (64mm) deep 2-gang

boxes and 1 ½" (38mm) deep 4" square boxes with 2-gang covers, or

European 100mm square boxes. The dual input signal module shall support

the following operations:

a. Audible/Visible Signal Power Selector (Polarized 24 Vdc @ 2A,

25Vrms @50w or 70 Vrms @ 35 Watts of Audio)

b. Telephone Power Selector with Ring Tone (Fire Fighter's Telephone)

2. The intelligent single input signal module shall be an EST model SIGA-CC2.

H. Multi-Voltage Control Relay

1. The relay is encapsulated multi-voltage device providing 10 amp form C

contacts. The relay may be energized by one of three input voltages: 24VAC,

24VDC or 115VAC.

2. The relay shall support the following operations:

a. To be provided as required to switch larger currents that cannot be

handled by other devices.

b. To monitor 24VDC voltage.

3. The relay shall be EST model PAM-1.




October 2016

260721 - 19

2.11 LCD TYPE REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL

A. LCD shall have 4 lines of 20 characters per line. Display shall be capable of

supporting custom messages as well as system event annunciation.

B. Annunciator shall have the following:

1. Enable/Disable Key-Switch: Either the ENABLE or DISABLE mode may be

configured to enable or disable any combination of the front panel REST,

ALARM SILENCE, TROUBLE SILENCE and DRILL/ALLCALL switches.

2. Reset Switch: System-wide reset

3. Alarm Silence Switch: System-wide alarm silence

4. Trouble Silence Switch: Silences the local trouble buzzer after all messages

have been acknowledged

5. Drill/All Call Switch: Issue system-wide drill command.

6. Lamp Test Switch

C. In addition to the LCD, the annunciator shall have the following indicators:

1. Normal LED

2. Alarm LED

3. Trouble LED

4. Supervisory LED

5. Local buzzer

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Provide booster power supplies as required or as indicated. Field install circuit

breakers as required to provide power to the power supplies. Provide branch circuit

wiring (2#12 & #12G in 1/2” conduit, minimum) to feed power to the power supply.

Install power supplies in an accessible location that is fully sprinkled. If the location

is not fully sprinkled, provide an addressable smoke detector above the power supply.

Do not install power supply above the ceiling.

B. Fire Alarm System shall be UL Certified. Cost for UL Certification shall be paid for

by the Contractor.

C. If the booster or audio power supplies are located in unsprinklered spaces, provide

smoke detectors above the power supplies whether or not the smoke detectors are

shown on the plan drawings.

D. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.

E. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above

the finished floor.




October 2016

260721 - 20

F. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the

"Initiating Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the

"Initiating Devices" Chapter, for heat-detector spacing.

3. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or

return-air opening.

4. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of

a lighting fixture.

G. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling

tubes so they extend the full width of duct.

H. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with

sprinkler rating and location. Comply with NFPA 72.

I. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each

sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from

normal viewing position.

J. Circuit disconnecting means (circuit breaker) for the Fire Alarm Control Panel shall

have a red marking, and shall be identified as “FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT”.

K. Circuit disconnecting means (circuit breaker) for the Fire Alarm power supplies and

other fire alarm system components that require 120VAC shall have a red marking,

and shall be identified as “FIRE ALARM - XXX”, where “XXX” is the description

of the equipment.

L. The location of the circuit disconnecting means (circuit breaker) feeding the Fire

Alarm Control Panel shall be permanently identified at the Fire Alarm Control Panel.

M. All strobes shall flash in synchronization. Provide synchronization modules as

required.

N. Install horns and strobes such that the horns can be silenced without affecting the

strobes.

O. Alarm silence shall only be possible through key operation by authorized personnel.

The alarm silence feature may be inhibited through programming. Coordinate with

the Fire Marshall for program requirements.

3.02 CONNECTIONS

A. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled unless

otherwise noted. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback

is available at the device or system being controlled.




October 2016

260721 - 21

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with

requirements for identification specified in Specification Section "Electrical

Identification."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

C. Identify each cable segment between devices with a unique number corresponding to

the address of the device.

D. Junction box covers shall be painted red.

E. Fire alarms cables shall be red in color.

3.04 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100.

Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations,

including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations,

including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system

documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion

Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the

"Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.

b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the

"Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"

Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list

only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section

of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.




October 2016

260721 - 22

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-

level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to


5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to


6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm

System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the

"Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the

"Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection,

Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

7. Using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in

ANSI S1.4, field verify that the measured sound level (during a fire alarm

condition) in each room, space or area complies ADA and NFPA 72

requirements. Record the measured sound level in each room, space or area,

and indicate if it complies with ADA and NFPA 72 requirements. If it does

not comply, provide written recommendations in order to fix the deficiency.

E. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and

inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.

B. The System Supplier shall schedule and present a minimum of 8 hours of documented

formalized instruction for the building owner, detailing the proper operation of the

installed System.

C. The instruction shall be presented in an organized and professional manner by a

person factory trained in the operation and maintenance of the equipment and who is

also thoroughly familiar with the installation.

D. The instruction shall cover the schedule of maintenance required by NFPA 72 and

any additional maintenance recommended by the system manufacturer.

E. Instruction shall be made available to the Local Municipal Fire Department if

requested by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications TELEPHONE AND DATA CABLING



October 2016 260770 - 1

SECTION 260770

TELEPHONE AND DATA CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. All hardware, wiring, cabling, devices, equipment and accessories for complete and

fully operational Telephone and Data Systems shall be furnished and installed by the

Contractor. Coordinate all work with the owner. All work shall comply with the

manufacturer’s recommendations and code requirements.

B. Contractor shall furnish and install cables from IT to each data/telephone outlet.

Contactor shall provide conduit (1” minimum) from outlet to the accessible ceiling

space, and provide outlet boxes, jacks and keystones, cover plates and accessories., and

final connections to outlets. Contractor shall coordinate with owner for

1. Terminations cables at the IT closet

2. Color and types: jack and keystones, cover plates

3. Identification labels for data/telephone outlets

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

C. LAN: Local area network.

D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.

E. STP: Shielded twisted pair.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

G. UL: Underwriter’s Laboratories




October 2016 260770 - 2

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include data on features, ratings, and performance for each component

specified.

B. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of each individual

component. Show equipment assemblies, method of field assembly, workspace

requirements, and access for cable connections.

1. System labeling schedules, including electronic copy of labeling schedules, as

specified in Part 3, in software and format selected by Owner.

2. Wiring diagrams. Show typical wiring schematics including the following:

a. Workstation outlets, jacks, and jack assemblies.

b. Cross-Connect Panel

C. Cable Schedule: As specified in Part 3.

D. Cable Administration Drawings: As specified in Part 3.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For telephone and data communication cabling to

include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

G. Installer Qualifications.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain all products except twisted-pair cables through one source

from a single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,

and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall provide a minimum of 5 similar projects of equal

or greater size and scope within the last 2 years. Provide references and phone numbers.


A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission

standards in TIA/EIA-568-B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this

standard.




October 2016 260770 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Belden Inc.; Electronics Division.

b. Berk-Tek; an Alcatel Company.

c. Brand-Rex Co.; Unit of BICC Cables Corp.

d. Champlain Cable Corporation.

e. Chromatic Technologies, Incorporated.

f. General Cable Corporation.

g. HeLix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.

h. ICC.

i. Lucent Technologies; Global Service Provider.

j. Mohawk/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.

k. Montrose/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.

l. Optical Cable Corporation.

m. Panduit Corp.

n. Prestolite Wire Corp.

o. Remee Products Corp.

2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an integrated

system. Match components and interconnections for optimum future performance.

B. Expansion Capability: Unless otherwise indicated, provide spare conductor pairs in

cables, positions in cross-connect, and terminal strips to accommodate 20 percent future

increase in active workstations.

2.3 CABLES FOR DATA/TELEPHONE SERVICE

A. Data cable:

1. 4 pair category 5e cable: comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. plenum rated, four,

insulated, individually twisted pair of conductors: No. 24 AWG, color-coded;

enclosed in overall jacket. Cable shall be BLUE in color typically (coordinate

exact cable color with owner). Cable shall be listed as complying with Category

5e copper conductor.




October 2016 260770 - 4

2.4 CONNECTORS AND TERMINAL EQUIPMENT FOR DATA SERVICE

A. UTP Patch Panel: modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type

connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

1. Use Category 5e patch panels.

2. Number of Jack per Field: one for each four-pair UTP cable, plus 50% spare

capacity.

3. Mounting: data rack in main IT frame: coordinate IT main frame locations with

owner.

4. Provide 6’ patch cords, two per each jack that is connected to a workstation outlet

to IP telephone, telephone to computer.

5. Provide patch cords for between data patch panels and network switches at the IT

rack. Cords lengths shall be depended on distance between panels and switches.

B. Jacks and Jack Assemblies for UTP Cable: Modular, color-coded, RJ-45 receptacle

units with integral IDC-type terminals. Coordinate MDTA color-code with MDTA.

C. Workstation Outlets: two (2) port outlet assemblies mounted in single. Use one (1) of

2 ports for data another for spare with a blank module. Each office requires two outlets.

See drawings for detail requirements.

1. Faceplate: High-impact plastic; color as selected by Architect.

2. Mounting: Flush, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Legend: Provide labels per indicated on the drawings and owner’s requirements.

Coordinate with owner.

2.5 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Specification Section "Grounding and Bonding" for

grounding conductors and connectors.

2.6 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with Specification Section "Electrical Identification" and the following:

1. Cable Labels: Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth wraparound tape markers,

machine printed with alphanumeric cable designations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways, cable trays, and other

elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable




October 2016 260770 - 5

installation, and other conditions affecting installation. Proceed with installation only

after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and 568-B.2.

B. All wall and floor penetrations shall be sleeved. All conduit and sleeve ends must have

bushings to prevent chafing. Where a conduit or other through-penetration device is

installed through a fire rated assembly, the opening around the sleeve and the hole

through the sleeve shall be sealed with an Underwriters Laboratory approved fire rated

sealant material after the cables have been installed.

C. Terminate conductors: no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make

terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.

D. Cables shall have a minimum separation of 12” from 120V, 208V, 277V or 480V power

wiring. Cable shall have a minimum separation of 12” form lighting fixtures.

E. Install cables without damaging conductors or jacket.

F. Do not bend cables, in handling or in installing, to smaller radii than minimums

recommended by manufacturer.

G. Pull cables without exceeding cable manufacturer’s recommended pulling tensions.

1. Pull cables simultaneously if more than one is being installed in same raceway.

2. Use pulling compound or lubricant if necessary. Use compounds that will not

damage conductor or insulation.

3. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire or

cable grips, that will not damage media or raceway.

4. Monitor cable pulling tensions.

H. Install cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or structural members and follow

surface contours where possible.

I. Wiring within wiring closets and enclosure: provide conductors of adequate length.

Train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Use lacing bars to restrain cables,

to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than

minimums recommended by manufacturer.

J. Separation of wires: comply with TIA/EIA-566-A rules for separating unshielded

copper communication cabling form potential EMI sources, including electrical power

lines and equipment.

K. Make splices, taps, and terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-

connect panels.




October 2016 260770 - 6

L. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable

between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged

during installation and replace it with new cable.

M. In the communications equipment room, install a 5-foot-long service loop on each end

of cable.

N. Cable support inside wiring closets, telecommunications closet, data closets:

1. Provide cable ties and cable tie mounts to support the horizontal and backbone

cabling form the plywood board. Provide cable ties every 6”.

2. Cable tie mount shall be manufactured by Panduit or approval equal and shall use

galvanized steel screws as the mounting method. Cable tie mount shall be UL

Recognized.

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Comply with Specification Section "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to

minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other

impairments.

3.4 INSTALLATION IN EQUIPMENT ROOMS AND WIRING CLOSETS

A. Install patch panels, terminal strips, and other connecting hardware on the data rack,


B. All installations in equipment rooms, IT frames, and wiring closets shall be coordinated

with owner prior to installation.

3.5 INSTALLATION STANDARDS

A. Comply with requirements in TIA/EIA-568-A and TIA/EIA-569-A.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. In addition to requirements in this Article, comply with applicable requirements in

Specification Section "Electrical Identification".

B. Workstation Outlet: Label each jack at the outlet. Jack label shall match the cable label

at the patch panel and/or punch block.

C. Within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each

connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where




October 2016 260770 - 7

similar jacks and plugs are used for both telephone and data communication cabling,

use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.

D. Cables, General: Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it

is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.

E. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet.

List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations.

Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish a hardcopy and electronic copy

of final comprehensive schedules for Project, in software and format selected by Owner.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections for all cabling and connections, and

prepare test reports:

1. Category 5e UTP cable tests:

a. Tests shall include all tests of Category 5e conducted from 1 to 250 Mhz.

b. Performance shall comply with minimum criteria in TiA/EIA-568-B.2.

2. Final verification tests: perform verification tests for cabling after complete

communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.

a. Coordinate with the owner’s Information Technology Staff. Connect to the

network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to

ensure proper connection to the network.

B. Submit documentation of all cable testing to the owner in a 3-ring binder, USB and CD.

C. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.

D. Do not cover ceiling and wall until testing is complete

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Panelboards



October 2016

262416 - 1

SECTION 262416

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.02 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards.

2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

C. MCB: Main Circuit Breaker

D. KAIC: Thousand Ampere Interrupting Capacity

E. Branch Breaker: A circuit breaker at a panelboard, that is located on the loadside of

the Main Circuit Breaker or Main Lugs of that panelboard.

F. NEC: National Electrical Code

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective

device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated.

Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance,

electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations

of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual

overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.




October 2016

262416 - 2

6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of

overcurrent protective device included in panelboards.

C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after

load balancing.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in

Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent

protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent

protective device that allows adjustments.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components,

and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.



application.

C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install

temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and

weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above

panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and

maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels

during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions.




October 2016

262416 - 3

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other

construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and

other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance

requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and

required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Enclosures: Flush- or surface-mounted cabinets, as indicated on the drawings.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. See drawings for

NEMA 250 enclosure type.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted

fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Finishes: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating

with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime

coat and thermosetting topcoat.

4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with

transparent protective cover.

B. Phase and Neutral, Buses:

1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum, unless otherwise noted

C. Ground Buses:

1. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment

grounding conductors; bonded to box.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.

2. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.

E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary

appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating:

1. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at

terminals, unless otherwise noted.

2.02 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS



to, the following:




October 2016

262416 - 4

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.

2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical

Distribution.

3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without

disturbing adjacent units.

D. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.03 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES

A. SPDs: Comply with UL 1449, Type 1.

B. Same manufacturer as panelboard.

C. SPDs: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as

complying with UL 1449, Type 1.

1. SPDs with the following features and accessories:

a. Integral disconnect switch.

b. Internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal

suppressor components.

c. Indicator light display for protection status.

d. Contacts shall reverse on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening

of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and

control system.

e. Surge counter.

D. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per

phase shall not be less than 200 kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic

sum of the ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode.

E. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V, three-

phase, four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V for 208Y/120V.

2. Line to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120V.

3. Line to Line: 800 V for 208Y/120V.

F. SCCR: Equal or exceed 120 kA.

G. Nominal Rating: 20 kA.




October 2016

262416 - 5

2.04 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES



to, the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.

2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical

Distribution.


4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting

capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-

level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.

Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and

larger.

2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A

ground-fault protection (5-mA trip).

3. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and

conductor materials.

c. Application Listing: Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting

loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating

equipment;

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with

adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and

ground-fault indicator.

e. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to

operate as a single unit.

f. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-

breaker handle in off position.

g. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle

in on position.

h. Trip-free mechanism: allows breaker to trip even with the handle

locked or held in the ON position.

i. Circuit breakers shall be suitable for reverse feed.

4. Circuit breaker short circuit rating shall not be less than 10,000 amperes for

120V, 208V, or 240V circuit breakers.




October 2016

262416 - 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or

rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Mount panelboard at one of the following mounting heights, whichever is lower,

unless otherwise indicated on the drawings:

1. Mount top of trim of the panelboard at 90 inches above finished floor or

grade.

2. Mount panelboard such that the top-most breaker is not higher than 74 inches

above finished floor or grade.

C. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed

panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

F. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after

completing load balancing.

G. Comply with NECA 1.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs complying with Specification Section "Electrical Identification."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads;

incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use

a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not

acceptable.




October 2016

262416 - 7

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with

requirements for identification specified in Specification Section "Electrical

Identification."

D. Service Equipment Label: Service equipment shall be NRTL labeled for use as

service equipment.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as

recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges.

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.

2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working

schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour

services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing,

transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all

load readings before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a

panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet

this minimum requirement.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Wiring Devices



October 2016

262726 - 1

SECTION 262726

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.02 SUMMARY


1. Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault circuit interrupters.

2. Single- and double-pole snap switches.

3. Device wall plates.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.

C. Heavy Duty Grade: Industrial Grade

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device through one source from a

single manufacturer.




C. Comply with NFPA 70.




October 2016

262726 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS



to, the following:

1. Wiring Devices:

a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.

b. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.

c. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.

2.02 RECEPTACLES

A. Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6,

DSCC W-C-596G, and UL 498.

B. Straight-Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy-Duty grade.

C. GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, feed-through type with feed-through capacity

equal to the ampere rating of the receptacle; heavy-duty grade, with ground fault

protection, test and reset pushbuttons; NEMA WD 6, duplex receptacle; Complies

with UL 498 and UL 943. Design units for installation in a 2 3/4-inch-deep outlet

box without an adapter.

2.03 SWITCHES

A. Single- and Double-Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C-896F and UL 20.

B. Snap Switches: Heavy-Duty grade, quiet type.

2.04 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Stainless steel screws.

2. Material for Switches and Receptacles in Dry Locations: 0.035-inch-thick,

satin-finished stainless steel, unless otherwise noted.

3. Material for Receptacles in Wet Locations and Outdoors, or where the

drawings indicate that the receptacle cover shall be weatherproof:

a. Cast aluminum construction.

b. Mounting screws and gaskets included for fast, easy installation onto

surface mounted outdoor type boxes or flush-mounted wall boxes.

c. Weatherproof while-in-unattended use with cover closed and plug

inserted.

d. Cover shall have provisions for padlocks.

4. Material for Switches in Wet Locations and Outdoors, or where the drawings

indicate that the switch cover shall be weatherproof:




October 2016

262726 - 3

a. Cast aluminum construction

b. Mounting screws and gaskets included for fast, easy installation onto

surface-mounted outdoor type boxes or flush-mounted wall boxes.

c. Cover shall have provisions for padlocks.

d. Suitable for use in wet locations.

e. Switch cover shall be O-Z/Gedney FS-1-WSCA for single gang boxes

and FS-2-WSCA for two gang boxes, or approved equal.

2.05 FINISHES

A. Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Brown, unless

otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines.

B. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long

dimension vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group

adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

C. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place

wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with

routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement,

concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway

system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not

cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting.

D. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or

terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the

purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from

stranded wire.

E. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or

that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations

were complete.




October 2016

262726 - 4

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time

to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers,

until the last possible moment.

4. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the

manufacturer.

5. When conductors larger than No. 10 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A

circuits, splice No. 10 AWG pigtails for device connections.

6. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.

7. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to

hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and

remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover

rough wall opening.

3.02 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Specification Section "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Connect wiring according to Specification Section "Conductors and Cables."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published





1. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been

energized, test for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with

requirements.

2. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to


B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers



October 2016

262816 - 1

SECTION 262816

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this

Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches and

circuit breakers:

1. Fusible switches.

2. Nonfusible switches.

3. Enclosed molded-case circuit breakers.

4. Enclosures.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

B. GD: General duty.

C. HD: Heavy duty.

D. RMS: Root mean square.

E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

F. HVAC: Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and

component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and

manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics,

ratings, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Current and voltage ratings.

3. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.




October 2016

262816 - 2

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to

include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items

specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the

following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches

and circuit breakers.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit

breaker.







A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the

following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104

deg F.

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with

other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces.

Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment

access doors and panels.

1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing

contents.

1. Spares: For the following:

a. Fuses for Fusible Switches:

1) Provide 3 spare fuses for each fused switch rated 100A and

higher.

2) Provide 10% spare fuses for fuses rated less than 100A.




October 2016

262816 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements

apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,


include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2.02 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Available Manufacturers:

1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.

2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.


4. Square D/Group Schneider.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, lockable handle with

capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Type GD, General Duty Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type GD, lockable handle with

capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Provisions for padlocks: Fusible and non-fusible switches shall include provisions for

being padlocked in the open or closed position.

E. Fusible switches shall be suitable for use with Class R fuses unless otherwise noted

and except as follows:

1. Provide fusible switches with Class J fuses where indicated on the drawings.

2. Provide fusible switches with Class L or Class T fuses where indicated on the

drawings.

F. Fusible switches shall have clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses.

G. Short circuit rating of Type GD Fusible Switches when used with Class R or Class T

fuses shall not be less than 100,000A.

H. Short circuit rating of Type HD Fusible Switches when used with Class R, Class J, or

Class L fuses shall not be less than 200,000A.

I. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

J. Shunt trip safety switch:

1. UL listed heavy duty safety switch with integrated shunt trip module.

2. Visible means of disconnect – visible blade




October 2016

262816 - 4

3. 480V, 3-pole, 200A fusible disconnect. Provide fuses per elevator

manufacturer requirements.

4. NEMA 1 enclosure.

5. Provide step down transformer as required.

6. Class J or L fuses.

7. Eaton #STS-3-6-200-F-D-120-3-J/L or approval equal.

K. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and

aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded, and

bonded; and labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Auxiliary set of contacts arranged to open before

switch blades open.

2.03 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed

location. See drawings for NEMA 250 enclosure type.

2.04 IDENTIFICATION

A. Service Equipment Label: Service equipment shall be UL labeled for use as service

equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Fusible and Nonfusible Switches shall be Type GD, General Duty Switches, unless

otherwise noted and except as follows:

1. Type HD, Heavy Duty Switches shall be provided if ANY of the following

conditions apply:

a. Where the voltage rating of the switch exceeds 240VAC;

b. Where Class J fuses are specified;

c. Where NEMA 4X enclosures are specified;

d. Where a key switch, auxiliary contact, or electrical interlock is

required;

e. Where the ampere rating of the switch exceeds 600A; OR

f. Where indicated on the drawings.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for

compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.




October 2016

262816 - 5


3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for

installation of enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

B. Mount individual wall-mounting switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform

height, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor floor-mounting switches to concrete base.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and

brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Provide UL Listed fuse reducers as required

3.04 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs as specified in Specification Section "Electrical Identification."

B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure as specified in Specification Section

"Electrical Identification."

C. On completion of installation, vacuum dirt and debris from interiors; do not use

compressed air to assist in cleaning.

D. Inspect exposed surfaces and repair damaged finishes.

END OF SECTION

WTPFM – Facilities Modifications LED Interior Lighting



October 2016

265119 - 1

SECTION 265119

LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.02 SUMMARY


1. Interior solid-state luminaires that use LED technology.

2. Lighting fixture supports.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Retain terms that remain after this Section has been edited for a project.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

D. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

E. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

F. LED: Light-emitting diode.

G. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

H. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.



1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.

2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.

3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires.

4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers.

5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data.

6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying

with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing and Calculation Guides, of each

lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps and accessories




October 2016

265119 - 2

identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project, IES

LM-79 and IES LM-80.

a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by

manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the

National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy

Efficient Lighting Products.

b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric

data certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric

data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.

2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and

size of each field connection.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on

Drawings.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on

which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input

from installers of the items involved:

1. Lighting luminaires.

2. Suspended ceiling components.

B. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from

manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on

actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity

and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

D. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is

based and their installation requirements.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire.

F. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire, for tests performed by a qualified testing

agency.

G. Sample warranty.




October 2016

265119 - 3


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in

operation and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers'

codes.



protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. At

least 10 percent spare luminaires shall be provided.

1. Lamps: Ten for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least

one of each type.

2. Diffusers and Lenses: Ten for every 100 of each type and rating installed.

Furnish at least one of each type.

3. Globes and Guards: two for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish

at least one of each type.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire

manufacturer's laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient

Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an

independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing

indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under

the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products, and complying with the

applicable IES testing standards.

C. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.

D. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure

color consistency among luminaires.


A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective

covering before shipping.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of

luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.




October 2016

265119 - 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions

determined according to ASCE/SEI 7

B. Seismic Performance: Luminaires and lamps shall be labeled vibration and shock

resistant.

1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without

separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the

luminaire will be fully operational during and after the seismic event."

2.02 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on

drawings.

2.03 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS



application.

B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for

indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL.

C. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and

labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

D. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4.

E. Luminaires have LED modules and associated drivers. LED modules and associated

drivers shall be fully compatible with control devices and room lighting control units.

F. Luminaires shall have 0-10-volt linear dimming LED diming.

G. Luminaires shall be 100 percent fully compatible with sensors and relays which are

controlling the luminaires.

H. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C79.1.

I. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1.

J. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 4100 K, unless otherwise noted on drawings.

K. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours.




October 2016

265119 - 5

L. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.

M. Internal driver.

N. Nominal Operating Voltage: multi-voltage 120/277 V ac.

1. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise

indicated.

O. Housings:

1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink.

2.04 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.

3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage

under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools.

Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from

falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

C. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to

yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.

D. Housings:

1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink.

E. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate

labels where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from

normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.

b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating.

c. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.05 METAL FINISHES

A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of

adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved

Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.




October 2016

265119 - 6

2.06 LUMINAIRE FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"

for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and

ceiling canopy. Finish same as luminaire. At the salt barn, use PVC coated steel

tubing.

C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68

mm).

D. Rod Hangers: 1/4-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and

equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of

the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and

electrical connections before fixture installation. Proceed with installation only after

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary

lighting. When construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for

temporary lighting and install new lamps.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.

2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping.




October 2016

265119 - 7

3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall.

4. Luminaire mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force

of 100 percent of luminaire weight and vertical force of 400 percent of

luminaire weight.

E. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Secured to outlet box.

2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around

circumference of luminaire.

3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.

F. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Attached to structural members in walls.

2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.

G. Ceiling-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Ceiling mount with four-point pendant mount with 5/32-inch- (4-mm-)

diameter aircraft cable supports.

2. Ceiling mount with hook mount.

H. Suspended Luminaire Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit

swinging.

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.

Support with approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide

damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building

structure using approved devices.

3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point

and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis,

including one at each end.

4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support

wires or rods to building structure.

I. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:

1. Secure to any required outlet box.

2. Secure luminaire to the luminaire opening using approved fasteners in a

minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.

3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling

grid and building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near

corners of luminaire.

3.04 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with

requirements for identification specified in Section "Identification for Electrical

Systems."




October 2016

265119 - 8


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and

after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper

operation.

2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper

operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer

to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and

inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.06 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires

to suit occupied conditions. Make up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal

hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness.

1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps or luminaires

that are defective.

2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and

supplies.

3. Adjust the aim of luminaires in the presence of the Architect.

PART 4 - END OF SECTION

9030 Stony Point Parkway, Suite 220, Richmond, VA 23235